The problem of method

GIFT OF

H.B.Wilson

•V

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

CHAPTER I.

Page.

THE ESSENTIAL IDEA OF METHOD. 6

CHAPTER II.

THE DIFFICULTY OF THE PROBLEM. 8

CHAPTER III.

THE REAL PROVINCE OF METHOD. 16

Indistinctness as to Scope 16

Ground of the Indistinctness 16

Objective Method 17

Subjective Method 20

CHAPTER IV.

SPECIAL METHOD. 26

CHAPTER V.

VARIOUS USES OF THE TERM METHOD. 40

Mode of Considering Any Use of the Term 40-47

General Meanings 48

Popular Meanings 49-63

Educational Meanings 63-87

Pedagogical Meanings 87-119

CHAPTER VI.

METHOD IN A BRANCH OF STUDY. 120

The Essential Features of Organization in a Branch of Study . 120-121

Method in Composition 121

Organizing Principle 121

The Scope 121

The Divisions 121

The Relative Importance of the Divisions 122

The Psychological Process of the Learner 122-128

The Mental Effects Produced by Composition 129-130

677891

ii. . TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Page

The Devices in Composition 130

The Course of Study in Composition 130-152

First and Second Grades 130-135

Third Grade 135-138

Fourth Grade » . 138-142

Fifth Grade 143-147

Sixth Grade 147-152

Special Devices or Means 152

CHAPTER VII.

METHOD IN A WESSON 153

The Essential Elements 158

The Principle Underlying the Wesson — Self-determination . . 154

Its Stages • • • 154-155

The Objectifying Process 155-157

The Subjectifying Process 157-285

The General Nature of Knowing 158-176

Analysis of the Process of Knowing 177-235

Presentation 177

Idea of 177

Sense-Perception . • • • 177-181

Sensing 178

Perceiving 179

Apperceiving 179-180

Pedagogical Principles Implicit in Perception 180

Representation 181-199

Idea of 181-182

Memory 182-189

Spontaneous Memory 182-184

Voluntary Memory 184-186

Systematic Memory 186-188

Development over Sense-perception .... 188-189

Pedagogical Principles Implicit in Memory . 188-189

Imagination 189-195

Mechanical Imagination 189-190

Reproductive Imagination (Separative) 190-191

Creative Imagination 191-193

Development over Memory 193-194

Pedagogical Principles Implicit in Imagination . 194-195

The Language Activity 195-199

TABLE OF CONTENTS. iii.

Page

The Productive Language Act 196-197

The Interpretative Language Act 197-198

Development over Imagination 198-199

Pedagogical Principles Implicit in the Lan-
guage Activity 199

Thought 199-232

The Understanding 199-206

Apprehension 201

Distinction 201

Classification 201-202

Examples of These Three Processes 202-205

Development over the Language Activity . . . 205-206
Pedagogical Principles Implicit in the Activity of

Understanding 206

Ratiocination 206

Forms 206-232

Conception 206-215

Development over the Understanding 214

Pedagogical Principles Implicit in Conception . 214-215

Judgment 215-228

General Nature 215-216

Forms or Classes 216-218

Relation of the Particular to the General .... 218-220

Relation to the Other Processes of Knowing . . 220-221

Development from Conception 221

Development over Conception 221

Pedagogical Principles Implicit in Judgment . . 222-223

Reasoning 223-232

General Nature 223-224

Forms ' 224-232

Identification 224

Induction 224-228

Development over Judgment 227

Pedagogical Principles Implicit in Induction . . 227-228

Deduction 228-231

Development over Judgment 231

Pedagogical Principles Implicit in Deduction . . 231-232

Function of The Image 232-235

The Structure of £ Lesson 235-247

The Essential Elements . 237-247

Iv. TABI.B OF CONTENTS.

•Page

Subject-matter 237-240

Assignment 237-240

Steps . . 240-242

Purpose 242-244

Devices 244-247

CHAPTER VIII.

PRINCIPLES OF TEACHING. 248

Central Principle 248-249

Those Based upon Intellectual Activity 249-267

Those Based upon Emotional Activity; 267-278

Those Based upon Volitional Activity] 278-288

Those Based upon the General Nature of the Self . . . 288-289

APPENDIX I.

Series of Sentences Expressing Stages of Various Activities . 291

Suggestions for Work with These Series 306-321

Elaboration of Series 821-326

APPENDIX II.

Form for Indicating the Psychical Processes of the Pupils in

Lessons Observed in the Grades 326-328

The Objects of the Mental Acts 326-828

The Characteristic Process 828

The Subordinate Processes . . . • • • 328

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

BY

HOWARD SANDISON,

DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY, INDIANA STATE NORMAL SCHOOL,
TKRRE HAUTE, INDIANA.

TERRE HAUTE, INC.

THE GLOBE PRINTING HOCSE

1906

LBiosi

EDUCATION DEPT.

COPYRIGHT, -1904,

BY
HOWARD SANDISON.

PREFACE.

In this volume it is the intention to consider method as
essentially the psychological process of the pupil in ob-
taining possession of the subject-matter. Method in its
general aspect is identified, not with the psychological
processes in their diversity and as they appear upon the
surface. It is identified with the fundamental movement
of the self, which, upon reflective introspection, reveals
itself in each of the diverse processes, such as sense-per-
ception, memory, etc.

It is then to be shown that this fundamental mental move-
ment specialized by the activity of the mind upon the special
subject-matter of any given branch of study is the core of
the method of that subject.

The three different views as to the nature of method
and their relative importance are to be given brief consid-
eration, and the idea of special method is to be illustrated
with the subject of language.

CHAPTER I.

. **»•*•• .*,

THE ESSENTIAL IDEA pi1 llETHO'D, „, /*'

Mr. Andrewes was a good scholar 'and (cfu»lie another* • '» • J
matter) a good teacher.

MRS. EWING — A Flat Iron for a Farthing.

It may be said that the subject of method is just as capa-
ble of assuming the form of a distinct science as is any other
one of the subjects dealing with truth, such as physics,
chemistry, geology, botany, grammar, history, etc., for
the reason that the sources of its principles and its central
principle are perfectly definite. The principles arise, on the
one hand, from the nature of the subject to be taught, and on
the other hand, from the nature of the mind to be educated.
Method itself may be said to be the mental activity of the
learner, specialized by activity upon the subject being
studied.

The doctrine of method has been compactly stated as fol-
lows : ' * The fact in the thing ; the law in the mind ; the
method in both. "* Close study will give a fuller and a more
definite meaning to "the fact in the thing; the law in the
mind, and the method in both."

"The fact in the thing" will come to mean some fact of
a subject unified by having one of its attributes emphasized,
and the other attributes subordinated to this emphasized at-
tribute by the interest of the mind. For example, "the
fact in the thing," in geology, may be a mountain range,

* WM. A. JONES, first President of the Indiana State Normal School — from 1870
to 1879.

6 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

with its attribute of growth or becoming emphasized by the
interest of the mind. All of the other attributes of the
mountain, thereby become subordinated to this one at-
tribute of growth, and are considered only to the degree in
which they contribute in making it clear.
*»;'.> The lawa-a, -the mind" will come to mean the great
truth that ithe mind," in considering any fact, as for example
jth^Jmou^tajtei raftge, seizes it first indistinctly, that is, some-
what in the form of blind feeling; that second, as thought, it
analyzes the object under consideration into its definite ele-
ments, rather isolating each element as if it were complete
in itself; that third, as thought, concentrating its attention
upon the isolated attributes, it determines which is the pre-
dominant one. This unifying process is continued by con-
sidering each other element as revealing or bearing upon
this predominant attribute — thus re-unifying the isolated
elements. Finally, through repeated consideration of the
object in these relations, this organized, unified view of it
becomes habit, and thereby sinks into feeling again, becom-
ing thus truly the self. In other words, "the law of the
mind" will come to mean the fundamental three-fold move-
ment of mind, movements three and four being essentially
one. This movement is the mind 's growth in freedom from
blind feeling through definite analysis and organized re-
unifying to enlightened feeling.

"The method in both" will come to mean this funda-
mental movement of mind specialized by having as its sub-
ject-matter or content some fact of a branch of study with
one of its attributes emphasized by the mind 's interest, and
all the others subordinated through this interest to that
attribute. The method in a subject, then, is a mental move-
ment ; it is not, however, a mental movement considered ab-
stractly, that is, apart from any content. Its content is the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 7

particular object, attribute, or relation being investigated.
This renders the mental act specific or particular.

If the foregoing presents the correct view, a method can-
not be invented; it can only be discovered. It can never
become a personal thing to be carried about with one and
"applied" to a subject. If one does view method as a some-
thing which can be carried about and applied to a subject,
it is likely to shut out the light of that subject as did the
Extinguisher which the spirit in Dickens 's Christmas Carol
applied to the spirit of Christmas.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

CHAPTER II.

THE DIFFICULTY OF THE PROBLEM.

It would seem then that the subject of method presents a
very real problem. This is much at variance with the usual
notion, which is that the subject of method is a very simple,
superficial branch of study, having a problem easy of solu-
tion. The problem of method is, however, more difficult
than merely gaining a knowledge of helpful devices. It is
both difficult and important on the assumption that the one
who is to gain a knowledge of method in the subject does
not clearly possess the organizing idea or principle of that
branch of study nor the close organization of the material
of the branch of study upon the organizing principle.

The reasons for considering the problem of method to be
both difficult and important are that a true insight into the
nature of method in any given subject, involves :

1. In addition to the academic view of the subject
gained in common school, high school, academy or college,
a thorough knowledge of the organizing principle of the
branch of study to be taught, and a close organization of the
subject on that principle.

2. In addition to the academic view of the subject of
psychology obtained in high school, academy or college, a
thorough knowledge of the central principle of mental life
and of the organization of mental phenomena upon this
principle.

3. A knowledge of the mental process necessary in gam-
ing a knowledge of the subject.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 9

4. A knowledge of the following important truth: In
themselves facts belong to no subject. They belong merely
10 the universe. Each fact has a large number of relations,
a large number of attributes. Considering the fact in itself,
any one of these attributes is just as important as any other,
a. The material or subject-matter. The first process
in determining the method in any branch of study is con-
stituted by the acts of becoming aware of the general ma-
terial of the branch of study, and of discovering the charac-
teristic attribute of its facts. What this attribute is, has
been determined, to an extent, by the value the race has at-
tached to the facts of the subject. In order to render any
attribute the essential one of the fact, the mind must with-
draw its attention temporarily from the other attributes
and center it upon this one. Thereupon the mind's in-
terest centers in this attribute, and the purpose arises to
consider the fact with all of its other attributes in relation
to this attribute, and so to consider all similar facts. If this
is general, it causes the subject to assume definite shape.
Prior to the emphasizing of this attribute, the facts of the
subject were known to the mind only crudely, indefinitely.
The one attribute, however, having been emphasized, as for
example, the attribute of growth, of becoming, in the moun-
tain range, the subject acquires in consequence, a core, a
unity, an organizing principle. It now for the first time
possesses a distinguishing mark. All facts viewed with
reference to this attribute now belong within this subject,
even if they may be at other times facts of another subject.
They cannot, however, be facts of another subject at the
same time that they are facts of this subject. They cannot
in this other subject possess the same relations and the same
emphasis of relations that they do in this.

With this emphasized attribute in mind as the central

10 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

truth of the subject, the student of any subject is able to
determine definitely:

b. The scope of the subject.

c. The divisions and sub-divisions of the subject.

d. The relative importance of the divisions, sub-
divisions and separate facts.

e. The successive movements or steps that would be
taken by the mind of the learner in mastering any one of
the facts of the subject in such a way as to bring into
prominence the attribute around which the mind's interest
centers.

Method, essentially, is just this act of the pupil's mind
rendering subjective a particular fact of a given subject.
This mental process may be viewed in two ways:

(1). The steps in any given case may be seen to
be what has been termed above, the fundamental movement
of mind, i. e., grasping a thing indefinitely; analyzing it
into definite elements; reunifying these isolated elements
into an organized, differentiated unity; repeating this
thought of the organized unity in such a large variety of
forms that through habit it is at last transmuted into en-
lightened feeling, thereby becoming a part of the individual
himself.

It is seen that the mastery of this view of the movement
necessarily belongs to the systematic study of psychology
itself. This movement is, in truth, the organizing idea in
educational psychology. Hence it indicates the true scope
of the subject, its divisions, the relative importance of the
divisions, etc.

(2). The other view of the steps to be taken by
the mind of the learner, is what may be termed a special
view. The special steps are this fourfold fundamental
movement of mind specialized by the particular subject-
matter of the branch of study. For example, the special

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 11

steps in studying the mountain range as a fact in geology,
are:

(a). The indistinct, indefinite comprehension of
the mountain range as to its growth, as to its becoming. This
may involve sense-perception, memory, imagination, etc.

(b). Definite analysis of the facts or elements in-
volved in the mountain range viewed as to its process of be-
coming. This involves the isolation of the prominent at-
tribute— the process of becoming — the isolation of all other
attributes, as locality, length, direction, height, present con-
dition of structure, etc., and the distinct consideration ovf
each. This may involve memory, abstraction, comparison,
imagination, etc.

(c). Re-unifying, i. e., considering each of the
isolated elements as to its bearing on the central attribute —
the process of becoming.

(d). Such varied and repeated thinking of this
organized unity as will result in habit ; that is, in transmut-
ing this thought of the organized unity into feeling — not,
however, into blind feeling, since the feeling here indicated
arises after definite analysis and definite re-unifying.

The mental movement here indicated under " (2) " is the
core of the problem of method. Method in geology is this
specialized mental process required in order to understand
clearly the mountain range in its process of becoming. In
order to see clearly what the method is, one must be able to
see it first as the general movement. He is then to compre-
hend it as specialized through the definite subject-matter.
As soon as the general movement has become specialized,
one is able to see the different activities of mind involved in
each of the four general steps. Thus he is able to see
whether geology involves observation, memory, induction,
etc.

12 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

f . A knowledge of the mental effect produced in the
learner. While this effect may be prominently intellectual,
emotional, or volitional, it is always all three, that is, the
whole mental being is affected by the truth studied and by
the process of studying it. One who understands the prob-
lem of method must be able to set clearly before himself
the effect to be produced upon the mind of the learner by
the investigation of any given subject. The first effect to
be noted is the habit resulting from acting the distinctive
act of the subject, as the grammar act, the geography act.

g. A knowledge of the means, that is, of the outside
instrumentalities, or devices. These are two kinds, general
and special. The general is the course of study. The
special includes laboratories, and all modes of procedure in
laboratory work, field work, questions, illustrations, work
with maps; written examinations; discussion of examina-
tion papers, lectures, etc. The things referred to under
"g" constitute that which is usually in mind when one
speaks of method. It is, however, only one feature of
method, and its external feature.

In order to understand this last, one must not only be
aware of the external means themselves, appropriate to the
subject; but he must also see the reasons underlying their
use, and the order of their use. It will be noted that "4"
of the thoughts indicated on the ninth page may be re-
garded as a feature of "1" on the eighth page. It there-
fore appears that there are two ways of dealing with the
subject in order to gain a knowledge of it. In the first
mode the learner, having, even in the beginning, a some-
what crude view as to the facts that belong under the sub-
ject, enters at once upon an examination of the facts.
Gradually he becomes aware of their various relations, and
on the basis of these relations groups them into divisions

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 13

and sub-divisions. He thereby gains a knowledge of the
relations within the subject, and of the general relations of
this subject to other subjects. The second mode of dealing
with the subject includes all of these indicated under the
first, and in addition, the more scientific process of seeking
first the organizing principle of the subject; deriving from
this a knowledge of the scope of the subject, of the divisions
and sub-divisions, and of the relative emphasis of the divi-
sions, sub-divisions, and facts. This central truth arises
from the mind's (the race's) interest or purpose. The sec-
ond, and higher knowledge of the subject thus indicated,
implies that the teacher and the learner know:

a. That the subject acquires its core, its central
truth, from the mind's interest in a given attribute.

b. What this given attribute is.

c. The mental process in making any given attribute
the predominant one of the subject.

The study of the subject of psychology has the same two
modes of examination. It will be seen that the second of
the two thoughts indicated in "1" on page 8 — the knowl-
edge of the branch of study, and the second thought under
"2" of the same page — the knowledge of psychology, are
not really elements in method, strictly considered. They
are, however, aspects of pedagogical work. In "e" on page
10, method itself is found. It will also be evident that "e"
and "f " — the mental steps in mastering any given fact in a
subject, and the effect to be produced upon the mind of the
learner, constitute the basis for "g" or the seventh point—
the outward means, the devices. The question now arises
as to the requisites in order to be able to make substantial
progress in discovering the method in any given branch of
study. One often speaks of a specialist in a branch of study
as having these requisites.

14 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

He has very important qualifications. He does not, how-
ever, seem to possess full qualifications. Sometimes one
speaks of the specialist in psychology who has only a general
understanding of the nature of the branch of study to be
taught, as the one fitted to discover the method in that sub-
ject. He does possess a very important qualification, but as
previously indicated, method cannot be "invented;" it is
already there. It is to be discovered; it cannot be discov-
ered in isolation from a systematic knowledge of the subject.
One cannot evolve the method in geology out of inner con-
sciousness, and then in the usual terms, ' ' apply it " to geol-
ogy. It seems incredible that any one has ever entertained
the notion that the method of a branch of study can be dis-
covered apart from and in ignorance of the branch of study.
It seems equally incredible, that it can be discovered in
ignorance of the nature of the law of mind, of the conse-
quent stages of mental development, etc., even by one who
is an expert in the branch of study. A branch of study,
as physics or chemistry, does not consist merely of facts; it
consists of known fact organized on a special interest or pur-
pose of the human mind. The attribute of these facts em-
phasized by this special interest or purpose of the human
mind becomes, therefore, the distinguishing mark of the
facts and the key to its method.

The one best fitted, then, to discover the method in phy-
sics, chemistry or any other branch of study, is the one
who has become a specialist in both the branch of study it-
self and psychology. This would give the ideal conditions.
On account of the comprehensiveness of such conditions, it
is very difficult to possess them. The aim is to approxi-
mate these ideal conditions more and more each year. The
problem of method, can, however, be solved to a helpful
degree, even by those who know of the branch of study
only enough to secure a good grade of license to teach ; and

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 15

who know of mind only that which would come from close
observation of their own mental activities, from close ob-
servation of those of children as indicated by their words
and outward actions, and from a brief course in the sys-
tematic study of psychology. It can be solved to a highly
helpful degree by those students who have done all this,
and who in addition have given a year or more to a sys-
tematic study of the branches of knowledge and of psychol-
ogy from the pedagogical attitude.

16 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

CHAPTER III.

THE REAL PROVINCE OF METHOD.

INDISTINCTNESS AS TO SCOPE.

In this case the mere expression, "The Real Province of
Method, " is itself significant. It implies that the boundary
line between the realm of method and that of something else
is indistinct. That something else may be scholarship; it
may be the realm of means, of external appliances, of de-
vices. In the title there is the implication that method is,
or has been, occupying an unreal, fictitious province. This
fictitiousness may arise from the fact that scholarship is
wanting, and that the attempt to determine a set of princi-
ples to control in that given realm, in which scholarship is
wanting, results in an unreal province for method. Outer
doing, devices, external means, with little or no attention
to the truths that underlie them, may be pressed to the front
as method. This would constitute a fictitious province for
method. Scholarship alone may be exalted as if it were all
in all. In that case method would not possess its real pro-
vince. It means that an indistinctness prevails as to the
true realm of method. To remove this indistinctness is the
problem.

GROUND OF THE INDISTINCTNESS.

It is but natural that a certain indefiniteness, that a given
degree of indistinctness should prevail as to the real province
of method, in distinction from that of both scholarship and
external means. The reason for this is that activity is the
one thing to be found in the universe. Sometimes one

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 17

speaks of a thing and of activity upon it. But what is the
thing itself other than activity ? A block of compact steel
seems perfectly motionless, yet every atom in it has a space
of its own, and exists in a continual dance. Thus it is with
every atom in the hardest granite. It seems, therefore, that
only activity is. This activity rises from its most passive
form as space, until it becomes an activity that can become
aware of itself, as in consciousness. Scholarship, then, con-
cerns itself with activity, and with activity only. Method,
too, must deal with activity, and with that alone. The
realm of device, of external means, is also one of doing, of
activity. In this fact, that device is activity, that method
deals with and is activity, that the subject-matter of scholar-
ships is activity, rests the source of the indistinctness as to
their respective provinces.

OBJECTIVE METHOD.

The activity that scholarship investigates appears in ever-
recurring types. This activity may, therefore, appropri-
ately take unto itself the term method. Every branch of
study investigates activity as type or law; and law is
method, and method is law. The past makes us its debtor
by handing over to us this thought in the very term method
itself. The word "method" signifies according to a way.
But what is it that is according to a way? And what is
meant by a way? If the thought above presented, viz.,
that there is nothing in the universe other than activity, be
true, then it must be activity that is according to a way.
And, moreover, the way itself is necessarily an activity.
Then it becomes clear that the past transfers to us this
thought which it had garnered from the fields of experience
— a method is an activity according to, or in harmony with,
activity. The first activity mentioned must be the real one,
the one actually occurring, the one exhibiting itself in some

18 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

product. The second activity referred to must be the ideal
one, the typical activity, the norm; it is both the end and
the criterion of the real activity, of the one that is actually
ocurring. A method, then, is a real activity according to,
and in harmony with an ideal activity. It now becomes
somewhat more clear that close thought only will render
distinct the provinces of scholarship, method and devices,
and likewise their unity.

Every branch of study has for its subject-matter certain
particulars, certain phenomena that are essentially its own.
These phenomena may appear in other branches of study as
well as in this one, but they do not appear in those other
branches in the same aspect that they do in this. The cot-
ton plant appears as a fact in geography. It is also present
as one of the phenomena considered in botany. As a geo-
graphical fact, however, it is not identical with itself as a
botanical fact. If in this sense each branch of study has its
own set of particulars, the activity that produces any one
of these particulars must be typical. Why does one in look-
ing at a piece of sandstone say, "This is not a good speci-
men ? " It is because the activity that produced it was not
according to the type, to the ideal. The activity that pro-
duces the facts in history or in geology, must be activity
according to the type, according to the ideal. Hence, in
this sense, activity is a method. The activity that produces
a grammatical fact, the activity that produces a geo-
graphical fact, the activity that produces a historical
fact, is a method because it is an activity which has as its
end and criterion an ideal. Identity with this ideal must
be the end of the activity, and the ideal is it criterion. It
is with such a thought in mind that one says, "This is not
truly a geographical fact; that is not really a grammatical
fact ; that ought not to be termed a historical fact. ' ' There

THE; PROBLEM OF METHOD. 19

is, then a method in the subject, and this method is the ac-
tivity that produces the individuals composing the subject-
matter. Such activity is in the realm of scholarship.

The problem in a given branch of study is to investigate
the nature of the activity that produces its facts; to deter-
mine the various phases thereof and their relations to one
another. For example, the noun is a fact in grammar. The
activity that produces it is different fom the activity that
produces the lily of the valley. Grammar must investigate
the first activity, botany the second. Each branch of study
is, however, an investigation of the method that creates the
individuals in its subject-matter. This activity may be
termed the objective method.

Every branch of study, therefore, has its objective
method. By this is meant the method, the activity, the
force, the energy that produces the different individuals
composing the subject-matter. For example, the subject
of reading has what may be termed its objective method.
This is the energy, the force, the activity required to pro-
duce the various individuals in the subject-matter; such as
"Thanatopsis," ' ' E vangeline, " "The Burial of Sir John
Moore," "The Legend of Sleepy Hollow," etc. Grammar
has its objective method. This is the activity, the energy,
the force that creates the various individuals included in
the subject-matter of grammar; as, the noun, the abverb;
the preposition, etc. History as a branch of study has its
objective method. This is the activity, the energy, the
force that created the various individuals in the subject-
matter as, the battle of Bunker Hill, the Hartford Conven-
tion, the Secession Ordinance, etc. The investigation of
such activities and their products is within the realm of
scholarship.

When scholarship has revealed the essential nature of this
activity, this objective method of the subject, it has grasped

20 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

the true basis from which may be inferred three important
things.

Scope. — One of these is the scope of the subject-matter.
It is the function of scholarship to determine this, to decide
what facts belong within the range of the subject, and what
ones are excluded.

Divisions and sub -divisions. — Another important thing
that is to be inferred is the divisions within this subject-
matter. The academic work in any branch of study, there-
fore, after making clear the scope of the subject, infers
from the nature of the creative activity the divisions and
sub-divisions belonging to the subject-matter, carrying such
down to the particulars.

Relative Importance. — It is the function of academic work
to investigate the relative importance of divisions, sub-divi-
sions, and particulars. This is the third inference. The
general knowledge of the subject and these four specific
lines of investigation may be said to belong to the field of
scholarship. Scholarship does not, however, as a rule, de-
vote itself to the special topics mentioned. It accepts the
scope, divisions, etc., from tradition or imposes them exter-
nally. It does not develop them from the organizing prin-
ciple. The fact that academic work is of this nature, prac-
tically transfers these four topics to method.

SUBJECTIVE METHOD.

The Mental Steps. — In academic investigation the sub-
ject-matter is assumed to be a fact distinct from the ex-
amining mind; but as just stated there constantly arises a
peculiar set of questions, such as, What is the relative value
of this division compared with that? Of this sub-division
compared with that? Of this particular compared with
that? Then it becomes evident that there is a factor to be
considered over against all this with which scholarship has

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 21

seemed to concern itself, and this factor is the mind which
is to do the investigating. When one says, "What is the
relative value of this fact as compared with that?" he
evidently means the relative value to the investigator, aris-
ing from making subjective, from making an element of his
consciousness, this fact, as compared with doing the same
with that fact. V/hen this inquiry arises, one begins to
pass from the realm of scholarship over into the real
province of method. For in such inquiry what is hinted?
A second activity, a new activity. The activity that pro-
duces any fact in the subject of botany may be termed the
objective method in botany. But here is another activity,
the activity which renders this fact of botany subjective to
the inquiring mind; the activity which transmutes the ex-
ternal fact of botany into self, into consciousness.

This activity is distinctive, that is, the act of conscious-
ness which transmutes a fact of botany into self, has distin-
guishing marks that set it off from the activity which ren-
ders a fact of geology an element of consciousness. The
activity that produces a fact in the subject of physics, is the
objective method in physics; but the activity of the in-
quiring mind necessary to make this fact of physics sub-
jective, necessary to make it an element of self, of conscious-
ness, is the subjective method in physics.

Every branch of study, therefore, has both its objective
and its subjective method. The objective method is the
activity, energy, or force that produces the various individ-
uals that constitute its subject-matter. The subjective
method is the activity of mind necessary to transmute into
the self any one of these facts of the subject-matter. The
investigation of this subjective method, is within the real
province of method. For example, the activity that pro-
duces the various facts in the subject of botany is the ob-
jective method in botany, and is within the realm of scholar-

22 THE PROBUJM OF METHOD.

ship. The scope of the facts determined is also in the
realm of scholarship ; as are likewise the divisions, the sub-
divisions and the distinctions and unities of the particulars.
But the nature of the activity that the mind performs in
mastering any one of these facts, and the relative value of
the divisions and sub-divisions of facts, because of the na-
ture of this mental activity, these things are in the real
province of method.

When in the subject of method, one has determined the
essential nature of this conscious activity put forth by the
inquiring mind in mastering a fact of the subject, two im-
portant inferences, may be made. These inferences belong
also to the real province of method, and the examination of
the things inferred falls likewise within that province.
What are the things to be inferred from the nature of the
mind's activity in mastering a fact of a given subject?

Mental Effects. — The first is the effect produced upon the
mind by thinking this fact, by identifying itself with it.
This effect appears first as a definite mental process, a cer-
tain habitude of mind which the given subject alone is fitted
to establish. For example, in language the definite mental
process begins with the conceiving of an object. The mind
may first seize the object in sense-perception, memory,
imagination, but it ends by conceiving it, by generalizing it.
The next movement is the forming of a purpose to express
the object to another. Thereupon, the mind images the
expression and then contemplates the harmony, or corre-
spondence between the object to be expressed and the ex-
pression. No subject other than language is fitted to estab-
lish just this habitude, just this mental process. This may
be termed the language act.

There is also the historical act. In such an act the mind
first conceives the disposition, the mental condition of the
people. This is succee4ed by the consideration of the event

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

23

or object produced by this condition of the minds of the
people. In the third place the mind becomes aware of the
new disposition, of the new mental state belonging to the
people as produced by the creation and the contemplation
of this event. In the historical act, then, any event, as for
example, the Civil War, appears as the result of a certain
state of mind in the people ; and as a stimulus to a succeed-
ing result in their minds. To conceive a certain state of the
public mind, to apprehend this as taking shape in some
event or statute, to seize the new state of the public mind
as an effect of contemplating this event or statute, is the
peculiar mental process in the subject of history. This cen-
tral effect, this essential process belonging to every subject,
is one of the effects to be studied. The determination of
the exact nature of this effect in relation to any given sub-
ject, belongs to the real province of method.

Under effect is to be noted also the emotional response.
In history there arises an interest in the state of the public
mind, in the event to be produced thereby, and in the reflex
influence of this event. Just the nature of this, the various
opportunities that life affords for its play, and its value
compared with the knowledge of specific gravity and with
other ideas and emotions — the discussion of all such things
belongs under the real province of method. It would per-
tain to the subject of method to determine the main and the
subordinate emotions to be awakened by the study of Dick-
ens 's ''Hard Times," by the study of "Evangeline," by the
perusal, in Dante's "Divine Comedy," of the lines setting
forth the condition of the angry and the sullen. The
sions in life affording opportunity for the exercise of
feelings and the relative value of such mental states com-
pared with a knowledge of cube root, with a knowledge of
the surface of the United States, etc., would belong in the
realm of method.

24 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

A third thing to be noted under effect is the volitional
development, the tendency to a prompt and decisive choice,
and to persistence in that choice. It would belong to the
subject of method to determine just what tendencies toward
choice and toward perseverance in a given course would be
awakened and stimulated by a study of the condition of
the inhabitants in the vestibule to the Inferno, by a study
of Tito, in George Eliot's "Romola," as an example of
fixation of character, by a study of Taylor's persistence
in the Mexican "War, and Grant 's in the Civil War. Method
would also seek to determine the various occasions in life
that would call for prompt choosing and persistence, and
the value of such mental traits along with those arising from
the study of book-keeping, compound numbers, etc.

In method, then, occurs the examination and valuation
of the entire realm of effects produced upon the self in its
mastery of the facts of any subject. In this is seen the
value to the teacher arising from a study of such subjects as
aesthetics, ethics, logic, psychology and philosophy.

The main mental process in mastering a subject gives the
key to the relative educational value as a subject, its value
as a subject compared with other subjects.

Means. — The second thing to be inferred from the main
mental process employed in mastering a given subject, is'
the means, devices, or instrumentalities appropriate to the
direction and stimulation of this mental process, appro-
priate to the awakening and fixing of the mental effects
naturally belonging to the subject. This includes a con-
sideration of the teacher himself, the range of his scholar-
ship, his disposition, the trend of his sympathies, the har-
mony of his character, his industry, his quickness of insight,
his ability as a questioner, his spirit as an enquirer, and
of the relation of all these qualities to the stimulating and
directing of the mental process in the learner. Under this

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 25

topic is included not only the determining of the devices,
but also the deciding of the order of their employment and
the grounds therefor.

It seems, therefore, that to every branch of study belong-
not only an objective method, or the activity which creates
the individuals of the subject-matter, a scope or range of the
subject-matter, various divisions, sub-divisions, and at-
tributes of distinction and unity in the particulars ; but also
a subjective method, viz., the mental activity involved in
mastering any fact of the subject-matter, together with the
effects, relative value and instrumentalities to be inferred
therefrom.

The real province of scholarship includes all that pertains
to the objective method and its inferences; and the real
province of method includes all found in the subjective
method and the inferences essentially involved therein.

Usually, however, in pedagogical schools, the process of
discovering the organizing principle of the branch of study
and the internal organization of the subject from its or-
ganizing principle, thereby revealing as developments from
this principle the scope, the divisions and sub-divisions, and
the relative importance of divisions, sub-divisions and facts,
has to be assumed as an element of pedagogical training, be-
cause scholarship has often approached the branch of study
from the outside, ignoring its internal development. It is
not infrequent that the presence of any one organizing prin-
ciple is denied or that the value of knowing it is questioned,
even if the subject be admitted to possess such a principle.
How a branch of study can be a science except on the condi-
tion that a single organizing principle unifies all of its facts
is not clear. Nor is it clear why the discovery of this
principle and the genetic organization of the subject from
it is not the predominant trend of work after the student
has the elementary knowledge of the facts of the subject.

26 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

CHAPTER IV.

SPECIAL METHOD.

The clearest idea as to the nature of method arises prob-
ably, from an examination of the process in a particular act
of learning. The general aspect of this appears as the
fundamental movement of consciousness. This fundamen-
tal movement is essentially threefold, but it may be viewed
as consisting of four phases, inasmuch as iteration^ result-
ing in instinctive habit may close the threefold movement.
The process is not, however, four acts; it is a united activ-
ity consisting of three phases and a repetition of these.

The four aspects of the process of learning are :

1. Becoming aware of the object being studied as an un-
differentiated unity. In this phase the mind apprehends
the distinctions belonging to the object dimly, in the form
of feeling, as it were. The truth of the object is present to
the mind as a mere presentiment.* This any one can dis-
cover by examining with care the state of mind belonging
to him when first giving attention to any strange object.

2. Knowing clearly the distinctions in the object, re-
garding each one as isolated.

As the first was the state of immediacy, the paradisaical
condition of undisturbed harmony, so this second phase is
the stage of negation, limit, determination. In the first
a dim synthesis was made. In this clear analysis appears.

*In regard to presentiment as a first phase in knowledge, see Pewey's Psychplr
pgy, pp. 306-307.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 27

The mind has passed from the simple state of para-
dise into that of discord, opposition, difference. The self
being essentially a unity is, therefore, dissatisfied with this
diversity, and hence seeks unity — not, however, the undis-
turbed unity of the first phase.

3. Discriminating the isolated elements, inferring the
dominant characteristic and organizing all the other ele-
ments according to their bearing upon this main attribute.
Thus the mind returns, as it were, to paradise; but not to
the paradise of immediacy. This stage is, it is manifest,
one of synthesis; but since it is a synthesis following clear
analysis, it is a much higher unity than the one grasped in
the first place. If paradise was lost in the second phase of
the mind's process, it is more than regained in this third
stage.

4. A rethinking of the organized unity discovered in
the third phase under varying conditions and illustrations,
until the mode of activity, by passing into habit, becomes in-
stinctive and hence truly the self. It thus appears that the
mind's method in learning any object is an activity consist-
ing of four phases. It is true that the fourth aspect could
succeed either the first phase or the second, since either of
these could become habit. This, however, would be a con-
dition of arrested development. To avoid arrested develop-
ment the mind in considering any object must consider it
under the four aspects indicated, not permitting habit to
arise at the conclusion of either the first or the second
phase. The mind seems naturally to tend to examine any
object by a concrete activity consisting of the four phases
indicated. This involves the assumption that every object
is essentially a unity manifesting various attributes.

In order to render the knowledge of this fundamental
process in learning more definite, attention will be given to
the assumption that every object is a unity revealing itself

28 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

in various attributes. Let the following sentence be re-
garded as an object or unity exhibiting various attributes
and parts:

"I hear Aztec priests upon their teocallis

Beat the wild war drums made of serpent's skin."

This is the object which the mind is supposed to be con-
sidering in an act of learning. The object is a unity in
both form and content. In content it is a unity in that
it expresses a single object, viz.; the person expressed by the
first word as exhibiting himself in a given act. The special
act is indicated by all the sentence following the word ex-
pressing the actor. In this portion of the sentence there
is expressed a central attribute — that of hearing. This ac-
tion has as its object that denoted by all that portion of
the sentence beginning with the word, "Aztec."

This object of the action expressed by the word, "hear,"
has also its unity, namely, the mode of action characteristic
of the object expressed by the word "priests;" that is, a
person who is termed a priest is viewed as one habitually
revealing himself in a certain mode of activity. This cen-
tral element exhibits or reveals itself in the given case
through various distinctions. One of these is expressed by
the word, ' ' Aztec, ' ' another by the expression, ' ' upon their
teocallis," a third by the expression, "beat the wild war
drums made of serpent's skin." Each one of the distinc-
tions has further distinctions within it. All these distinc-
tions, or at least many of them, are in sub-consciousness
during the first stage in the act of learning.

In the first phase of the mind's method in learning, it
apprehends the entire object practically as an undifferenti-
ated or fused unity. The distinctions are merely felt, they
are not clearly comprehended. Out of this stage of dim
knowledge the mind passes naturally into the second, that
of clear distinction. The tendency in the stage of distinc-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 29

tion is to be quite complete in the analysis. Each element
is isolated in thought, becoming a distinct thing to the self.
Isolation as a finality, however, is distasteful to the mind.
The ego, therefore, by its own impulse, passes into the
third stage, that of organization. This third stage in
which the self becomes aware of the object as an organized
or mediated unity is changed by repetition into enlightened
feeling.*

The mind 's process in learning may be illustrated further
with the scalene triangle as an object. It will be advan-
tageous to indicate, before considering the act of learning
itself, the characteristics of the object.

Among its distinctions these are found, its surface, its
three sides, its inequality of sides, its inequality of an-
gles, its having no right angle, one angle larger than a right
angle, two angles smaller than a right angle, its possessing
the attribute of differing from an isosceles triangle, etc.
All these distinctions and the others that are present are
to the learner unknown. In rendering this object subjec-
tive, the first phase of the mind's process is that in which
it apprehends it indistinctly, as a whole. In this stage its
differentiations are but dimly felt, the learner having
merely a presentiment of them.

Through dwelling upon the object, however, the mind
gradually becomes aware of all the various distinctions, and
in obedience to its analytic tendency these distinctions are
strictly isolated. Therefore division or negation becomes too
prominent. By continuing to examine the object the mind
is led to seek unity. Through the acts of discovering and
isolating the predominant attribute and relating the other
characteristics to this central one, the mind organizes the
object. Thus the object becomes truly a unity to the self.

*A helpful reference to enlightened feeling maybe found on p. 249 of "Introduc-
tion to the Stndy of Philosophy," by W. T. Harris.

30 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

Continued attention to it in this aspect, results in habit.
In becoming habit the activity is transformed into feeling,
and since clear analysis has preceded it, the feeling is en-
lightened.

This fourfold process of the mind may be still further
illustrated by an object from literature :

THE BUGLE SONG.

1. The splendor falls on castle walls.

And snowy summits old in story ;
The long light shakes across the lakes,
And the wild cataract leaps in glory.

Blow, bugle, blow! set the wild echoes flying!
Blow bugle! answer, echoes! dying, dying, dying.

2. O hark! O hear, how thin and clear,

And thinner, clearer, farther going!
O sweet and far, from cliff and scar,
The horns of Elf-land faintly blowing!

Blow! let us hear the purple glens replying.
Blow, bugle! answer echoes! dying, dying, dying.

3. O love, they die in yon rich sky,

They faint on hill, or field, or river;
Our echoes roll from soul to soul,
And grow forever and forever.

Blow, bugle, blow! set the wild echoes flying!
And answer, echoes, answer! dying, dying, dying.

— From "The Princess" Tennyson.

This object may be assumed to exist as a unity manifest-
ing itself in a great variety of distinctions. At first, how-
ever, these distinctions are concealed from the learner.
The poem is apprehended as a whole ; its central unity and
all the variety of distinctions are grasped dimly; they are
merely felt, that is, the mind possesses a presentiment of
their existence.

Before noticing the mind's fundamental process as re-
vealed in the act of studying "The Bugle Song," a partial
indication of the distinctions involved in it may be given:

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 31

There is, first, the distinction into expression and content.
The expression is distinguished into language and image.
The content may be separated into central thought and pur-
pose. The language, as a form of literature, has in it many
distinctions. Leaving them for later consideration, some
of the distinctions under the image may be noted :

1. There is, first, the physical background. One element
of this is expressed by, ' * The splendor falls on castle walls " ;
others by "Snowy summits old in story," "The long light
shakes across the lakes, " " The wild cataract leaps in glory, ' '
"the purple glens," "on hill, or field, or river," "yon rich
sky." All these constitute a physical background for the
physical echo.

2. A second element is, therefore, the physical echo.
This is an element in the complex image of the bugler,
bugle, the act of blowing, and the flying of "the wild
echoes. ' ' Within these distinctions subordinate characteris-
tics are found: The echoes become "thin and clear"; they
are "sweet and far," resembling the "horns of Elf -land,"
etc.

All these, however, constituting the physical echo, seem
to be employed as a symbol of some spiritual activity ; some
human deed. This introduces the central thought.

3. The conception of the central thought involves the
distinction between the good deed and the evil deed. The
beauty of the external background, and of the physical echo
are in harmony, not with the evil deed, but with the good
deed ; hence this distinction of harmony is involved. There
are reasons for holding that evil deeds cannot "grow for-
ever and forever." However this may be, the author, as
indicated by the beauty of the physical setting he has em-
ployed, seems to have in mind the good deeds only. In this
spiritual activity are involved three distinctions :

It affects person after person.

32 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

It becomes more prominent, important, and sub-
stantial, as it passes from consciousness to conscious-
ness. Herein is involved a further distinction, namely, the
difference of the spiritual echo and the physical echo, as
to growth and endurance. The purpose of the writer also
appears as a distinction, the central one.

It affects the producer.

From the mind of the learner, however, all these distinc-
tions are concealed. In the study of the poem he reads it
through and thus becomes aware of it indistinctly as a
whole. His apprehension of its central meaning and pur-
pose, and of all the other distinctions, is dim. They are
present to the mind in presentiment only. This first phase
is natural, however.

Out of this presentiment the mind passes into that phase
in which it becomes distinctly aware of all the attributes in
the object. The attributes of distinction, however, are to
be limited to the object as literature.

Rising out of this phase of differentiation, the mind passes
into the stage of organized unifying. The poem has now
become a true unity to the learner.

Through repetition of the act of thinking the poem as an
organized unity, the activity becomes a habit. This is a
return to feeling, but it is now enlightened feeling. The
poem has finally become the learner's own, and he is, in a
certain respect, the poem. It is to be noted that this fourth
phase is merely the third in a more permanent form.

It is not strange that the mind exhibits these three stages
in the mastery of any truth, since the ego is itself essen-
tially a mode of activity characterized by these three ele-
ments. It exists first as undifferentiated, as a mere poten-
tiality for activity. Acting, it differentiates itself from
itself, and exists as object. The mind is always its own
object. This is the second phase of its existence. As ob-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 80

ject it is distinct from itself as subject. Continued exam-
ination of itself as object, however, shows that this object
is the subject.

Having previously illustrated the three stages of mental
action- (regarding the fourth phase as merely the repetition
or retention of the third) it is now of importance to notice:

1. That there is a partial identity between the first phase
in learning an object, namely, apprehending it indistinctly,
and the act of being engrossed with the material and consid-
ering the material, i. e., space-occupying objects, to be the all
in all. Being engrossed with the material is not, however,
fully identical with the first phase of the mind's movement,
because this first phase includes also failure to distinguish
the varying attributes in the object. This, however, is to be
noticed : each object is material and spirit, or meaning.
The human being is material and spirit ; the transom above
the door is material and spirit, or meaning. The driver
wheel on an engine is material and spirit, or meaning. It
therefore follows that to be engrossed with the material,
considering it to be the all in all, is, to a degree, identical
with grasping a thing dimly.

2. That the concentration of the attention on the spirit-
ual element as the all in all, is to a certain extent, identical
with the second stage in the mind 's fundamental movement.
To thus consider spirit is to isolate it. The true position is
reached when neither the material nor the spiritual is re-
garded as the total. The truth is found in the unity of
both. To exalt the physical is to dwell in the first phase of
thought. To isolate and exalt the spiritual is to dwell in
the second phase, in the phase of isolation, of negation.
The reason that this is termed isolation while the first is
not, is that it requires distinction or analysis, to discover
the spiritual.

34 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

3. That the third stage is to a degree, identical with the
process of discovering the deeper unity which is seen to be
the source or origin of both the physical and the spiritual.

Both experience and history show that these three phases
are true, as to the child and as to the race.

In religion, for example, when a people is substan-
tially in the first phase of thought, it finds its gods in ex-
ternal nature. When in the second phase it finds its gods
in alienation from nature. Thus while the hills smoked
and trembled in the presence of the Jehovah of the Jews,
he does not appear as in unity with the physical universe;
while ruling over it he is foreign to it. It does not reveal
him.

The third stage in the growth of religious thought discov-
ers as its God a fundamental unity, an activity which is
revealed both in everything spiritual and in everything
physical.

In philosophy, the same is found to be true. In the
first phase of thought the first principle of the universe was
found to be chaos, moisture, fire, air, and the like. In the
second phase the spiritual was more prominent. Its won-
derful properties were exalted and regarded as the criterion.
Thus the sophists found the individual spirit of man to be
the measure of all things. When, however, philosophy
reached the third stage of thought, Socrates discovered that
the characteristic which makes man the measure of all
things is not his particularity. It is the divine element in
him, in all other human beings, and in the Absolute Spirit.
In this third stage of philosophy unity became prominent,
because the first principle was regarded as the source of
everything spiritual and physical, and as revealed in them.

In history this same truth is shown. In the first
phase of thought the events are regarded as the history.
This is abstract or partial. In the second phase a deeper

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 35

view is gained. The feelings, purposes and thoughts of the
people underlying these outside acts are regarded as his-
tory. This view is also abstract or partial. The spiritual
is no more truly the man than are his objectifications. The
property that one has acquired is will objectified. Any work
of art, is in a sense the artist. Any historical or scien-
tific work given to the world is the producer. Therefore
the concrete, i. e., the complete view in history, is not
reached until one enters upon the third stage of thought.
In this stage those concrete productions known as the insti-
tutions, viewed as produced by man's spiritual growth
toward freedom and as reacting upon man are the history.
Thus it is with everything. For example, the physical
constituents and form of the door key are not the key.
The view that they are is abstract, and hence incomplete.
The thought of the door key is not the door key. This
view is also abstract and incomplete. The thought of the
door key revealed in a particular way, that is, its two
sides taken as a concrete unity, constitutes the door key.
This same process which has manifested itself in the growth
of religion, philosophy, and history, reveals itself in the
growth of the conception of method. It is natural that the
method in any subject should be found in this fundamental
movement of mind, which is just the mind's method. This
method of consciousness is not, however, the special method
in any particular subject. The distinctive method in any
branch of study is analogous to the third stage of knowing.
The reason for this is that special method is a relation. For
example, method in geography is not this fundamental
movement of mind; neither is it any external mode of ac-
tivity. It is, however, the fundamental movement of con-
sciousness specialized as it would necessarily be, in the
mind's act of knowing a geographical fact.

In its general aspect method is geography in the funda-

36 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

mental movement of mind. Defined more accurately, it is
this fundamental movement modified by the distinctive kind
of subject-matter belonging to geography. In summariz-
ing, it may be said that method is at first conceived as some-
thing external, as a mode of physical action, as a series of
actions, consisting of directions, questions, illustrations, ex-
planations, etc, since such actions bear a certain relation
to the method itself, and are more easily noticed than the
underlying method. As above noted, the universal ten-
dency in the infancy of thought, is to be engrossed with the
external aspect of a thing, and to consider this external as-
pect as the thing itself. This is, however, an abstract or
incomplete view. The tendency to note the external aspect
when in the lower stages of development, is no more a uni-
versal mark, however, than is the tendency to note the in-
ternal or spiritual aspect in the second stage, and to con-
sidered it as an isolated thing, and as the whole. To center
attention on the spiritual aspect in" its generality, viewing
it as if it were the total object, is, as above noted, also ab-
stract. This incomplete mode of regarding the spiritual
is illustrated by such expressions as, ' ' The method in arith-
metic is abstraction and generalization," "The method in
studying a botanical object is inductive." The more con-
crete activity of mind is the tendency to seek a fundamental
or underlying unity in the two incomplete aspects discov-
ered in the first two stages of development, each in its
turn being considered as complete, as the whole.

These three tendencies (including under the third, habit,
or enlightened feeling made instinctive) marking the three
stages of development in the race and in the individual are,
as above indicated, mere exhibitions of the essence of con-
sciousness. The very nature of consciousness is :

a. To exist as mere energy, as potential, as immediate.
(Subject.)

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 37

b. To exist as object, as alienation, as other than the
knowing subject. (Object.) This arises in the stage of
distinction or clear analysis, in which each analyzed ele-
ment is conceived as if it were independent.

c. To exist as subject-object.

The activity which at first was conceived as object, as
alien, is now seen to be the knower as well as the known.
True unity now appears. This is the stage of differentiated
unity. The three stages of conceiving as external, as in-
ternal, and as the unity of the external and internal, are an
exhibition of what has been termed the fundamental process
of mind. This process limited to knowledge is,

a. Apprehending the object indistinctly.

b. Analyzing it into its elements and emphasizing
each element as if.it were unrelated.

c. Organizing, i. e., discovering the unity of these
elements.

Method is found in the relation of the facts of the sub-
ject to the fundamental process of knowing.

A fact in a subject is one element of the subject with a
certain attribute of it emphasized according to the mind's
interest. More definitely, then, method is the fundamen-
tal movement of mind in the examination of an object with
reference to a given attribute that has been exalted and em-
phasized by the mind's interest. The method of a subject,
then, is always one and the same. Method as a process
does not change. Our conception of what method is,
changes.

In the first stage of thought method is viewed as a set
of external acts.

In the second stage of thought the mind looks beneath
the series of external acts and discovers the implied series
of psychological activities. These are viewed as the method.

38 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

Both of these views are abstract, and, therefore, incom-
plete.

In the third stage of thought,

a. The mind thinks beneath each psychological activ-
ity, whether it be sense-perception, memory, imagination,
judgment, or any other, and discovers that each is merely a
manifestation of the mind's fundamental movement —
grasping the object dimly, analyzing definitely and re-
unifying.

b. It then examines the facts of the subject, noting as
the essential thing the human interest or purpose that gives
organization to the facts of the subject by furnishing the
principle that makes the subject a distinct branch of study.
Herein is discovered the organizing idea of the subject.

c. The mind then discovers that the process of the
mind in learning the subject, i. e., the special method of the
subject, is just the fundamental movement of mind special-
ized by the peculiar subject-matter of this branch of study.

Let arithmetic be considered for example:

According to the first view the method in arithmetic is a
set of external acts, as, placing a number on the board by
using a series of dots, showing the number of fours in the
dots, finding the relations within each number, constructing
in imagination concrete examples involving that number,
expressing the results in a definite form on the black-board,
expressing the results orally, etc.

According to the second view the method in arithmetic
is some general psychological activity, as analysis, synthe-
sis, deduction, abstraction, generalization, etc.

According to the third view the method in arithmetic is
the fundamental movement of mind concerned with the fol-
lowing kind of an object : A number or activity viewed as
measurer or means, and a number or activity viewed as
measured thing or end, that is, the method in arithmetic

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 39

is the fundamental movement of mind concerned with ratio.
This would be elaborated more fully under special method
in arithmetic.

The average educational thought holds in general to the
first conception of method. To a slight extent the second
conception prevails. Here the attempt is to be made to ex-
plain the conception of method which belongs to the third
stage of thought.

To do this it is necessary to set forth ( 1 ) the four things
that lead up to method as a distinctive thing, central prin-
ciple, scope, divisions, sub-divisions, and facts, relative
importance. (2) Method as a distinctive act. (3) The
two things resulting from method — mental effects and de-
vices.

In beginning to treat more fully the different views of
method, certain expressions indicating the prevailing idea
as to what method is culled from various sources, popular,
educational, and pedagogical are to be presented. These
will be examined in order to determine :

1. Which indicate the first stage, namely, the conception
that method is a series of external acts.

2. Which indicate the second stage, namely, the con-
ception that method is a certain psychological activity in
general, as sense-perception or imagination or induction—
a mere psychological activity unspecialized by a distinctive
subject-matter.

3. Which, if any, hint or indicate definitely the third
conception as to the nature of method.

40 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

CHAPTER V.

VARIOUS USES OF THE TERM METHOD.

The following wide range of examples in the employment
of the term, method, is given in order to afford the oppor-
tunity to give additional clearness to the idea of method by
first, determining the exact nature of the activity shown in
each example, and then testing the use of the term by the
idea of method developed in the previous chapters.

The student should, before closing his work on this chap-
ter, assure himself of his ability to discover and to express
the conception of method in each of the cases given. In
each case,

(1.) The presence of activity is to be shown.
(2.) This activity is to be shown to be regular and or-
derly.

(3.) It is to be shown as controlled by an ideal.
(4.) It must be noticed that the activity is that of,
(a.) The teacher.
(b.) The pupil or learner.

(c.) Vocations outside of the field of school educa-
tion.

(5.) The activity of the teacher may be,

(a.) His external activity, as, his directions, ques-
tions, explanations, drawings on the black-board, etc.

(b.) His series of psychological processes in knowing
or thinking the natiire of the object which the pupil is to
learn. This series may involve sense-perception, imagina-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 41

tion, judgment, memory, conception, etc., according to the
nature of the object being studied.

(c.) His fundamental conscious process. This is the
process which is characteristic of sense-perception, memory,
imagination, reasoning, and, in fact, of every form of con-
sciousness. It consists of (1) an indistinct awareness of
the object, which awareness may be in the form of sensa-
tion, sense-perception, memory, or in the form of any other
process of knowing, (2) a clear consciousness of all the
distinctions in the object, as, a knowledge of its various
parts and attributes thought of as distinct or separate, (3)
a consciousness of the central meaning manifested by the
parts and attributes, and their order according to the de-
gree in which they exhibit the central meaning.

(6.) The activity of the pupil is manifested in the
same three forms as those given as belonging to the teacher.

(7.) The activity of the vocations referred to is usually
viewed and spoken of as strictly external activity upon
external material. The psychological activity present is
not taken into account.

It is to be remembered that the third form of activity
as belonging to the pupil constitutes method according to
the thought set forth in this book. It is general method,
or the universal process of the self. This universal or gen-
eral process of the consciousness of the pupil as concerned
with a specific kind of material, as, the surface of Florida,
is special method, according to the present treatise. A
helpful process of analyzing cases in order to determine
the conception of method held by writers may be learned
by attending to the following analysis :

1. Case "1," page 48.

This indicates (1)* that activity is referred to, (2) that

* The numbers (1), (2), (e), etc., refer in all cases to the same numbers on
pages 40-41.

42 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

it is regular and orderly, (3) that it is controlled by an
ideal, as suggested by the word, "after."

2. Case "2," page 48.

This case has two illustrations of the use of the term.
method. The first, "a method of teaching languages," in-
dicates (1) that there is an activity, (2) that it is regular
and orderly, (3) that it is controlled by an ideal, as, an
ideal in the consciousness of the teacher who conceived the
method is implied. The expression also implies that the
action denoted by it is the external activity of the teacher.
(a) of (4) and of (5).

The second illustration, "a method of improving the
mind," manifests the fact (1) that activity is denoted, (2)
that it is regular and orderly, (3) that it is controlled by
an ideal, (4) that either the external activity of the teacher
(a) of (4) and of (5) may be referred to, or the series
of activities of the learner may be denoted, (b) of (5).
That is, "a method of improving the mind," may ex-
press the series of questions, the readings, the prepara-
tion of notes, the statement of plans, etc., a person may em-
ploy to improve the mind of another, or to improve his
own mind. The expression may also be interpreted to sig-
nify the mental processes which will produce in one's own
mind habits of alert attention, logical division, and increas-
ing skill in the search for relations.

3. Case "3, "page 48.

The illustration of this case is "Though this be mad-
ness, yet there is method in it." Hamlet who had been
reported to be mad appears in a room of the castle reading.
Polonius said,

What do you read, my lord?

Ham. Words, words, words.

Pol. What is the matter, my lord?

Ham. Between whom?

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 43

Pol I mean the matter that you read, my lord.

Ham. Slanders, sir; for the satirical rogue says here
that old men have grey beards, that their faces are wrin-
kled, their eyes purging thick amber and plum-tree gum,
and that they have a plentiful lack of wit, together with
most weak hams: All of which, sir, though I most power-
fully and potently believe, yet I hold it not honesty to
have it thus set down; for yourself, sir, shall grow old as
I am, if like a crab you could go backward.

Pol. (Aside.) Though this be madness, yet there is
method in't.

It is evident that this use of the word, method, implies
(1) activity, (2) a regular and orderly activity, and (3)
an activity controlled by an ideal. The activity does not
relate to teacher or pupil, (a) or (b) of (4) but rather to
an act in another vocation (c) of (4). The word, method,
denotes either the systematic arrangement of an outside
activity, i. e., the replies of Hamlet, their adaptation to
a purpose, etc., or it signifies the purpose in the mind of
Hamlet. It is as if Polonius said, "Though this be mad-
ness, yet the speaker has a distinct purpose in such actions
and they are well adapted to the accomplishment of the
end."

4. Case "l,"page 49.

"Phe word, method, evidently refers to certain outward
acts of the bank officials, such as lending money on in-
sufficient security, paying too high a rate of interest, using
the funds of the bank in speculative enterprises, etc.

The term refers then to an activity, (1). This activ-
ity is regular and orderly, (2) but it is regular, orderly
procedure in being irregular and disorderly in so far as
banking principles are concerned. It is moreover, a series
of activities controlled by an ideal, (3) that is, by the pur-
pose to make financial gains. The method referred to does

44 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

not belong to teacher or pupil (a) and (b) of (4), but to
a vocation which does not aim at education, although it
necessarily educates, (c) of (4).

5. Case "7," page 52.

The word wickedness, denotes a particular psychological
act of a person antagonistic to the accomplishment of
the aim of life, which aim may be said to be the
attainment of freedom. Wickedness may be a series of
such acts or a tendency toward the performance of them.
The word, method, as here used signifies the act of increase
in this tendency. The tendency so increases in strength
that slighter and still slighter stimuli are required to in-
duce wicked action. The term, method, indicates, there-
fore, an activity (1), an activity that is regular and or^
derly, (2) an activity controlled by the inherent nature of
law of the self, (3). This is an ideal, but it is not one of
which the person is clearly conscious. He would, no doubt,
be opposed to the results of the ideal were he conscious of
them. The ideal in this case is more universal than the
individual. It belongs to the inherent structure of human
nature.

The activity denoted may be that of teacher, pupil or
of a person in other relations of life (a), (b) or (c) of
(4). The word, method, in this use, indicates the funda-
mental psychological law of the self, although the author
of the sentence quoted may not have conceived the activ-
ity under the specific stages employed in this book in defin-
ing the characteristic process of consciousness. The essen-
tials in the conception of method in the ethical realm are
(1) the existence of a tendency toward evil, a fused, poten-
tial condition, (2) the choice of the evil and its perform-
ance, a stage of separation, of distinction, (3) the ceasing
of the evil act and the return of the peculiar mode of
energy involved in it, to the potential self with a strength-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

45

ened tendency toward the performance of evil deeds. This
conception of method as found in the ethical realm is es-
sentially the notion of general method as explained in this
book (c) of (5).

6. Case "15," page 54.

This is one of the extreme forms of the external use of
the term, method. The word refers, of course, to an ac-
tivity, (1). It also refers to a regular, ordered activity.
(2). It is an activity controlled by an ideal, that is, by
the conception in the mind of the launderer. He idealized
and set to work the complex, orderly process, involving ma-
chines, persons, chemical action, etc., known as the laun-
dering process. The activity referred to is found in one
of the vocations of the general world of business. It is
method only in the sense that it is activity regulated and
ordered by an ideal.

7. Case "1," page 63.

The speaker in his address refers to two kinds of activ-
ity by the use of the term, method, and to another kind by
the expression, ' ' knowing the Word of God. ' ' '

The first kind of activity is denoted by the following
portions of the last paragraph on page ?: "Much is be-
ing said, * * * * * but another term for the word
rut."

The second kind of activity is expressed by the following
portion of the same paragraph: "And yet there must be
method. He who works without plan and aimlessly will
find his results without form, and void, chaotic."

The third kind of activity is referred to on page ? by
the phrase, "to know the Word of God," and the funda-
mental aspects of this activity are denoted by the expres-
sions, "spiritual grasp" and "intellectual grasp" on the
same page.

The analysis of the "intellectual grasp" is given on

46 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

pages 65-72 and a general summary of the intellectual
process is presented on page 73.

The first kind of activity is termed method distinctly by
the speaker. He regards the activity (1), as regular and
orderly (2), but evidently as not controlled by an ideal
(3), at least, not by a rational ideal. The activity is re-
garded as the external mode of procedure by the learner
engaged in the study of the Bible, and this learner is con-
sidered to be his own teacher, (a) of (5). This activity
is thought to be very mechanical, very external, and hence,
as alien to the subject matter, and to the spiritual nature
of the learner. Method is assumed by the speaker to be
a special device, a particular external mode of work which
reflects merely the idiosyncracy, the whim of the worker.
He, therefore, regards method as an external mode of pro-
cedure adapted to one person only, and as limiting the in-
dependence of others. In the early stages of education
such external processes were regarded as the method of
the teacher, but they have long since been relegated to
the realm of superficial devices.

The second kind of activity is also named method by the
speaker. It is regarded as activity (1), which is regular
and orderly (2), and which is, moreover, controlled by a
worthy ideal, plan or aim, (3). This psychological state,
the ideal or purpose, is not the activity which the speaker
refers to as method. The external process of the student
of the Bible who is at the same time his own guide or
teacher, interpenetrated by the worthy, rational ideal, is
that which is called method.

In the present work each of these external activities is
classed as belonging under method according to the first
view, i. e., as external method, or device.

The third kind of activity is not named method by the
speaker. It is, however, the activity which is considered

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 47

to be method, according to the second view noted on page
? . The character of the intellectual process in knowing
the Bible is indicated by saying that it must be systematic.
To be systematic the act of knowing must be, according to
the speaker (1) in harmony with a carefully wrought-out
plan, (2) comparison, (3) thinking out the growth of
prophecy, (4) a special study of the various great books.
(5) an independent effort, (6) a logical process, (7) a
comprehensive act, and (8) an act resulting in habit. In
so far as this is strictly a psychological process it is method
according to the second view. If the speaker refers to
outward activities of the student of the Bible which are
controlled by and manifest these modes of intellectual ac-
tivity, it is a systematized series of devices, or method ac-
cording to the first view.

Within this third kind of activity the speaker mentions
"comprehensive" knowing. He also calls attention to the
act of mastering details. It is held that these details
should be studied in the light of the comprehensive knowl-
edge of the whole. The act of knowing is to be marked
by "consecution, connection," that is, by "logical order."
Finally, this process is to become a habitual form of mental
action. This established mode of mental life constitutes
the "definite results" referred to. What is the nature
of such results? They are habits, or established modes of
thought. They can be reproduced at will. They are the
tendencies established by many separate activities. In this
sense, the "results" mentioned by the speaker, are, essen-
tially, the third element of the fundamental law of con-
sciousness. In explaining, the systematic act of knowing
the Bible, there is, therefore, a definite reference to the
characteristic process of consciousness which constitutes
method in its fundamental aspect as held in this book.

48 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

GENERAL MEANINGS.
(From Dictionary.)

1. Literal meaning meta, after ; odos, a way.

2. An orderly procedure or process; regular manner of
doing anything; hence, manner, way, mode; as, a method
of teaching languages ; a method of improving the mind.

Addison.

3. Orderly arrangement, elucidation, development, or
classification ; systematic arrangement peculiar to an in-
dividual.

Though this be madness, yet there's method in it.

Shakespeare.

4. All method is rational progress, a progress toward
an end. Sir W. Hamilton.

5. A mode or system of classifying natural objects ac-
cording to certain common characteristics; as, the method
of Theophrastus ; the method of Ray ; the Linnaean method.

a. Synonyms. Order, system, rule, regularity, way,
manner, mode, course, process, means; method implies ar-
rangement; mode, mere action or existence; method is a
way of reaching a given end by a series of acts which tend
to secure it ; mode relates to a single action, or to the form
which a series of acts, viewed as a whole, exhibits ; manner
is literally the handling of a thing, and has a wider sense,
embracing both method and mode. An instructor may
adopt a good method of teaching to write ; the scholar may
acquire a bad mode of holding his pen; the manner in
which he is corrected will greatly affect his success or fail-
ure.

THK PROBLEM OF METHOD. 49

POPULAR MEANINGS.

1. When Comptroller Eckels wrote that the failure of
the National Bank of Illinois was ' * due to injudicious, reck-
less and imprudent methods," he was either not fully in-
formed as to the facts, or he put the case much too mildly.
The Indianapolis Journal, Dec. 26, 1896.

2. They never stop to think, if they know, how the in-
troduction of the French revolutionary methods would
work in this or any other country. Terre Haute Express,
Dec. 26, 1896.

3. The report of the Inter-State Commerce Committee,
published last week, brings out sharply some of the methods
by which the railroads are evading the Inter-State Com-
merce Law. It deals especially with the traffic associations
by which railroads now combine to keep rates above the
competitive level. The agreement of these associations,
says the Commission, quoting Judge Cooley, are drawn with
"marvelous" ingenuity to evade the law against pooling.
In those recently entered into, the words "so far as legally
can be done" follow provisions for maintaining rates and
dividing traffic which would not otherwise be distinguished
from the pooling arrangements declared illegal. The Out-
look, Dec. 26, 1896, p. 1171.

4. We realized that he had struck a blow in the world
which will resound through its history. In him we find
not the methods of the machine politician or of the crafty
diplomatist, but the incorruptible citizen and patriotic
statesman. Speech of Mr. Lewis, Atlanta, Georgia.

5. A survey and consideration of the present methods
and results of our foreign mission work, when made from
any high standpoint, cannot fail to produce in most observ-
ers a feeling of impatience and dissatisfaction. Not only

50 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

the hostile censor and the chronic doubter, but even the
friendly critic and the hearty believer in the paramount
duty of the Christian Church to send missions into all the
world, finds in such survey and consideration much to con-
demn, or at least to seriously question. The attitude of the
missionary towards the religion which he seeks to displace,
the relation of the missionary abroad to the Board at home,
the very existence of a home board in a true missionary
economy, the relation of the foreign missionary to the na-
tive Christianity, the very right and expediency of the re-
tention of permanent settled foreigners in a field where
the nucleus of a native church has been formed — these and
other considerations of equal gravity and importance
present themselves for the consideration of the Church.
Radical reforms are suggested in some directions, but even
among those who would agree in ultimate ideals there is
wide difference of opinion as to the expedient policy for the
immediate future. That radical changes are needed admits
of no doubt to many. While the great mass of the con-
servatives see no occasion for serious change, how can they
understand why such questions should be raised?

There is, however, one evil in our foreign missionary
work which finds almost unanimous recognition; for there
are but few who would not agree with the recent declara-
tion of a foreign missionary that " denominationalism is a
luxury that should not be encouraged in the foreign field. ' 7
While this sentiment is quite general, the condition which
confronts us is a number of denominational boards, each
working on separate and independent lines which run out
into the furthest missionary field. What is more, this con-
dition has in it evident potency of long life, which belongs
to old and strong organizations, backed by a practical de-
nominationalism and supported by a jealous fear which at
present is more strong than an ideal sentiment.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 51

In view of this condition, while we would neither ignore
the more radical reforms hinted at above, nor lose sight of
ultimate ideals, our purpose is to suggest an advance in
missionary methods, which, not disturbing the existence of
the denominational boards, nor interfering with the work
in the fields, offers a forward step both immediate and prac-
tical. The idea which we would present is that of a gen-
eral Missionary Board or Commission, which in some lim-
ited way, should unite and represent the several isolated
denominational boards. Rather than to attempt to discuss
the form of such a commission and meet the obvious objec-
tions which might be offered in the abstract, we would pre-
fer to commend the idea by suggesting some of the direc-
tions in which such a commission would be of service suffi-
cient to justify its creation. These directions of service are
capable of a threefold division as affecting (1) the work of
the several boards which might co-operate in it; (2) the
work and workers in the foreign field; (3) the Church at
home.

With regard to the separate boards, the Commission could
be of general economic service by making easy a compari-
son of methods and expenses which would enable different
boards to benefit by the experience of others, and so reduce
expenses and improve methods. The Outlook, Dec. 20,
1896. A Forward Step in Missions.

6. Before Moses, sacrifice was well nigh universal. Many
persons have the impression that Moses not only commanded
sacrifice, but that it originated with him. No! sacrifice
was the universal method of worship throughout the world.
Its origin is pagan, not Jewish. It antedates Judaism.
* * Pagans offered their sacrifices everywhere, on
every high hill and under every green tree. But this Lev-
itical code said Israel should not do so. That is based on
the idea that sacrifice is necessary, that one cannot have

52 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

favor with God unless he offers sacrifice, and that idea was
by every method discouraged and denied. Gospel Doctrine
of Sacrifice. Outlook, Dec. 26, 1896.

7. There is a method in man 's wickedness. It grows up
by degrees. A King and No King, Act V, Scene 4. Beau-
mont and Fletcher.

8. Who could have conjectured in advance anything of
that widespread system of Totemism which Frazer has pre-
sented with such detail, the importance of which we are
only beginning to recognize, and the significance of which
we are scarcely beginning to comprehend? Indeed, it is
doubtful if many of these early methods of thought and ac-
tion will ever be really understood, for the reason that these
customs so soon become merely traditional, and those who
practice them may no longer attach a definite significance
to them. In looking at methods of life that express feelings
and notions so different from our own, we feel, so far as any
comprehension is involved, almost as helpless as we do in
watching the economy of an ant-hill. In the ant-hill there
is a civilization very like our own, and yet, so far as the
inner relations which it expresses are concerned, it is utterly
foreign to us and unimaginable by us. The Gospel of St.
Paul, by Charles Carrol Everett, p. 9.

9. However these two methods may, at the first glance,
seem to resemble each other, there is a really great differ-
ence between them. The animal is identified with the
worshipper in the Jewish scapegoat, for instance, where the
sins of the people were laid upon his head. Among the
Egyptians, the victim was sometimes marked with a seal
bearing the image of a man bound and with a sword at his
throat. This was to show that the victim represented the
human sacrifice which milder manners had given up. The
Gospel of Paul, by Charles Carroll Everett, p. 25.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 53

10. It is hardly to be questioned that the sacrifice and,
the use of blood as a means of purification came to be re-
garded, to some extent, in the same formal and traditional
manner. At least there must have been a tendency to the
simple perfunctory use of such methods of winning the
divine favor. Those by whom the gods were conceived in
too spiritual a fashion to admit of the earlier and grosser
notions of sacrifice might still feel obliged to perform them
according to the customary routine of worship. The Gos-
pel of Paul, by Charles Carroll Everett, p. 35.

11. As to the method by which the death of Christ took
the place of the punishment which the sinner had deserved,
Pfleiderer's statements lack the clearness which marks the
greater part of his discussion. The Gospel of Paul, by
Charles Carroll Everett, p. 127.

12. I thus fail to find any method by which the resurrec-
tion of Christ may be made to appear to have any vital rela-
tion to his atoning work, as this is commonly understood.
The Gospel of Paul, by Charles Carroll Everett, p. 209.

13. He was with the Terre Haute Evening News in a
responsible capacity and his brilliant and aggressive meth-
ods won for that newspaper a large circulation. Terre
Haute Express, Jan. 1, 1897.

14. The Commission, however, recognized the necessity
of other methods of securing such deliberation and such
public notice, by providing that no important ordinance can
be acted upon until several days after publication in the
"City Record." * * * There are two methods, either
one of which would make such knowledge possible. One
would be to delegate the legislative powers to a small body
of nine, twelve, or fifteen men, to be elected by the whole
city on one ticket. The other would be to divide the city
into a hundred voting districts, and provide that each dis-

54 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

trict should elect one, and only one, representative. Out*
look, Editorial, Jan. 2, 1897.

15. Perfect methods make our work perfect. Adver*
tisement of a laundry.

16. In order to accomplish this result the melter and
refiner must have the pure gold to begin with. He must
take all the gold out of the brick, but in such a way as to
leave no silver or other metal connected with it. His
method is an odd one. He takes the gold brick and melts it
with a lot of silver. He does this because the acid which
is to take the silver out of the gold will not work well un-
less there is plenty of the silver in the mixture. He knows
just how much silver is necessary for the right combina-
tion, and he adds this amount to the gold brick. The com*
bined metals are next thrown into a vessel containing nitric
acid. This acid has a peculiar affinity for silver and for the
baser metals. It has no effect upon gold, but it sucks all
of the other metals out of the mixture and combines with
them, turning them into a liquid which looks not unlike
water. The pure gold drops to the bottom of the vessel,
while the silver and other metals are left in the solution>
The liquor is now drawn off, and the melter and refiner hag
a lot of pure gold, out of which he makes another brick OP
bar. Method in Language VII — Devices, p. 55.

17. Lieutenant Governor Nye ruled him out of order
and decided an appeal to the Senate, saying the method pro-
vided for organization could not be departed from. Terra
Haute Gazette, Jan, 8, 1897.

18. There should be some method of enrollment and a
fee demanded as a condition precedent to the right to prac-
tice before the people's legislative jury. Gov. Pingree't
Message to the Michigan Legislature.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 55

19. The same regulation should be provided for city and
town superintendents, as one year is not time enough for
the putting to a test any superintendent's methods. Re-
port of Indiana Legislative Committee on School Law.

20. Arrange to keep such paved streets clean by the
latest improved method. Terre Haute Gazette, Jan. 9, 1897.

21. But if we proceed in our inquiries as we lately did,
by the method of mutual admissions, we shall combine in
our own persons the functions of jury and advocate. Bk.
1, Sec. 348, Plato's Republic.

22. It is not promised to bring prosperity to those who
do business according to reckless and dishonest methods.
Crawfordsville Journal.

23. The presidential electors elected last November held
an informal meeting at the Denison House last evening to
look into the law and learn what should be the method of
procedure in casting the vote of Indiana for McKinley and
Hobart. They did not talk of who should be elected mes-
senger, and that question will be decided either by ballot or
by lot at the meeting to-day. They will meet, according to
law, in the hall of the House at 10 o'clock this morning,
and organize by electing a chairman and secretary. They
will then ballot for president and vice-president and will
sign a certificate of how the vote was cast in triplicate, one
copy being filed in the Federal Court, another being trans-
mitted by mail to the president of the Senate of the United
States and the other being sent to the same office by special
messenger, under seal. Four or five of the delegates are
asking to be made messenger, and none of them would re-
fuse it. Indianapolis Journal.

24. When I assumed the position as chief of the Depart-
ment of Geology and Natural Resources, I started out with

56 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

the expressed determination of making that department
what its originators, in my opinion, intended it should be—
a bureau of information, where any person can at any time
procure a knowledge of the natural resources of our State.
I did away with the unscientific method of county surveys
since the civil boundaries of a county have nothing to do
with the boundaries or limits of a natural resource, and
adopted the plan of taking up each of the great resources
in detail, and preparing a monograph or special report
thereon, accompanied by maps, cuts, engravings and tables;
of chemical and physical tests. Report of State Geologist
to Indiana Legislature, Jan., 1897.

25. Monopoly's Method. It appears that the Pennsyl-
vania railroad tried to pack the meeting of citizens which
was held last night to protest against the gift of Delaware
street made by the Board of Public Works to this corpora-
tion. Large numbers of railroad employes were present
for the purpose of destroying the object of the meeting,
and they might have succeeded if they had been as ably led
as the citizens were. Indianapolis News, Editorial, Jan. 12,
1897.

26. One irritating circumstance in connection with the
last treaty grows out of the peculiar method adopted by the
State Department to give the text to the public. Two ex-
tra copies were made, one of which was sent to the Senate,
and the other given to a Washington correspondent of a;
London newspaper. It was supposed at the department
that the press association would be able to get a copy at the
Senate, but the rules of that body prohibited this being
given out at once. The press associations, therefore, had
to order the treaty cabled back from London, whereat com-
plaint is made of discrimination against American newspa?
pers, and much is being made of it in Congress and out.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 57

Mr. Olney is accused of being an Anglomaniac and of
catering more to the English people than to his American
constituency both in the matter and spirit of the treaty it-
self and in the methods of its distribution for publication.
Indianapolis Journal, Jan. 14, 1897.

27. It also amends the election law by putting the Re-
publican ticket in the first column and making a few minor
changes in the methods of counting, chief of which is that
it gives to any party nominating a ticket the privilege of
having two watchers at the polls. Indianapolis Journal
Jan. 15, 1897.

28. Moreover its work in unmasking imposters and ex-
posing the methods of fraudulent charity-mongers has been
of great benefit to the community. Report of Society for
Organized Charity, Jan., 1897.

29. "A few years ago," said a local newspaper man last
night, " I saw as much of Mr. McCullagh as any man could.
I knew his methods. He gave his time to his paper. In the
old building where all were crowded together there was but
one chair that any one could sit in, and that was occupied
by the editor. The others were heaped with books, so that
it was impossible for him to ask any one to be seated. He
read the papers, and as he read wrote the crisp editorial
paragraphs which have long been a feature of the Globe-
Democrat. He never permitted himself to be bored. If he
wanted an article he knew it, and would send the writer a
check for it. If he did not, he would waste no words about
it. It was said that his moods had something to do with
his decisions. Indianapolis Journal.

30. It must be gratifying to all good citizens to note the
energetic- methods that obtain with the management of the
local branch of the Young Men's Christian Association.
The Sunday afternoon -meetings of the association are at-

58 THE PJROBLEM OF METHOD.

tended by more men than any other service in the city, and
that they are the sources of much profit as well as of great
pleasure there is no doubt. Their success is perhaps due in
large measure to the restlessness of the General Secretary.
He is a firm believer in the efficacy of advertising — a species
of orthodoxy that some business men have yet fully to
grasp. When he starts out "to work up a meeting," as he
phrases it, he does not rest until he has accomplished his
purpose. On Saturday nights the citizens of Terre Haute
are greeted by announcements in chalk written on the side-
walks and at other conspicuous places telling them that * ' to*
morrow afternoon Mr. So-and-So will speak at the Young
Men's Christian Association rooms." As a rule, also, the
same announcement is made in the various churches on the
next morning and the fact is given publicity in as many
ways as possible. Saturday Evening Mail, Jan. 16, 1897.

31. It is a simple and antidotal volume of advice and
suggestion about the manners, customs, habits and moral
qualities and methods of work which a priest ought to culti-
vate. The Outlook, Jan. 16, 1897. The Books of the Week.

32. The Board of Superintendents, acting as a central
body for the whole school system of the city, has attended
to all appointments and promotions; the superintendent
states it to be the present method of administration. The
Outlook, Jan. 16, 1897. The Teaching Profession.

33. He did it more cleverly than the inventor and his
efforts in the performance were an improvement upon Hou-
din's methods. Heller was the first magician to introduce a
lady confederate and assistant in the magical entertain-
ment. He likewise discarded the use of all visible ap-
paratus, curtains and tapestries. Wyman is perhaps the
first magician the present middle age can recollect of its

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 59

childhood. His methods were clumsy in contrast to those
of latter day magicians, but his wonders seemed marvels
and his crowning feat of extracting real eggs and a live
chicken from an apparently empty bag was a feat beyond
which nothing appeared more startling. He combined ven-
triloquism with his entertainment and a large source of his
fame rested upon his powers in this species of entertain-
ment. Indianapolis Journal, Jan. 17, 1897. Magic and
Magicians.

34. The doctors had failed in the attempt to secure pic-
tures of the thoughts in their minds, and only attained their
purpose by the indirect method of having them impressed
first on the brains of others. Before the subjects were
placed under the hypnotic spell each was instructed to think
of nothing but his own hand. Each imagined, then, that
the laboratory was full of hands and, judging by the dis-
tinct impressions received of a photographic plate, the hands
were really there. Indianapolis Journal, Jan. 17, 1897.
Thought Photography.

35. The district method of electing county commission-
ers works very unjustly in this county. Under the present
system Indianapolis, which with its suburbs, has nine-tenths
of the population of the county and pays eight-tenths of the
taxes, has only one of three commissioners. The result is
that it has little or no voice in the action of the board, be-
ing always voted down in matters of local interest by the
country members. If the district method of electing com-
missioners is to continue in general, an exception should be
made of counties containing cities of a certain population.
Editorial in Indianapolis Journal, Jan. 20, 1897.

36. The Associated Press report of the scene with
Speaker Reed says that the committee of members pointed
out the necessity of the buildings mentioned, and said that

60 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

it was evident that the majority of the House desired their
consideration. Speaker Keed asked them if they were
aware that the government was running behind in the mat-
ter of revenue at the rate of $58,000,000 a year. It was a
question of the ability of the government to meet and pay
its obligations. The committee replied that the bills did
not appropriate a dollar, but only fixed the maximum of
cost of the buildings, the appropriations being left in the
hands of future Congresses. Mr. Reed said that he did not
approve of this method of mortgaging the revenues of the
government, to which the committee replied that they could
not mortgage what did not exist and thought that the sub-
ject of making appropriations could be safely left to future
Congresses. The committee came away feeling that it was
not a cheerful outlook. Indianapolis Journal, Jan. 21
1897.

37. An operator comes forward, and under his guidance
we look into the methods of attending to a most important
branch of the fire service — that of receiving and recording
an alarm of fire from a street box, and transmitting the
same to the engine companies nearest to the fire, in the
shortest possible time. * * * After this when we see a
fire company responding to the call of duty, we will better
appreciate the methods that have been used to send them on
their noble errand. St. Nicholas, Feb., 1897.

38. Au Gau gazed scornfully upon the scene, as these
demon-like figures danced in and out of the smoke and fire,
"Look at those red-headed demons! They seem to be fire-
proof, ' ' he remarked to his uncle. After pondering a while,
he continued: "I have been told that all this noise, fira
and smoke is to drive away evil spirits; but it seems to
bring them, like flies around a sugar bowl." The seeming
failure of this noisy method of combatting- the bad spirits set
his young mind to thinking. St. Nicholas, Feb., 1897.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 61

39. Mr. Carlisle is an able man, and, as politicians go,
a good deal of a statesman, but he has not developed any
originality or ability as a financier nor shown any familiar-
ity with financial methods. Indianapolis Journal, Jan. 30,
1897.

40. WASHINGTON, Jan. 30. — Communications from the
church bodies in various parts of the country are being
received by members of the House committee on military
affairs regarding the action of the secretary of war in
granting permission for the erection of a Catholic cathedral
building on the government grounds at West Point. The
matter seems to have brewed a commotion nearly equal to
that which has raged over school appropriations if the let-
ters coming in are a sign. Several communications from
bishops, ministers of organizations, as well as from laymen,
have been received. Three other religious bodies have ap-
plied for information as to whether they will also be allowed
to place church buildings on the West Point grounds. It
is possible that the matter may be brought before Congress
by a resolution of inquiry or some other method. Indian-
apolis Journal, Jan. 31, 1897.

41. The antiquity of the legal methods is curiously illus-
trated by the recent discovery of the oldest will extant.
This unique document was unearthed by Professor Petrie at
Kahum, Egypt, and is at least four thousand years old. In
its phraseology the will is singularly modern in form, so
much so that it might be admitted to probate to-day. In-
dianapolis Journal, Jan. 31, 1897.

42. The Administrative Board of Libraries, Laboratories
and Museums at meetings held on November 28, 1896, and
January 23, 1897, took the following action :

In the place of Special Regulation No. 3 governing De-
partmental Libraries, the following was substituted :

62 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

All officers of instruction may, with the approval of the
appropriate departmental adviser withdraw books from the
library of their own department and retain them for a lim-
ited period to be agreed upon by the borrower and the de-
partmental adviser.

In the carrying out of this rule, the following methods
shall be employed :

1. The records of withdrawal of books are to be kept in
each departmental library in an instructor's loan book pro-
vided for that purpose, and the drawer shall record his
name, etc., title of the book, accession number, and the date
of the withdrawal.

2. The departmental adviser in connection with the head
of the department shall determine the conditions under
which books may be withdrawn from a department library,
and inform the general library of these conditions.

3. The departmental adviser may through the genera]
library call in the book at any time. University Record,
Chicago, Jan. 29, 1879.

43. No one has blamed Mr. Rohl-Smith for accepting a
commission which was offered him by those having legal
power to make the offer. Those whom the society has
blamed are the officials who selected a work of art for other
than artistic reasons. It is not necessary to speculate as to
the motive of those who have misled him into taking such
a stand. They have succeeded, however, in furnishing an-
other example as to methods which, in this instance, the
society has deplored, and have done everything possible to
preclude even helpful criticism until it is too late to be of
any use. Statement of National Sculptor Society, N. Y.,
Jan. 31, 1896, Indianapolis Journal, Feb. 1, 1897.

44. The junketing was harmless, but it helped to over-
shadow the business side of the visit and excited rather an

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 63

undue amount of censorious comment. In spite of this fea-
ture, however, the visitation method continued because it
seemed to be the only available means of getting the desired
information. The bill passed by the House, if it becomes a
law, will end the junketing business. It provides that after
an election of members of the Legislature, and at least forty-
five days before the session opens, the Governor shall ap-
point a commission consisting of one senator and two rep-
resentatives-elect, who shall visit and inspect all the state in-
stitutions and report to the Legislature regarding their con-
dition and needs. The commission is allowed thirty days
in which to visit all the State institutions, and as there are
fifteen of them in different parts of the State this is not too
much. Editorial in Indianapolis Journal, Feb. 1, 1897.

EDUCATIONAL MEANINGS.

1. " There is much yet to be said upon the well-worn
subject, Bible study. There is still occasion to ask the
question — and to ask it with all the emphasis which lan-
guage can furnish — is the Bible of all books, the book to be
studied? Shall not our children in school, our sons and
daughters in college, our young men in the theological semi-
naries, study this book, whatever else they may or may not
know? Shall we teach the most minute and the most pru-
rient details of Eoman and Greek history and literature,
and allow, yes, compel an ignorance of even the general
features of a history and a literature which in spite of every
untoward circumstance have penetrated and elevated the
thought and life of humanity as have no other? But it is
not my purpose, at this time, to discuss the subject of Bible
study.

"There is much also to be said, more by far than most
people imagine, on the closely related question, Bible study.
Please note place of emphasis, Bible study (emphasis on

64 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

study.) The mass of those who count themselves Bible
students never study. They read, perhaps: they seldom
think, they never study. Shall we continue thus to de-
ceive ourselves? Shall we substitute the most hurried and
superficial perusal of a verse or chapter for an earnest,
faithful examination of that passage, and allow ourselves
fondly to suppose that we have studied it? Shall that
which, in some cases, is worse than no reading at all, be
falsely dignified and dishonestly branded as study ? But it
is not my purpose at this time to discuss the subject of Bible
study.

"Much is being said in these days about the methods of
Bible study. What method shall we adopt ? is the question
asked. Is there one method, and are all other methods tc
be cast aside ? Will two men ever do the same thing best in
the same way ? Is it not true that a method helpful to one
man, or set of men, is often ruinous to another man, or set
of men ? Shall we not seek independence, not only of spirit
but as well of method, of any and every method? The
word method is too frequently but another term for the
word rut. And yet there must be method. He who works
without plan and aimlessly will find his results without
form, and void, chaotic. But it is not my purpose at this
time to discuss methods.

"We who are gathered here to-day are Christian men.
There is in the mind of each one of us a firm purpose, or at
least a strong desire, to know the Word of God. I have in
mind both kinds of knowledge — that spiritual grasp of the
sacred book, that personal experience of certain truths
which will enable us to make practical use of the same in
the hand-to-hand work of the street or inquiry room ; that
knowledge the ability to use which measures our strength
in Christian work. This kind of knowledge does not come
at once; the memorizing of verses here and there will not

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 65

bring it. It is the highest of possessions. It is the deepest
of all knowledge. It will come in time to the child of God.
but to him only in time — after long and persistent effort.

* ' But back of this spiritual grasp, or underneath it, there
is a knowledge of another kind. Must I, for lack of a bet-
ter term, call it intellectual? The two make one; the?
must not be separated ; either without the other will inevit-
ably lead to error.

"An intellectual grasp of the Scriptures will lead to
what ? A mastery, so far as possible, of the details of Bible
history ; a putting together of this and that event ; an inves-
tigation of the great epochs ; a study of the great characters ;
an inquiry into the cause of things as they are represented
in Scripture and their relations to each other. An appre-
ciation of the literary forms of the various books ; a knowl-
edge of the circumstances under which they had their
origin; the purpose each was to subserve; the people for
whom they were originally written ; their history. An abil-
ity to interpret; to apply principles of interpretation com-
mon to all writings ; a familiarity with those special princi-
ples demanded by the unique character of the Bible. It is
for this kind of knowledge — critical, it may be called, yet
necessary to a conservation of the truth; intellectual, yet
forming the basis of the deepest spiritual work — that we
who are here to-day ought to strive.

"The work before us is stupendous. The field is an in-
exhaustible one. An intellectual grasp of the contents of
the Scripture is not something which falls into one's hands
without putting forth of effort. Effort, indeed, may be put
forth, and the result not come. But the least one can do is
to make the effort.

"What, now, shall be the character of the effort put
forth ? It is this which will determine the character of the
results. Describe to me the effort which at the present time

66 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

is being made in any given section or by any individual,
and I will calculate for you the results, which are being at-
tained in that section or by that individual. Everything
turns on the effort, and is it not true a single word may be
found which will describe the ideal effort, and that word is
systematic ? '

"Now, let me ask this question: Has the effort which
you have been making all through life toward a comprehen-
sion of the facts and truth of Holy Writ been a systematic
one? Are you ready to answer yes? Do you not like to
confess that it is not ? Before committing yourself one way
or another, before confessing that you have not been system-
atic, before dogmatically asserting, at the risk of being
wrong, that you have been systematic, let us inquire what is
meant by ' systematic. '

"Have you had a clearly denned purpose in your work
and has that purpose been a correct one ? The stream never
rises higher than the fountain. Your work will never
reach higher than your ideal. How is it now ? Is the ideal
in your case a low one? What have you been aiming at?
There are some who study merely to satisfy themselves.
They are always taking in, always adding to their store of
knowledge. This knowledge, great though it may be in
amount, valuable though it may be in character, is of little
or no practical value to those who possess or those about
them. To this class belong many of those who are known
as scholars. Am I here to speak against scholarship —
against the most critical and painstaking investigation?
God forbid. But is it not true that from the men who have
this great knowledge, the men whom God has given the op-
portunity to obtain it, we have a right to expect — yes, de-
mand— something by way of return? There are on the
floor from various quarters of our country men of the ripest
and highest scholarship in biblical studies. Shall they not

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 67

open up their hearts and come down from their lofty pedes-
tal and take an interest in the promulgating of intelligent
ideas concerning this sacred volume ? The time has passed
when scholarship should be divorced from popular work,
when men who have great stores of knowledge shall stand
aloof from the masses.

"But there are some who go to the other extreme — they
are always giving out, never filling up. In the treatment of
a Scripture passage it is entirely sufficient to ascertain what
seems to be the great lesson inculcated and to present this
lesson to those who are dependent on them for the bread of
life without any effort, either to master for themselves the
substance of the Holy Scripture or to help others to do so.
These people are always applying, seldom studying, never
teaching the sacred word. And what do they apply ? Their
own ideas, not the Bible. The pupils may remain under
their charge for many years and be none the wiser as to the
real contents of the Bible. My friends, what is our great
purpose in this study ? Do we belong to either of the classes
I have briefly described? If so, we are laboring from a
point of view which is inconsistent with a systematic Bible
study. What, then, should be our purpose ? To know the
Bible, book by book; to become saturated with its thought
and its spirit, and then to lead others to the same knowl-
edge. The more God has allowed us to know of its won-
derful truths the greater the responsibility which rests upon
us. But, however much or however little we may know, it
should be our great aim to teach that, and not something
else as a substitute. Why will men, teachers and preach-
ers, with a self-conceit which is incomprehensible, imagine
that their thoughts about the Bible, their deductions from
its pages, are of more value, are more greatly to be desired,
than the precious words themselves ? The world is starving
for the Bible. A systematic study will be one grounded on

68 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

the principle that the sacred word itself is to be studied in
such a manner that it may again be taught to those who
need it, and not man 's feeble ideas concerning it. Have you
in mind, my brother, the right purpose ?

' * But your effort, to be systematic, must be submitted to
another test. Has it been in accordance with a carefully
wrought-out plan?

"Will you recall the steady growth, the wonderful prog-
ress of Israelitish history from the smallest beginning,
through trial and trouble, then victory and possession — the
organization of the nation by Samuel, the establishment of
the monarchy by David ; its disruption at the death of Sol-
omon ; apostasy and sin followed by the destruction of the
northern nation; again the apostasy and sin and the long
captivity; the return, almost pitiable in contrast with the
former glory, the bickering and strife, the gradual dying
out of the national' fire, that divine inspiration which had
burned for so many centuries ? Has your plan of study in-
cluded a careful comparison of these periods, their relation
to each other, and the special part played by each in the
great drama — the world's redemption?

"With your knowledge of Israelitish history thus gath-
ered and systematized, have you gone back again to the be-
ginning and taken up the study of the prophecy (inter-
woven so closely with that history as almost to be identi-
fied with it), and followed, generation by generation, cen-
tury by century, the growing fabric of the revelation of
God; the lines, branching out in this direction and that
now dim, now resplendent in glory; new lines starting up
and moving side by side with the old, until all lines, old
and new, converge in the life work and death of the Christ ?

"The man who has not studied prophecy in this way
noting carefully the origin and development of each of the
many ideas which, taken together, proclaim the coming of

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 69

a deliverance and Deliverer, a salavation and a Savior; the
man who has not connected the prophetic utterances with
the great events of history and personal experience from
which they sprang and of which they form a part, has he
done the work worthy of being called systematic?

''Has your plan made provision also for the great bookr
of Old Testament philosophy, Job, Proverbs and Ecclesi
astes; for that collection of laws, the most wonderful the
world has ever seen? Have you ever made a systematic
study of that most sacred and fascinating of all subjects, the
life of Christ; or the life and the writings of the Apostle
Paul? The question is, my friends, are we studying ac-
cording to a plan which includes all these subjects and many
more, in an order which will enable us most clearly to grasp
their meaning, and the mutual relation which they sustain
to each other? Have you any plan at all? Is it perhaps
possible that some of us have been moving around in a cir
cle, and not forward? Are some of us feeding from hand
to mouth, not knowing, not even caring what is to come
next? Without a plan, flexible perhaps, yet definite, there
can be no systematic study.

"But again: Our work, if it is to be in the best and
strictest sense systematic, must be independent. A machine
may be systematic, but the human mind, if its system is
only that of a machine, would better be unsystematic. The
student makes no real progress who is satisfied with having
learned what some one else has said concerning the mean-
ing of a verse or the scope of a passage; who always fol-
lows ; who is always leaning upon another. Such a student
crams; he does not digest. Is craming consistent either
with any true purpose or any prepared plan? Such work
is done for the moment, not for all time. Is such work
honest, not to speak of its being systematic ? The lack of
independence explains a multitude of failures under our

70 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

present system, admirable as it is. Many of us, strangely
enough, suppose that we need only read the notes published
in any sheet, or perhaps only the practical lessons suggested,
and in time we will come to know the Bible. This is wrong,
partly because these notes are in too many cases the merest
trash, and partly because, even when most excellent, they
are not properly studied. The Bible student who feels that
the preparation of his Sunday school lesson is all the Bible
study which he need undertake, who is satisfied to study
that lesson as he would be ashamed to study a lesson for
the school room, often, oh, how often makes an out-and-
out failure. Crutches are freely furnished us these days —
so freely indeed, that too many of us have forgotten how to
stand on our own feet. If our work is to be systematic, it
must be planned and executed independently, and not in
slavish dependence upon some one man or set of men.

' * A systematic study of the Bible will be a logical, philo
sophical study of it. It will not be the mere memorizing of
a list of names and dates; the naming of the most impor-
tant cities, villages, rivers and mountains. It will not be d
study of a verse here and a passage there without consider
ing that verse or passage in the light of the context. It
will not be the citing, as from heaven, of words quoted bj
an inspired writer from the mouth of, perhaps, Satan
himself. The attempt to exhaust the meaning of a verse,
without first a study of the chapter of which the verse is a
part, or of a chapter without first a study of the book of
which the chapter is a part — such an attempt is illogical ; it
is more, it is absurd. There must be logical order; there
must be consecution, connection, or the work will be defec-
tive. We must know who it was, where it was and when
it was; but we must know more, if it is possible to know
it. The effort will be comparatively a failure if we do not
also discover why it was. But I must hasten.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 71

"Our study, to be systematic, must be comprehensive.
Mastery of details is needed, yet also mastery of the subject
as a whole. ' It is a mistake to suppose for a moment that
Bible study consists in the study of isolated texts, or in the
study of single chapters ; or even in the study of the entire
book. A man might study verses all his life and know
comparatively little of the Bible. Besides, the man who
studies only verses does one-sided, imperfect, narrow work.
As has been said, he who does not have in mind the entire
book, and from this standpoint do his work, does not and
cannot appreciate the full force of a single verse contained
in that book. The same thing holds good in a higher
sphere. It is not sufficient merely to have a comprehensive
knowledge of a given book. Although we may know the
contents, the analysis, the occasion, purpose, author, etc..
etc., of this book, there is still something to be ascertained.
What? The place of that book in the Bible as a whole;
its relation to other books; the relation of its contents to
the contents of the entire Bible, to the entire plan of God
for the salvation of men. How comparatively contempti-
ble, after all, is the study of mere verses! How much he
loses who satisfies himself that, having done this, he has
done all ! We should be close, critical students of a verse ;
we should be searching, analytical students of a book; we
should also be broad, comprehensive general students of
the Bible. Let our work, therefore, whatever else it is, be
a comprehensive work, for, unless it is comprehensive, it
will not be systematic.

"Our work must be one which will lead to definite re-
sults. When one has finished a course of study in any de-
partment he will surely be disappointed and dissatisfied
with the subject, his teacher and himself if he is not able
to put his hands on certain definite results. Now, the Bible
is a small book. It is, we all believe, an inexhaustible book ;

72 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

and yet the work of mastering this book is, in one sense, a
very definite one. With a plan of studying looking towards
thorough work and definite results, the facts, the purpose,
the teachings of book after book will come into our posses-
sion ; one principle after another will become familiar ; one
period after another will gradually develop itself before
us.

"Here, alas! is where failure stares most of us in the
face. We study, and we study, and we study ; in infancy,
in childhood, in youth, in manhood, and in old age; and
yet, oh, how many of us must confess it, we accomplish so'
little, the results are so small, that in the pain of soul and
torture of heart we cry out in our disappointment. Am I
wrong when I say that the actual Bible knowledge of the
average Christian is not one-tenth what it ought to be?
Not one-tenth of what it might be if a more systematic
study were in vogue. Pardon me, I beseech you ; but when
I read the hundreds of letters which are coming to me from
all parts of the world — letters from Christian men and
women, teachers, preachers and missionaries, letters con-
taining the most pitiable confessions of ignorance, where
no ignorance should have existed, letters which tell of
yearnings for a better knowledge of the sacred truth — my
heart is filled with indignation that this should be so, for a
fearful responsibility rests somewhere; and then there
comes the feeling of sadness that the experience of these in-
dividuals is being repeated in the case of so many more.
Put the question to yourself. What are the results of your
eight, ten, twenty or thirty years of Bible study ? With how
many of the sixty-six books are you even tolerably familiar ?
How many of them can you think through from beginning
to end, recalling, in a flash, the substance of the entire
book? On how many of the sixty-six books would you be
willing to offer yourself for an examination similar to that

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 73

required of the average freshman in college on Homer?
How many of us here to-night could pass a really respecta-
ble examination on the life of our Lord? Definite results,
definite results, we must have, and if our study does not
bring them we may confidently believe that somehow,
somewhere, something is wrong. Surely no study deserves
the name systematic, no study can be systematic which does
not produce them.

"A word now in conclusion:

"Have you a clear and definite purpose in mind as to
what you are studying for? As to what you are trying to
accomplish ?

* ' Have you a sharply outlined plan in which provision is
made for the intelligent study, one by one, of the great
epochs, the great characters, the great doctrines, and above
all that great life, the life of Christ?

' ' Have you decided that you will think for yourself, that
you will use the mind which God has given you, employing
aids and assistance only when it is necessary and wise?

"Is your study in accordance with the great principles
which underlie the working of the human mind ? Are you
logical? Is there order, connection, consecution?

"Is your work comprehensive? Are you careful not to
lose yourself in a wilderness of detail ; forgetting the great
purpose and the broad plan with which you began your
work ?

"Is your work producing results? At the end of every
month, or three months, or six months, can you feel that
you have made progress? Are the books of the Bible com-
ing, one by one, into your possession? Are you beginning
to look forward to the time when every book will, in some
sense, have been mastered? How is it? Are these things
so? Your work then is systematic.

"This book, your book, my book, God's book — this book,

74 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

I say, we must study ;we must study it in no other way than
did the Incarnate Word Himself. Let us .take Him as our
model, in this as in all work. We must study it Teverently ;
for it is divine; study it historically, for it is human; and
study it systematically, for we were created in the image
of God, and endowed with minds, minds which our Creator
intended we should use.

' ' And in such a work, undertaken by the intelligent men
of our day, entered into with such a spirit and pursued in
such a manner, with God Himself over all and in all, it is
not for the tongue of man to describe, nor for the mind of
man to comprehend what would be accomplished. Lecture
by Dr. W. R. Harper, at Plymouth Church, Indianapolis.

2. A reconstruction of education must come in this
country, and the best methods of character-education be
made universal. Review of Reviews, p. 681, Dec. 1896.

3. She (Switzerland) owes her admirable system of laws
to her methods of- education. Reviews of Reviews, p. 682,
Dec. 1896.

The almost universal education of children under the
Froebel methods seems to be close at hand; it is the new
movement of the age. But Froebel's methods need evolu-
tion and expansion to meet the republican spirit of to-day
in the Pan-American field. Among his methods, which
merit a fuller expression in our child schools of ethical cul-
ture, we may note :

a. Educational walks.

This plan belonged to the methods of both Pestalozzi and
Froebel. These teachers took their pupils to places for the
study of local history, to the flowers for botany, to the rocks
for geology, and to nature for all nature's lessons of life,
etc.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 75

b. Froebel's plan of associating children with little ani-
mals and birds, in order to teach them the brotherhood of
all creatures, the oneness of life, and how to treat dumb
animals, has found illustration in many kindergarten
schools, but in some places has not been regarded as a very
essential feature of his method. But this is an essential
method of heart education, etc.

c. Patriotic education.

This is finding a place in most American kindergarten
schools. As in Switzerland, the children march with the
flag, and sing the songs of Justice and Liberty, etc.

d. Teaching of self-control is an essential part of the
Froebel method, and in no country is this moral develop-
ment more needed than in ours. "To give firmness to the
will, to quicken it, and to make it pure, strong, and endur-
ing, in a life of pure humanity, ' ' says Froebel, * ' is the chief
concern in instruction and in the school, ' ' etc.

e. Stories of imagination. We must have a new litera-
ture for children to meet the needs of the educational re-
vival, after the Swiss and German school methods, which
follow the Hebrew parables. Tales of Indians, bear-hunts,
and of boys who were men before their time, have had their
day of our children's reading. The time has come for a
large place in the education of the creative imagination for
the imagination largely governs life, etc.

f . Kindergartens for friendless children. The rich need
kindergartens as well as the poor, for this form of educa-
tion is the soul 's school. But we believe that no other char-
ity represents so much in life as the kindergarten, for it
stands for the moral evolution of life from the beginning ; it
is the gospel of the Sermon on the Mount, of beatitudes put
into the heart and habits of the child by the natural way of

76 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

the playground, through the exercise of the creative facul-
ties. Kindergarten Age, Review of Reviews, Dec., 1896.

4. What has inductive, statistical, or scientific child-
study accomplished thus far that would suggest modifica-
tions in the present curricula or methods of teaching in our
schools ?

How may the results of child-study be best embodied in
the curricula and methods of teaching in our schools as rap-
idly as they become reasonably well established? The Bul-
letin, Vincennes, Ind., Jan., 1897.

5. Probably no person who has undertaken the subject
of child-study has done so much to * interest the average
teacher as Earl Barnes. He has a method of study all his
own, which he has used industriously as may be seen when
one reads his Studies in Education now being published. A
sample of the Barnes method will illustrate :

Once a mother gave a child for a birthday present — the
child was just 6 years old — a beautiful box of paints. In
the afternoon while the mother was busy in another room,
the child painted all the parlor chairs so as to make them
look nice, and then called out: "0 mamma, come and see
how pretty I have made the parlor." The paint could not
be washed off and so the chairs were spoiled. What would
you have said or done had you been the child 's mother ?

One day the teacher left the room and while she was
gone, several children in the room began to make a noise,
The teacher heard the noise as she came back, but did not
know which children were out of order, and none of the
class would tell her. So she kept the whole class in after
school. Was the punishment just or unjust, and why?

Thousands of children were given these and like stories
for language exercises. The papers were sent to Prof.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 77

Barnes who made a careful study of each set. The Bulle-
tin, Vincennes, Ind., Jan., 1897.

6. These illustrations, though long, illustrate the method
of presenting the story of Dante to children. It is translat-
ing it into their own experience. P. 3 of Leaflet 12.

7. "Should a Divinity School Teach the Student What
to Believe, or How to Think?"

* ' The answer which should be given to this question by a
divinity school is not different from the answer which
should be given by any other sort of school, as, for example,
by a school of law or medicine. It is necessary that the law-
yer, at the very beginning of his practice, have a mind well
stored with knowledge concerning laws and precedents and
courts, else woe be to his clients. It is necessary also that
he have a mind well trained to think, else woe to his clients.
The same two-fold preparation is necessary for the physi-
cian. There was once a system of medicine the professors
of which proposed to deal simply with facts easily ascer-
tained and catalogued, to treat the symptoms of disease
with little reference to its causes, to have remedies set down
in the book appropriate to each ache and pain and fever and
chill, and thus to dispense with thought. Students were
prepared in a few months to practice medicine in this way.
A frightful record of failure to cure soon evinced the folly
of this education. But it would have been equally foolish
to send the young physician into the world with no prepa-
ration except the mastery of the laws of reasoning. It is
even more necessary for the minister than for the lawyer
and the physician to be acquainted with a wide range of
truth and also to be able to employ it thoughtfully and
wisely. To administer error to his people is as much more
hurtful than to administer poison as the soul is of greater
value than the body, and as eternity is longer than time. Tc

78 THK PROBLEM OF METHOD.

administer truth to them is the one function of his office,
since it is only by means of the truth that God will bring
them to repentance and afterward perfect them in holi-
ness: "Sanctify them through the truth; thy word is
truth. ' ' Yet truth, to be effectual, must be presented in
reasoned forms; the minister must use it so as to convince
and to persuade ; he must interpret it to the mind and to the
heart ; he must adapt it to the various characters, to the ex-
perience, and to the wants of his hearers : and hence he must
think.

* ' I conclude, therefore, that it is the function of a divinity
school to teach both what to believe and how to think.

* * But let us assume for a moment that the chief aim of the
divinity school should be to make thinkers of students. Let
us then ask how this can best be done. Various methods
have been employed, and I request you to look at them.

' ' First. The education which appeals chiefly to the mem-
ory has often been tried, and it is still in favor with many.
It prevails in England in those schools which exist for the
purpose of training young men for the civil service examina-
tions. It prevails in this country in a large number of pri-
vate schools which secure patronage by guaranteeing to fit
any student for college in a given length of time, often very
brief. In a school of this kind there is a large body of
teachers, each -one of whom has certain hours of work in
the class room and certain other hours of private tutoring,
during which he communicates to the student the tasks of
the coming day. The student does not acquire; he only
receives.

' ' Such an appeal to the memory once constituted the prin-
cipal function of the teacher, and this method of education
was predominant in the lower schools of the whole world
throughout the seventeenth century, and a large part of the
eighteen. It was reinforced by the daily use of the rod.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 79

Boys and girls were prepared for life as geese are prepared
for the market in Strassburg, where they are kept in cages;
and crammed with food through a pipe thrust down their
necks. This was supposed to be the only successful method
of making thinkers; but we now know that the student re-
sembled a goose not only while he was subjected to it, but
also afterward so long as he lived.

"Are there any schools in which men are trained for the
the ministry chiefly by the communication of truths to be
accepted with little regard to their systematic arrangement
or their relation to human reason and with no requirement
of independent research? I could name several. Their
supporters believe that the method which prevails in them
produces trained thinkers. There is no ground, however
on which it can be justified, and it must prove as inadequate
in a divinity school as elsewhere.

"Another method of teaching men to think is that of spec-
ulation. Its native home is Germany, that land of great
realities and great dreams; but like many other natives of
Germany it has emigrated, and other countries are now re-
ceiving whatever good or evil it has to give. Look back at
the great outburst of pantheistic philosophy under Fichte,
Schelling, and Hegel, a storm which bore everything before
it, and drew into its vortex every faculty of philosophy in
the German universities. No professor was called a thinker
who opposed its course, and any professor was reckoned as
a thinker if he could expound and extend these speculations.
Students rushed in thousands to the lectures of such men,
confident that they were being taught to think. This is
but one example which might be produced. The history of
theological education is especially full of them ; for theolog-
ical faculties of Germany have been swept off their feet re*
peatedly by overflowing floods of speculation which have
had "their little day and ceased to be."

80 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

"But is there no difference between a theorizer and a
thinker ? The theorizer has his office in the world ; he sug-
gests many false things and some true ones; he stimulates
the imagination and provokes discussion ; he is the Will-o '-
the wisp of science, dancing forward to lure it to regions
hitherto dim and unknown, but preferring to hold his course
over the marshes and jungles where it is dangerous to fol-
low. The thinker has a far higher place. The thinker is
the man who thinks soberly, justly, profoundly; who can
distinguish the proposition that is proved from the proposi-
tion that is only probable and this again from the proposi-
tion that is only possible or certainly false. If the divinity
faculty spends a great deal of its time in teaching the gor-
geous theories which have come and gone in the past, or
which dazzle the eyes of the visionary in the present, it will
not make thinkers, but, on the contrary, will send into the
pulpits of the world a multitude of speculators and dream-
ers to dazzle their hearers, but not to enlighten them.

"Once more. Educators have sometimes supposed that
students could be trained to think by dwelling chiefly on the
laws of thought, the science of logic, the method of detect-
ing fallacies. This was the theory of the middle ages, and
even the divinity faculties of the great universities taught
the logic of Aristotle far more diligently than the Bible or
the creed. This logic was greatly extended in its range,
and became an intricate algebra. We study it in our col-
leges chiefly as a curiosity of history, devoting a month or
six weeks to it ; but at Paris and Oxford and Bologna it re-
quired years. The students were usually candidates for the
priesthood. What was the result of the excessive cultiva-
tion of the art of reasoning ? The student gathered no suf-
ficient materials on which to exercise his art, so that, in
general, it remained a mere art. At its very best it gave
us the old scholastic philosophy and theology, which the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 81

world was already laughing to scorn before the Reforma-
tion appeared. It affected preaching disastrously, for the
preacher who did not interlard his sermons with its unintel-
ligible jargon was supposed, even by the common people,
not to be able to think, and could not get a hearing. Try
to read one of the sermons of Wiclif , and fancy it addressed
to men and women, many of whom did not know the alpha-
bet ; nay, fancy it addressed to an assembly of the greatest
scholars. Then, while you are amazed that such an appa-
ratus of scholastic logic was ever brought into the pulpit,
remember that Wiclif was freer from it than others of his
age. Here is a fragment from The Saint's Tragedy, by
Kingsley, in which a heretic preacher of the thirteenth cen-
tury is represented as imitating the sermons of friars which
he had heard :

"This man shed blood, and by man shall his blood be
shed. Now behold an argument. This man hath shed
blood, even Conrad ; ergo, as he saith himself, ye, if ye are
men, shall shed his blood. Does he not himself say ergo?
Hath he not said ergo, to the poor saints, to your sons and
your daughters, whom he hath burned in the fire to Moloch ?
'Ergo, thou art a heretic.' 'Ergo, thou shalt burn.' Is
he not therefore convicted out of his own mouth?"

"Much of the preaching of the middle ages was as tech-
nical and idiotic as this.

"A similar mistake was made at a later period in refer-
ence to the new logic, the inductive method of reasoning.
Bacon supposed that it could be acquired and practiced .by
any man, so that he would think safely and soundly by fol-
lowing its rules.

uThe over-valuation of the science of logic, whether de-
ductive or inductive, has been remedied. But it would be
possible for us to substitute for the rules of reasoning in
general the rules of reasoning in some limited field of in-

82 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

quiry. We might devote so much time to the method of
astronomical research as to slight the substance of astron-
omy and leave the student ignorant of it. We might devote
so much time to the elements of criticism in art and litera-
ture as to slight art and literature themselves, and leave the
student ignorant of them. We might devote so much time
to the criticism of the Old and New Testaments as to slight
the Old and New Testaments themselves, and send our stu-
dents to the churches ignorant of these divine treasures of
knowledge. Thinkers would not be made in this way.

"How 'then shall we teach the student to think? Cer-
tainly not by overlooking the laws of reasoning in general,
or in the special fields of bibical, theological, and historical
criticism. Certainly not by overlooking the great theories
which have arisen in the history of the church. Certainly
not by neglecting the memory. These things have their
places in any just scheme of education, and the method
which I shall recommend embraces them all.

' ' It also unites the two alternatives presented in the ques-
tion before us, so that they cease to be alternatives, and be-
come but parts of a harmonious whole.

"Let us look at the first alternative. The best way to
teach a student what to believe is to present the truth to
him in ordered form and in the light of reason, requiring
him, at the same time, to gain much of it by his own search-
ing. None of you will question this, and I need not dwell
on it.

' ' Let us now look at the second alternative. The best way
to teach a student how to think is to present the truth to him
in an ordered form and in the light of reason, requiring
him, at the same time, to gain much of it by his own search-
ing. This proposition may not be quite so obvious as the
preceding one, and I shall spend a moment in seeking to
commend it to you.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 83

1 ' First of all, it requires that truth shall be presented in a
logical form, a system, an organic and well-proportioned
body. The truth is not necessarily science; it becomes
science only when it assumes such a form as this ; and when
it is set forth as a science it begets a scientific habit of
thought in the student. He spends several years in com-
muning with truth thus arranged, and his mind acquires a
habit of good arrangement ; careless methods of thought be-
come odious to him; and when he writes or preaches his
productions manifest order, proportion and progress. More-
over, growing accustomed to arrange his thoughts system-
atically, he soon learns to make the system which he con-
structs a test of thought, for he discovers that the proposi-
tion which an organized body of truth rejects and casts out
is probably false, while the proposition to which such a body
gives hospitable welcome is probably true. In this method
there is an appeal to memory. But there is also a cogent
appeal to thought, and such an appeal as trains the mind to
think in an orderly and sound manner.

' ' But once more. My proposition requires that the system
of truth be set forth in the light of reason. The grounds
on which it rests are to be adduced, and also the chief con-
siderations which might be urged against it. Thus the
great theories of Christian history will be brought forward.
But they will not be regarded as the chief subjects of study;
they will be assigned to a subordinate place, while the truth
itself will be most prominent. Thus also an apparatus of
criticism will spring up and will be used in subordination
to the subject criticised. In this part of his work the
teacher will take care to cast upon his subject the clear sun-
light of reason, and not the dim and deceptive starlight of
sophistry or partisan passion. He will take care also not
to permit his strong personality and his great skill in argu-
ment to overwhelm his students. He will encourage them

84 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

to think independently, to differ from him if they wish, and
to enter upon new provinces of thought with zeal and con-
fidence. Sir William Hamilton devoted one hour each week
to conversing with his students about any objections and
difficulties which his teachings had occasioned in their
minds. Such an exercise would be profitable if the teacher
should conduct it in a fair and open manner, gladly recog-
nizing any valuable suggestion from the learners, and en-
couraging them to think for themselves. It would be hurt-
fill if he should be intolerant of criticism or too dominant in
his defense of his own positions.

"Lastly, the method requires the student to spend much
time in investigation. It does not merely encourage him to
do so ; it lays upon him a command to do so ; and it denies
him full credit if he fails to do so. The teachers can pre-
sent to him only the central things, and he is to gain other
things by his own industry. Thus the divinity school ceases
to be a mere refectory where he nourishes himself at tables
prepared for him, and becomes only a gymnasium where he
trains and develops every faculty and power of the mind
for ardent and skillful exertion in the ministry to which he
is called. ' ' By Professor Franklin Johnson, D. D., Univer-
sity Record, Chicago.

8. Although the foregoing experiments suffice to show
that the periodic variations were of central rather than of
peripheral origin, I sought a method of experimentation
which would enable me to form a clearer idea of the relative
influence exerted on the height of the contractions by the
fatigue of the muscles and the change occurring in the cen-
tral nervous system. At the suggestion of Professor Mosso
the following form of experiment was adopted. The flexor
muscles of the second finger, weighted with one kilogramme,
were stimulated every two seconds. Two different forms

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 85

of stimuli were employed, electrical and voluntary stimuli,
and they were applied alternately. During the electrical
irritation, the nerves and muscles were stimulated by a
tetanizing induction current, one of the electrodes being
placed over the sternum, the other over the muscle.
Pamphlet on Effect of Fatigue, p. 11.

9. Your commission has found it necessary to discuss
the question of methods of teaching in numerous instances,
while considering the question of educational values and
programs, because the value and time of beginning of the
several branches depends so largely on the method of teach-
ing. Report of Committee of Fifteen, p. 69.

10. The usual way of computing interest is based on 360
days to the year. By the exact method the actual number
of days is found and is regarded as so many 365ths of a
year. This rule is the one adopted by banks and the United
States Government, and it is growing in favor among busi-
ness men. When the time in days is less than 1 year, the
exact interest is found by first calculating the interest ac*
cording to the methods already given, and deducting ^
from the result of the common years and ^\ for the leap
years. Complete Indiana Arithmetic, p. 220.

11. When work has become a habit, and the pupil has
learned to practice the right method from his own impulse
rather than on account of external authority, his education
in school has ended.

But the subject must be adapted to the consciousness of
the pupil, and here the order of procedure and the exposition
depend upon the stage which he has reached intellectually,
for the special manner of instruction must be conditioned
by this. If he is in the stage of sense-perception, we must
use the illustrative method; if in the stage of image concep-
tion, that of combination; and if in the stage of thinking,

86 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

that of demonstration. The first exhibits the object di-
rectly, or some representation of it ; the second considers it
according to the different possibilities which exist in it, and
turns it around on all sides (and examines its relations to
other things) ; the third demonstrates the necessity of the
relations in which it stands either with itself or with others.
This is the natural order from the standpoint of the devel-
oping intelligence; first, the object is presented to the per-
ception ; then combination with other things shows its rela-
tions and presents its different phases ; and, finally, the
thinking activity circumscribes the recklessly moving reflec-
tion by the idea of necessity. Experiment in the method of
combination is an excellent means for a discovery of rela-
tions, for a sharpening of the attention, for the arousing of
a many-sided interest ; but it is no true dialectic, though it
be often denoted by that name. Eoserikmnz's Philosophy
of Education, 1889, p. xiv in Analysis of Contents; in body
of book, p. 98.

12. Hegel employes in this voyage of discovery a method
that he names the "dialectic." It has throughout the ap-
pearance of being a stricter method than that of Fichte's
" Science of Knowledge," and claims to be objective — an
exhibition of the necessity of the process which is in the ob-
ject before us, in contradistinction from mere subjective
reflection upon it made from points of view external to the
object.

Hegel's method does not seek to find an external basis of
attack or defense, but to get this basis from the object it-
self.

Here we have the famous dialectic which is described as
the self-movement of the notion (Begriff). Seize an im-
perfect idea and it will show up its imperfection by leading
to and implying another idea as a more perfect or complete

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 87

form of it. Its imperfection will show itself as dependence
on another. This is the philosophic method seen so clearly
by Plato and stated in his Republic (Book VII, chapter 3).
Pure science according to him has a dialectic method and
starts with hypotheses — or, as we should describe them, de-
pendent ideas, ideas that imply other ideas to make them
possible, just as the idea of inner and outer or positive and
negative imply each other. But this dialectic method annuls
these hypotheses on its way towards the highest principle.
****** The etymological ground is a dan-
gerous one, however, and it is better not to build on it.
Plato seems to mean that the dialectic method starts with
premises given by sense-perception and ordinary reflection,
and seeking the presuppositions of these ascends to the
first principle. An example of this is found in the infer-
ence of independent being as the necessary condition for
the existence of dependent being, and this may be said
to be the substantial insight lying at the basis of all true
philosophy. Plato contrasts this method of ascending from
the imperfect to the perfect by discovering presupposi-
tions with the geometric method that uses axioms or fixed
hypotheses, not being able to deduce them or explain them.
Hegel's Logic, 1890, pp. 57, 58, 174, 175.

PEDAGOGICAL MEANINGS.

1. Method of presenting.

a. Teach the poem as a reading lesson. If the thought
is mastered the song will be full of meaning, and will not
be given as a mere saying of words.

b. Teach the melody by singing each phrase until it is
correctly given. Outline of Music for Township Institute
Work, Vigo County Schools, 1896-7.

2. Francis Bacon had little apitude for scientific re-

88 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

search. He added nothing to the sum of scientific knowl-
edge, yet he gave his name to the scientific method, and
wrote a book which in epoch-making power stands beside
Descarte's Discourse, Newton's Principia, and Darwin 's
Origin of Species. * * * Thus at the outset Bacon sees
that there is a method by which all human knowledge can
be placed upon a sound and permanent basis, and he de-
voted the better part of his life to the attempt to discover
or invent such a method. His first aphorism printed at the
head of this chapter, indeed, its very first line, ' ' a man, the
servant and interpreter of nature," embodies the whole of
the scientific spirit and the scientific method. * *
These subjects are discussed with constant reference to the
new method which he believes able and destined to work a
revolution in human thought and life. * * * (1)
Methods used. The logic now in use serves rather to fix
and give stability to the errors which have their foundation
in commonly received notions than to help the search for
truth. The syllogism consists of propositions, propositions
consist of words, words are symbols of notions. Therefore
if the notions themselves are confused there can be no firm-
ness in the superstructure. It commands assent to the
proposition, but does not take hold of the thing. There are
and can be only two ways of searching into and discover-
ing truth. The one rises from the senses and particulars
to the most general axioms, (laws), and from these princi-
ples, the truth of which it takes for settled and immovable,
proceeds to judgment and to the discovery of middle
axioms. And this way is now in fashion. The other de-
rives axioms from the senses, and particulars, rising by a
gradual and unbroken ascent, so that it arrives at the most
general axioms last of all. This is the true way, but as yet
untried. It can not be that axioms established by argumen-
tation should avail for the discovery of new works; since

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 89

the subtlety of nature is greater many times over than the
subtlety of argument. But axioms duly and orderly
formed from particulars easily discover the way to new
particulars, and thus render science active. The only hope,
therefore, lies in a true induction. One method of deliv-
ery alone remains to us, which is simply this : we must lead
men to the particulars themselves, and their series and or-
der; ivhile men on their side must force themselves for
awhile to lay their notions by and begin to familiarize them-
selves with facts. The conclusions of human reason as
ordinarily applied in matters of nature, I call for the sake
of distinction, Anticipations of Nature (as a thing rash
or premature). That reason which is elicited from just
and methodical process I call Interpretation of Nature.
Baconian Revolt, Inland Educator, October, 1895.

3. But it is no less true that these complaints are due in
no small measure to false methods of linguistic training
generally, or to some cherished prejudices in favor of certain
languages on the part of the teachers ; and it becomes, there-
fore, at the present day, a matter of great practical impor-
'tance to inquire how far our traditional methods of teaching
languages are in conformity with the method of Nature in
her great art of thought-utterance, and how far they may
justly be called on to submit themselves to a revision and a
reconstitution.

As language is a function which belongs as much to every
normal human creature as seeing or hearing, there can be
no difficulty in finding out the method of Nature in its ac^
quisition. We have to answer only two questions: first,
what are the factors of the process by which the human
babe from being capable merely of inarticulate cries, like
any of the lower animals, is developed into an easy and
graceful manipulator of articulate speech? and again, How
far, and in what respects, does this model require to be

90 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

modified in order to enable the expert handlers of the mother
tongue to use any second or third language with like ex-
pertness ?

Why does it seem such a difficult business to acquire a
familiar knowledge of any foreign language, and why so
much brain and so much time spent so frequently on their
acquisition with such scanty results? The answer can be
only one: because your teacher has ignored the method of
Nature, and given you a bad substitute for it in his own de-
vices ; instead of speaking to you and making you respond,
in direct connection of the old object with the new sound,
and thus forming a living bond between the thinking soul,
the perceptive sense, and the significant utterance, he sends
you to a book, there to cram yourself with dead rules and
lifeless formulas about the language, in the middle of which
he ought to have planted you at the start.

These things being so, and the method of nature being so
plain in the matter, we now ask what are the causes that
have led so many of our teachers, even the most accom
plished of their class, to neglect so infallible a guide, and to
follow methods of linguistic inculcation equally unpleasant
in the process and unprofitable in the result?

Let books and not living converse be the final end of the
study of languages ; so they certainly are with the dead lan-
guages; but even with regard to them it is quite certain
that the familiarity and frequent repetition which are the
special virtues of the conversational method both render the
mastery of books, as in the case of the mother tongue, more
complete, and the hold of the printed signature at once
more firm in the grasp and more easy in the approach.

There is one other- objection to the conversational method
in the teaching of languages, viz: that it makes a man a
parrot. Well, a parrot is an imitative animal and so is a

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 91

man, and so far must not be ashamed to own his kinship
with the plumy prattler.

In conclusion, I have a word or two to say with regard to
the occasion and the plan of this little book. In the first
place, whatever may be said of Hebrew or Latin, Greek is a
living language, and must be treated as such even by those
who persist in the notion that, while the method of living
vocal appeal applies in its full extent to modern languages,
it is certainly out of place in the treatment of the two an-
cient languages which justly claim the first place in the lin-
guistic culture of our highest schools.

But since that time, as a natural consequence of the great
educational movement of the age, some very distinct voices
have come to my ear, to the effect that there is something
radically wrong in our way of dealing with languages, and
that the method of teaching by rules and grammar mainly
can no longer be tolerated.

When the young Hellenist has stamped its Greek desig-
nation directly on every object that meets his eyes, and con-
nected it with some single verb that belongs to its signifi-
cance in familiar life, I would then suggest that the teacher
besides the daily repetition of certain forms of common con-
versation, should give a viva voce description of pictures
hung on the wall two or three times a week, which the
learner shall be called on to repeat without any written
notes ; the principle of the method being always to maintain
the direct action of the mind on the object, through the in-
strumentality of the new sound, without the intervention
of the mother tongue.

One other matter requires special notice — a matter not
necessarily connected with the colloquial method, but which
may be wisely used as a help. To each lesson I have ap-
pended a short list of English words, either by family affin-
ity, or by direct borrowing through the Latin, radically

92 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

identical with the Greek. Preface in Blackie's Greek
Primer ) pp. v to xv.

4. In this paper I attempt to contrast the methods of
the Kindergarten with those of the Primary School as it
exists and has existed in America, not with the intention of
disparaging either of these institutions, but in order to point
out a certain fitness of each method for its work in hand.
I claim here, and I claimed long ago when I recommended
the school board of St. Louis in 1872 to establish a kin-
dergarten, that the presence of a kindergarten in a sys-
tem of public schools will, of itself, work some change in
the methods of the primary school, that will be a great bene-
fit to those methods. But I wish to show that the methods
of the primary schools, substantially as they are, have a
foundation in reason, and that it is not well for our friends
of the kindergarten to look always in the direction of a revo*
lution in the methods of the primary school, and the adop-
tion of plays and games and gifts and occupations, or some
manual training modification of these in the course of in-
struction for children from the age of seven to twelve years.
On the other hand I hope to convince the friends of the pri-
mary schools that their methods are not good for children
under seven years, but that the kindergarten methods are
most happily devised for children of the tender age —
between four and six years. As teachers we must not get
the method which we practice in the special grade in which
we are teaching so close to our eyes that it shuts out all
other grades and all other methods. We must study educa-
tion in view of the entire life of man, and never forget that
work with the children is to fit them for manhood and
womanhood. It is not our object to prolong childhood for-
ever; but on the other hand we wish to prevent too rapid
transitions from one stage of development to another. We

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 93

do not wish to see a hot-house system of education, forcing
the growth of our human plants for the world market.
Harris' Kindergarten Methods, pp. 3, 4.

5. According to the classification given by Professor
Brooks in his excellent book entitled, "Normal Methods of
Teaching," there are four correct methods of teaching the
noble science of geography. (1) The Analytic Method.
which begins with the world as a whole, and passes by suc-
cessive divisions down to the State, county, town or city in
which we reside; (2) The Synthetic, which begins at the
smaller division, as a schoolhouse, yard, town, county, etc..
and passes by successive enlargements to the surface of the
world; (3) The Inductive, which begins with the particular
facts of science, and passes to their classification into sys-
tems; and (4) The Deductive, which seizes upon the laws
or general characteristics of a group of facts, and passes
to the particulars embraced under these laws. This last
method is more than analytic. It not only goes from the
whole to its parts, but from the general to the particular.
It is not our purpose to discuss now the relative value, or
the proper employment, of these methods. We seek the
more practical.

Whether the method of teaching the whole subject of geo-
graphy be analytic, synthetic, or inductive, we recommend,
in place of following the text-book, The Topical Method of
Study.

We do this with much confidence, after years of experi-
ment and diligent search for light on the subject, because
it is the best method thus far found by which to create un-
bounded interest among pupils in this study, and because it
enables the teacher to instruct with satisfaction and pleas-
ure. King's Methods in Geography, 1889, pp. 44, 45.

6. In teaching the art of reading, he may teach them the

94 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

sounds of whole words, and by comparison evolve the
sounds of particular letters; or he may associate with the
several letters their respective sounds, and require them to
construct the sounds of words by combination of the letter-
sounds; the one course is analytic, the other synthetic.

But methods are right and necessary in their own place ;
they are parts of one whole, related to each other as antece-
dent and consequent. The observation of particulars is an
incomplete and fruitless process, unless it issue in the estab-
lishment and application of general principles ; but the ap-
plication of such principles must be feeble and unreal unless
founded on previous observation and particulars. In giv«
ing lessons, therefore, the teacher must consider which of
these two methods mainly or wholly, he should adopt.
Currie's Common School Education, pp. 269, 270.

1. The old, long-established method in arithmetic is cal-
culated'to teach the first four processes of addition, subtrac-
tion, multiplication, division, in the order in which they are
named, finishing addition with small and large numbers,
before subtraction is begun, and so forth. A more recent
improvement on this method consisted in excluding the large
numbers altogether at the beginning, and dividing the num-
bers on which the first four processes were taught, into
classes, or so-called circles. The child learns each of the
four processes with the small numbers of the first . circle
(i. e., from 1 to 10) before the larger numbers are consid*
ered ; then the same processes are taught with the numbers
of the second circle, from 10 to 100, then of the third, from
100 to 1,000, and so forth.

Grube, however, went beyond this principle of classifica-
tion. He discarded the use of large numbers, hundreds and
thousands, at the beginning of the course, as others had
done before him ; but instead of dividing the primary work
in arithmetic into three or four circle or parts only, i. e..

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 95

from 1 to 10, 10 to 100, etc., he considered each number as
a circle or part by itself, and taught it by a method that is to
be set forth in the following pages. He recommended that
the child should learn each of the smaller numbers in suc-
cession, and all the operations within the range of each num-
ber, addition, subtraction, multiplication and division, be-
fore proceeding to the consideration of the next higher
number.

In the following, Mr. Grube gives but the outline, the
skeleton as it were, of his method, trusting that the teacher
will supply the rest. The sign of division, as will be ex-
plaineu below, should be read at the beginning: "From
... I can take away . . . — times." By this way of
reading, the connection between subtraction and division
becomes evident.

I. The pure number.
a. MEASURING (comparing).
• • 2.

1

1

1 + 1=2.
2X1=2.

2 -r- 1 = 2. (Read : From 2 I can take

away 1 twice.

2 is one more than 1.

1 is one less than 2.

2 is the double of 1, or twice 1.
1 is one-half of 2.

b. PRACTICE BY SOLVING EXAMPLES RAPIDLY.

1 + 1 = ? 2 — 1=? 2 -- 1 = ? 1 + 1 — 1 X 2 — ?
etc.

c. COMBINATIONS. •

What number is contained twice in 2?
2 is double of what number ?

96 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

Of what number is 1 one-half ?

Which number must I double to get 2 ?

I know a number that has in it one more than one.
Which is it?

What number have I to add to 1 in order to get 2?

II. Applied numbers.

Fred had two dimes, and bought cherries for one dime.
How many dimes had he left ?

A slate-pencil costs 1 cent. How much will two slate-
pencils cost?

Charles had a marble, and his sister had twice as many.
How many did she have?

How many one-cent stamps can you buy for 2 cents?
Soldan's Grube Method, 1878, pp. 5, 6, 10, 12.

8. "While the critics are condemning, (the Quincy
methods] they are found to be diligent in applying them;
and when well incorporated into their own work, the same
persons, unconsciously to themselves perhaps, will be bold
to claim the methods as of their own originating.

The methods of the Quincy schools are the methods which
have been used and are being adopted wherever they are
known and understood, and wherever the teachers have the
skill and the permission to employ them. — George A. Wal-
ton, of Massachusetts Board of Education, in "Methods of
the Schools of Quincy, Mass." ("Education," September,
October, 1883.) The Quincy Methods, 1885, Preface, p. iv.

9. It is not incumbent on teachers to mark out a course
of study, for that is always provided, or at least should be.
It is their function to interpret and teach what is indicated
in the course of study. It is very noticeable that the ' ' eter-
nal why of things" has not been as carefully considered
and answered as the importance of the work demands.

When asked why we teach certain things in a certain

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 97

manner there is often a look of blank surprise which ex-
presses, at least, a query as to whether work and methods
are legitimate fields of investigation. The Inland Educa-
tor, Jan. 1897, p. 291.

10. Geography, well taught, is an educational study
cultivating the imagination and judgment, as well as the
memory; training the mind in both observation and lan-
guage. Perhaps no other branch in the grammar-school
curriculum gives opportunity for culture in so many direc-
tions.

Are we to have question and answer, or topical recita-
tions ? Surely both have a place. During the presentation
of new points the Socratic method is the true one. The
teacher must excite mental activity in the class by skillful
questioning. The children must be led to think, to examine,
to express the results of their study. The teacher should
tell them nothing they can naturally find out for them-
selves; but their earnest study should be supplemented by
bits of information, vivid descriptions and other illustra-
tions, given by the teacher, in their proper connection.
This, and this alone, is true oral instruction, the direction
of the mental activity of the pupils. After this come the
memory-lessons, the definitions, and finally, the reproduc-
ing of the different points of the geography of any country,
by topical recitations. These should be the independent
efforts of the pupils, expressed in their own language.
Crocker's Methods in Geography, 1884, pp. 5, 6, 7, 10.

11. Address delivered at the Winter Convocation of the
Morgan Park Academy, January 4, 1897, by Robert H.
Cornish :

' ' Science is classified knowledge. When the facts of lan-
guage, of mathematics, of history or of literature are put
into orderly arrangement, are grouped according to their

98 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

relationship and are explained by laws then we have the
science of language, of mathematics, or of literature. Sci-
ence thus considered includes all school studies, and stu-
dents of the branches just mentioned are students of science.
This is not the use of the word in our subject. According
to another more restricted use of the word, science includes
a classified knowledge of things objective, that is, of things
that have their existence outside the human mind. Bunker
Hill and patriotism, broad fields and contentment, the ocean
and sublimity may be synonymous terms, but as subjects of
study the surface of the earth and the ocean are fundamen-
tally different from hope and contentment.

Science then is classified knowledge of the facts and phe-
nomena of the physical universe with an explanation of the
reasons of these phenomena so far as the reasons are under-
stood. But the physical universe is a very large affair and
is constantly growing larger through our increased knowl-
edge of it. The men who attempt to include the whole
range of the physical universe in their studies are very few.
Humboldt was perhaps the last of a line of scientific work-
ers who kept in touch with all branches of science and made
contributions to all. Scientific workers divide and subdi-
vide their work and thus we have developed those great
branches of scientific study of which physics, biology, and
astronomy are examples. These branches of science or
sciences are grouped into two great divisions ; ( 1 ) the phy-
sical sciences or those which deal with matter and energy.
Physics, chemistry, and geology, are physical sciences. (2)
Those which deal with matter and energy and an added
something called life. The group constitutes the biological
sciences and includes botany and zoology .as principal mem-
bers.

Our subject then is the value, in a school such as ours, of
the training of one or more sciences not as opposed to but

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 99

as contrasted and compared with other subjects which are
studied by our students.

The time has gone by when it was necessary to enter
into any defense of the place of science in a general educa-
tion. There was a time when the sciences were not recog-
nized as necessary in a college course, much less in a second-
ary school. Latin, Greek, and mathematics, with mental
and moral science which were not science at all, were about
the only things studied at Yale College one hundred years
ago. The colleges all over the country have now admitted
science studies into the general curriculum. • In many col-
leges the science courses are elementary in character and
differ not at all from those given in many high schools.
Into secondary schools which prepare for college the admis-
sion of science studies has been slower than into the colleges
themselves. Time forbids entering into a full discussion of
the reasons for this. I agree with those who say that any
subject that knocks for admission at the door of our already
crowded curriculum should justify its claim. I agree with
Professor Eemsen who says that slipshod laboratory work
in science is a very poor substitute for a good course in
Greek or mathematics. If science courses in college or the
academy are "snap" courses, if they do not as a rule give
either the mental training or spiritual quickening that
comes from other courses they would better be thrown out.
In order to understand better the value of science in school
training allow me to describe the scientific method of work.

I think it is of more value to the student to understand
the scientific method, to develop the scientific habit of mind
than it is to acquire a few or even many facts about a par-
ticular science. The scientific method has the following
steps: (1) The collection of facts. This involves observa-
tion, classification, comparison, measurement. If the ob-
jects dealt with cannot be measured, if they cannot be

100 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

counted, or weighed in a balance, then they do not belong in
the realm of the sciences that I am considering. These ob-
servations it may take years to collect. This part of the
work is of great importance. Every notable scientific
achievement rests upon a long continued series of patient
observations. (2) The enunciation of a general law which
groups and explains the facts. This is called induction or
generalization. The larger the group of facts examined,
the wider the generalization must be to include them all.
(3) The third step is verification by experiment. This
tests the law discovered by applying it to a new case or by
bringing forward the facts not known when the law was
enunciated which prove or disprove it. If our facts cover a
very wide range of phenomena, especially if they belong to
different sciences or possibly to all sciences, then the gener-
alization which groups and explains them is called an hypo-
thesis. This is an effort of the scientific imagination to ex-
plain the reasons which lie back of the laws themselves, or
to discover a more general law. When new discoveries
have confirmed the hypothesis it becomes a theory and a
theory which stands the test of years and to which excep-
tions are not found takes its place among the accepted body
of scientific truth. Let me illustrate these steps. That car-
bonic-acid gas consists of 27 per cent, oxygen is one of a
thousand or more facts known to chemists. That any given
chemical compound always contains the same elements in
the same proportion by weight is a law whose establishment
at the beginning of the present century was attended by a
long and spirited controversy. That chemical compounds
consist of atoms united to form molecules and that the
atoms unite in the ratio of small numbers is a theory which
has stood the test of one hundred years of verification and
which seems likely to become a part of the body of scientific
truth.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 101

The intellectual faculties called into exercise in these pro-
cesses are the powers of observation, of comparison, of in-
ductive reasoning or generalization, and the constructive
imagination. The moral qualities which are developed in
scientific work are patience in prolonged investigation; per-
severance in overcoming obstacles, and openness of mind
to the reception of new truth. It is not clain'e^-t&at-these^
mental and moral qualities are the exclusive^ ppssessiop. #|
scientific men. Such a statement wouldj be/ flflmuii/ I £0.
claim that any investigation not conducted in the scientific
method is of very doubtful value. The dominant motive of
the scientific worker is the discovery and utilization of
truth. To push out the boundary of human knowledge, to
capture some of the territory of the unknown and make it
known is his great aim.

Other motives may lead him on, such as a desire for fame,
for power, or for wealth, but I think it is universally ad-
mitted that the joy of discovery of some -truth new to the
investigator is the greatest connected with his work. The
rewards of the scientific worker are : ( 1 ) the interest and
pleasure of his work; (2) the recognition which he is bound
to receive if his work is well done. It is the scientific
workers whose discoveries afford the means of improvement
of all the material conditions of life. Our modern civiliza-
tion with all it includes of material comfort is a monument
to the scientific thought of the age. It is not the rule, how-
ever, that the inventor becomes rich. Neither does the man
of science. Agassiz had no time to make money. Nor
should people be impatient with the apparently useless dis-
coveries made by men of science. No doubt many investi-
gations will never bear any so-called practical fruit. Yet
many apparently useless facts brought to light in the labor-
atory have upon further investigation yielded practical re-
sults.

102 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

Why then do we advocate science in the schools and espe-
cially in the secondary schools?

Because the habits of mind which have been de
scribed and which are generally characteristic of scientific
men are worthy of cultivation, and some of these, notably
the power -or observation, are cultivated by no study so
well as By nature _ study.

The study of, nature does or should beget a love of
nature and the love and study of nature become a source of
perennial happiness to him whose eyes have been trained to
see her beauties.

" To him who in the love of nature holds
Communion with her visible forms she speaks
A various language : for his gayer hours
She has a voice of gladness and a smile
And eloquence of beauty, and she glides
Into his darker musings with a mild
And healing sympathy that steals away
Their sharpness ere he is aware "

Anyone who has acquired a love of good books and an
intelligent interest in some branch of natural history has
two never-failing sources of happiness.

The study of science and the influence of the scien-
tific method lead to care in making statements and check
one of the serious faults of all young writers, viz., the ten-
dency to make sweeping and exaggerated statements. Pro-
fessor A. H. Tolman of the Department of English Litera-
ture in The University of Chicago, in an article on "Na-
tural Science in a Literary Education," says:

"Great forms of thought, mighty molds which of neces-
sity give shape to our thinking and then to our very imag-
inings, these come to us from the study of things, not from
the study of language. Literature itself must largely find
its raw material, its great metaphors and similes, its vivid

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 103

pictures and mighty symbols within the domain of natural
science, and this increasingly as the years go by.

' ' The chemist 's law of definite and multiple proportions ;
the laws of motion ; the phenomena and laws of light, heat,
and electricity; the strata, the glaciers, and the process of
earth sculpture of the geologist ; the winds, tides and ocean
currents ; the theories of animal evolution ; the struggle for
existence, the survival of the fittest ; the mighty phenomena,
the impressive uniformities, the nebular hypothesis of as-
tronomy— these are great forms of thought as well as facts
and theories of science. A man who is unacquainted with
modern science cannot well understand the language of edu-
cated men and he cannot interpret sympathetically and ade-
quately the literature of his own day. ' '

The study of science develops and strengthens the
imagination and the feelings. The person who studies the
slow processes of geology and undertakes to find out the age
of the earth, or who tries to grasp the distance to the sun as
a measuring stick with which to measure the distance to the
stars must exercise imagination in the higliest degree.

A noted critic said that two men whose imaginations were
the most brilliant of any of their day were Michael Faraday
and Charles Darwin.

Science studies appeal to a certain class of minds
wrhich are but little attracted to other branches of study.
These studies are the intellectual salvation of some who
otherwise might perish by the way. ' '

12. Prof. Cady said that he would not speak as a musi-
cian but as an educator. The present tendency of education
is development from within. The educational world owes
a great debt to Pestalozzi and to Froebel, but neither of
these, nor yet modern psychology, gives us the true basis

104 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

for the development of individuality. This basis as Profes-
sor Cady thinks, is found in ontology, as expressed in Mrs.
Eddy's Science and Health.

Formerly observation was the watchword of education;
then apperception took its place. But conception, unfold-
ing from within, is the watchword of the newest education,
and this is the highest of all. The relation of this to music
is that music is idea and not product of sense development.
Music is conceptive thinking, and hence a positive factor in
education. Thus far it has been too often a positive evil,
in developing vanity on the part of the performer and envy
on the part of the listener; in conveying the impression of
musical consciousness when none exists, and in displaying
bondage to the physical instead of deliverance from it.

The usual test of determining whether a child can dis-
criminate between tones is no evidence of musical conscious-
ness. Music is thought which must be grasped. The
musical idea has three elements; melody, rhythm, and har-
mony, each of which must be conceived and gradually un-
folded. Conceptive development may be expressed in two
words; analysis and synthesis. Analysis is the individual-
izing process; synthesis, the unifying one. Attention is
nothing more than the developing of the conceptive process.

The simplest thing with which to begin is melody. Until
simple melodic phrases can be- conceived there is no evidence
of musical consciousness. The second step is the recogni-
tion of the rhythmic basis of melody, and the third is the
development of the harmonic basis underlying the melodic
and rhythmic expression. When this conceptive founda-
tion has been laid, the forms of musical manifestation, the
voice, or the different kinds of musical instruments may be
considered.

Thus music is the expression of the whole of life. Its

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 105

principles are as fixed as those of geometry and their devel-
opment as logical. The danger lies in considering music as
one-sided, as the language of emotion only. True music
cannot be the language of discord; it must express the
highest unity and harmony.

Professor Cady's methods are employed in the University
Primary School, and frequent references have been made to
them in the School Notes and Plans as published in the Uni-
versity Record. The issue of February 19 gives especial at-
tention to the work in music. ' '

13. In the preface to "The Essentials of Method,"* the
author calls attention to the importance of analogies, and to
the fact that there are many analogical theories of mind.
Of these, two are important :

1. That which regards the soul as a germ containing by
involution that which it is to become by evolution — a self-
active power.

2. That which regards the mind at any given stage of
its development as the resultant of the variations of its en-
vironment.

These two theories are regarded as but two figurative
expressions for the thought that there is a method in the
child, and a method in the subject of study. The preface
adds that the work deals with the adjustment of the sub-
ject-matter and the mind. "It seeks to find the essential
forms of methods of instruction, as determined by the gen-
eral law of development in the mind of the child. ' '

When the author speaks of a method in the child and a
method in the subject of study, it would appear that he
uses the term method in the first case to signify a men-
tal activity, that is, the psychical change occurring in
the child as he develops toward the perfection of his being

* ''The Essentials of Method" (1897) by Charles De Garmo. D. C. Heath & Co.

106 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

under the stimulus of the subject; and that he uses the
term method in the second case, to signify the external
although invisible activity by which each fact or indi-
vidual of the subject of study is produced. For example,
if the subject of study is plants, then it would be thought
that if the author speaks of a method in the subject of
study he would mean the mode of activity by which plant
energy produces the individuals of the plant world. Such,
however, does not seem to be his meaning in examining the
work on pages 91-93. There, by method in the learner, he
refers to the act of observation, abstraction, induction and
deduction, etc. This is in accord with the second view of
method. In referring to "methods with regard to the
thing to be learned," (page 92), no reference seems to be
made to the activity by which each fact or individual in
the subject is produced. The thought seems to be that each
subject or object is a whole consisting of parts. This being
the case, the child's mind may be apprehending the whole,
and proceed from this to a consideration of the parts, giv-
ing an analytic procedure ; or it may begin with the parts
and move toward the whole, giving the synthetic procedure.
Method in this case is also mental, and accords with the
second view of method. On page 93, when speaking of
"method with regard to the teacher" reference is made
to the ' ' monological ' ' and to the ' * dialogical. ' ' In the same
paragraph the author speaks of the "catechetical, Socratic,
developing method." It seems evident from these expres-
sions that he is speaking of external activities, such as ques-
tions, illustrations, example, etc., as method. This is ac-
cording to the first view.

The book consists of three parts :

I. Psychological basis.

II. Necessary stages of rational method.

III. Practical illustrations.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 107

Under the psychological basis the work presents :

1. The individual notion.

2. The general notion.

3. Apperception, or the assimilation of knowledge.
Under the necessary stages of rational method, three are

indicated :

1. Apperception of individual notions.

2. Transition from individual to general notions.

3. The return of the general to individual notions.
Under practical illustrations considerations are presented

concerning language, arithmetic, reading, geography and
history.

The use of the singular form of the word method in the
title of the book, indicates that generally the author implies
the term to signify a definite mode of mental activity, and
not the various devices used to stimulate it. The work is
not, however, free from the latter use. In certain passages
the term is used in a way to imply that the author holds to
the first view of method. In other passages the inference
would be that he holds to the second view. In still others
it would appear that he approaches in his conception the
third view. The following are passages indicating the first
view of method:

1. "It seeks to find the essential forms of methods of
instruction, as determined by the law of development in the
mind of the child." (Preface, page 5.)

2. "Physiological Psychology studies mental acts by
observing and measuring their mechanical occasion and re-
sults, according to the methods of Physical Science." (Page
25.)

3. "When we recognize the process of apperception,
however, then the external standpoint gives place to the
internal one, and the teacher regulates the amount and
method of his instruction by the psychical needs of the

108 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

child, which are determined largely by his knowledge and
his interests. ' ' (Page 27. )

4. "It is net uncommon for us to strive to create inter-
est in study by appealing to emulation, to ambition, to love
of praise, approval of others, duty, etc., or by indulging in
spectacular display in methods. These, and similar diver-
sions may enable us to develop a momentary interest, etc."
(Page 31.)

The following may be noted as indications of the second
view of method:

1. "But if the essentials of right methods are observed,
there may be almost infinite variety of devices in teaching
and reciting the lesson, without vitiating the results."
(Page 86.)

2. "Deduction corresponds most closely to the stage of
application; or to the return from universals to new par-
ticulars." (Page 92.)

3. "The method which begins with the whole and pro-
ceeds to the parts is analytical." (Page 93.)

The work presents, however, a view of method far more
important and fundamental than that indicated in these
quotations which are here given to signify the first and
second views. While the prevailing view in the work is not
strictly that explained in the present treatise as the third
view of method, it maintains a close analogy to it, and is
identical in the sense that a true method is a mental activity
returning in new shape to the original stage.

It will be observed that the method presented is both
triple in form and a return to itself, in that it contains
these stages :

1. Knowing the particular.

2. Deriving the general from particulars.

3. Returning with the general to the consideration of
new particulars.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 109

This is a very important and fundamental view. This,
triple movement and return, however, are found even within
the first stage in which the mind deals with the individual
notion. This renders the view of method presented in the
book still more valuable, because it reveals more fully its
accord with consciousness — consciousness being essentially
subject-object or —

1. A potential capacity.

2. Existence in a particular form or act.

3. A return to the subject, in that the qualities produced
in this special form of activity abide in the subject as a ten-
dency, or as apperceiving material for new activities.

In noting the discussion on pages 45-60, in connection
with the illustration on pages 94-98, it will be observed that
the movement of mind in dealing with the individual ob-
ject is:

1. To consider the object practically as a whole.

2. To consider it ' * in small logically connected sections. ' *
(Page 55.)

The second movement is called by the author the law of
1 'Successive Clearness." It is evident that it is analytic.
These two stages, therefore, resemble very closely the two
that have heretofore been given, in the present work, under
the third view of method. Are the third and the fourth
stages indicated ? The following seems to denote the third
stage or the organization of the distinctions by relating them
to the central unity. "On the other hand, to fail to asso-
ciate the parts of the lesson and to bring them to conscious-
ness as a logical unity, would be to reveal the mind dis-
tracted by the apprehension of a confused mass of discon-
nected details. These two steps, the absorption of individ-
ual notions, and their apperception, Herbart compares to
the process of breathing, calling them the inspiration and
expiration of the soul. Our maxim, step by step, has to do

110 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

with this process, but it is incomplete, for its suggests only
the sub-division without hinting at its purpose — the clear
perception of individuals and their proper synthesis in con-
sciousness. " (Page 56.)

As a hint of the fourth stage, (referred to in this work on
page 26), the following may be quoted: "Next to the for-
mation of the series in instruction comes the need of fixing
it in the mind. This, as we have seen, needs time. It
needs also a constant attention to the matter in hand.
Eepetition gives the time, and skill on the part of the
teacher will secure the attention." (Page 60.)

In this work, therefore, is found a close approach to the
third view of method.

14. In the preface to "Systematic Methodology"* the
author indicates:

1. That the work is written for those interested in un-
derstanding the philosophy of teaching.

2. That the work is to be a systematic treatment of the
problems of teaching.

3. That parts I and II are adapted to those wishing to
master the philosophy of education, and parts II and III to
those desiring to study merely the practical problems that
arise in presenting the different branches of study.

In the introduction there are presented:

1. The idea that methods as usually given are varied,
inconsistent, and even contradictory; that they lack unity
and completeness.

2. The author's view that the art of teaching is capable
of order and of systematic treatment.

3. The thought that there are two important lines of in-
vestigation necessary to make methods rational:

a. The study of the human mind.

* "Systematic Methodology," by Andrew Thomas Smith. Silver, Burdett & Co.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. Ill

b. The study of the nature of truth.

4. The thought that in order to make the discussion
complete and systematic, three things must be done:

a. Terms must be used with consistency.

b. Recommendations must not be given in one
connection and violated in another.

c. Methods in the given subjects must all obey
certain well defined fundamental lines applicable to truth
in general.

5. The statement that one aim of the work is to make
clear to the reader that all school studies which have to do
with a body of truth to be comprehended are capable of be-
ing taught by the same comprehensive plan.

6. The claim that another aim of the work is to make
clear to the learner that there are many school subjects
which do not consist of a body of truth to be comprehended ;
that these are either subjects that may be called arts, or
subjects expressing merely facts to be impressed upon the
memory.

7. An explanation of the terms " practical method" and
"device."

8. The thought that method is, in large part, a derived
science.

Under the explanation of the first aim, the author pre-
sents his view of the world : " In the world of things about
which we study, only individuals exist, while generaliza-
tions are merely contrivances of man wrought out for his
convenience in mastering the truths concerning this world
of real, but individual things."

This same view of the world is again presented under the
discussion of Principle on page 10: "We know nothing of
the essence of mind, as we know nothing of the essence of
matter. Phenomena alone are open to our study. What
mind or matter does we may know, but not what either is. ' '

112 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

Under the discussion of the first aim, the author also pre-
sents "the comprehensive plan" according to which sub-
jects expressing1 truth may be treated. The comprehensive
plan is, ' ' Generalizations of a given order are to be compre-
hended only in the light of the appropriate individuals em-
braced within them/' This is termed "the one compre-
hensive plan or principle of learning."

The book consist of three parts: first, The Nature and
Development of the Mental Faculties ; second, The General
Philosophy of Method; third, Applied Methodology.

Under the first, all forms of psychological activity are
briefly considered.

Under the second, three main topics are' discussed :

1. , The notion or concept ; 2. Distinctions of method
based upon the truths of the concept; 3. The actual real-
ties of school subjects.

Under the second, four subordinate topics are treated :

1. The four methods.

2. The order of use of the contrasted methods.

3. Special process in teaching facts and art.

4. The concrete and the abstract in teaching.

Under the third, attention is given to method in the
various branches.

In considering whether the work is based fundamentally
upon the first, second, or third view of method, it will be
necessary to examine certain expressions.

On page 5 the author says, "Works on teaching abound
in which are to be found many and varied recommendations
in method, most of which do not rise above the dignity of
reasonable devices." This seems to distinguish method
from devices.

On page 11 the following definition of method is given :
"A method in pedagogy is a rational plan or series of steps
for effecting results in teaching."

THE PROBLEM OP METHOD. 113

The first portion of this statement seems to regard method
as an idea in the mind of the teacher ; that is it is a rational
plan held in consciousness. The second portion of the
statement looks upon it as a series- of steps. It seems that
these steps are the outward acts of the teacher, because
they are spoken of as intended to bring a'bout results in
teaching.

In the same connection this is said: ''Method is pro-
cedure according to principles. ' ' This would seem to indi-
cate that method is the outward activities of the teacher
governed by a certain thought or principle.

It is also said upon the same page : ' ' A method of teach-
ing, then, is procedure in teaching according to the princi-
ples of teaching." This implies that the method consists
of the outward activities of the teacher.

On page 12 it is said: "Method is a way of reaching a
given end by a series of acts which tend to secure it, but
device refers rather to a single action." This seems to
identify device and method, in that it regards each as an act,
and the assumption is that this act is the outward act of the
teacher, since the author looks upon device as merely a
single act, while method is a series of acts.

The use of the terms, "analytic method/' " synthetic
method," "inductive method" and "deductive method,"
on pages 111 and 113, implies, unless closely scrutinized,
that method is the psychological movement of the child in
studying. A more careful examination of these expres-
sions, however, seems to indicate that the author means, un-
der the analytic method, the explanations, questions, sug-
gestions, etc., of the teacher adapted to lead the child to an-
alyze an object into its parts or elements. The same infer-
ence may be drawn as to the other methods mentioned.

On page 125 the author says: "Learning should begin
with individuals and should return to individuals." This

114 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

outwardly indicates that the third view of method is held.

On page 127 there is an indication that the child is (1) to
comprehend an object as a whole, analyze it into its parts,
comprehend the whole as made up of these parts; (2) to
conceive from several such wholes a general belonging to
these similar objects; (3) to discover this general in new
objects. This also hints the third view of method.

On pages 286-291, in considering the subject of litera-
ture, there is also some indication of the third view of
method. The first movement of consciousness is indicated
on page 286, the second on page 288, and the third on page
291.

On page 309 the following statement occurs: "We know
a man, a horse, a house or a piano first as entire things ; we
are able to recognize these things and give their names;
later, through our desire to know them more fully, we are
forced to the necessity of mentally analyzing them. Then,
after we have studied the details of their parts, we know
the things in their entirety more intimately." This gives
an indistinct indication of the third view of method.

On page 318 the author says: "The method in this, as
in all natural sciences, should be inductive — leading up
from the individual instances presented to the appropriate
generalizations, and then returning to apply these truths
in newly discovered instances. ' ' This likewise suggests the
fundamental movement of consciousness.

Under all these uses, however, there is no clear indica-
tion that the author regards method as the fundamental
movement of consciousness in the child. There is rather
the indication that he considers method to be the activities
of the teacher controlled by the notion that the mind may
deal with particular objects in two ways, and with generali-
zations in two ways. Fundamentally, then, the work is in
harmony with the first view of method. The principle that

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 115

prevents the work from being truly organic or systematic
is the one mentioned on page 8. "In the world of things
about which we study, only individuals exist, while gener-
alizations are merely contrivances of man wrought out for
his convenience in mastering the truths concerning this
world of real but individual things. ' ' This idea would in-
dicate that a greater degree of truth is reached in sense-
perception than in memory, a greater degree in memory
than in imagination, a greater degree in imagination than
in conception, etc. This view of the world is essentially
divisive. According to such a view, no work can possess a
fundamental unity. The reason is that, according to such
a view, the individual is the only truth.

This view of the world is again reflected in the idea of
the concept presented on page 98. This indicates that the
concept is the notion of an individual object or of the class.
It is to be noted that the class is regarded as merely an
aggregation of individual objects, and is usually, there-
fore, a space-occupying thing. The notion which applies to
a class is regarded as concerned with the set of common at-
tributes. This does not harmonize with the modern view
of the concept, namely, that it signifies the creative ac-
tivity producing the various objects of the class. This
view of the world again reveals itself in the division of
method into four kinds, the analytic, the synthetic, the in-
ductive and the deductive. If the world is a true unity in-
stead of being made up, as the author suggests on page 8,
of particulars, there is a single method according to which
every branch of study should be taught. The separative
tendency of the view of the world given by the author
on page 8 also manifests itself in the classification of sub-
jects given on page 131. It is further exhibited in that the
author presents the different psychological facts much as
they would be given in a work on psychology instead of

11(5 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

limiting the psychological treatment strictly to those ele-
ments that reflect the notion of method given in the book.

The separative tendency of his view of the world also ex-
hibits itself in the fact that the special methods given under
the different branches of study do not definitely reveal the
idea of method presented on pages 111 to 114. The view
that, * ' In the world about which we study only individuals
exist, while generalizations are merely contrivances of man
wrought out for his convenience in mastering the truths
concerning this world of real but individual things," is the
ground for the various ways in which the author uses the
term methods.

After having explained the four distinct methods as given
on pages 111 to 114, would the author be entitled to use the
term method in any other sense than in one of the four
given? Would there not be, indeed, a tendency on the
part of every reader to seek some one fundamental sense to
which these four could be reduced ? Let the following uses
of the term be noticed in order to decide whether they are
already included in one or more of the four mentioned on
pages 111 to 114.

On page 8 the author speaks of "the varieties of so-called
'methods' of learning as simply 'variations of one compre-
hensive plan.' : This identifies the term "method" with
the term "comprehensive plan."

On page 10 the author speaks of a "principle" as the
' ' basis of method. ' ' This distinguishes method from prin-
ciple.

On page 133 the following occurs: "Our method of teach-
ing, then, should be one of imitation and practice." What
is the relation of this method to the four mentioned on
pages 111 to 114? Apply the same question to the use of
the word "method" in the following quotations:

Page 134, "It seems to receive attention only when the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 117

study is one that requires in its recitation some special
method of delivery, as in declamation or singing. ' '

Page 141, "The only difference between childhood and
manhood in regard to these methods is the difference in the
predominant element. Both methods should be employed
always." The author here refers to the concrete and the
abstract methods.

Page 146, "The product secured through such direct
study should be compared with the products secured by the
other pupils through a similar method of study."

Page 167j "This method of procedure robs the drawing
class of its mechanical drudgery."

Page 249, "It is not the ancient, stereotyped method of
parsing. ' '

Page 257, "The child's method of study"; "a method of
testing"; "the written method of recitation."

Page 263, "History is a methodical record of the impor-
tant events which concern a community of men."

Page 331, "To this end we should adopt what is called
the scientific method of counting rather than the given
method."

On account of the view that the world consist of real but
individual things and that there are no generals in reality,
the distinction is made into subjects expressing truth, those
expressing facts and those that are merely form. This
leads to a variety of method. In consequence, the book
does not present one fundamental method. The tendency
of the book is to lead the student to regard method as the
outward activity of the teacher controlled by the principles
belonging to the subject of study.

15. In "Scientific Method in Education"* the "scien-
tific method" is held to be an attitude of the mind. Thus

* "Scientific Method in Education," by Ella Flagg Young, in Volume III. of the
Decennial Publication, published by the University of Chicago Press.

118 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

on page 144 it is defined as follows: " Scientific method is
the method, the attitude of mind that makes a search for
the principle under which facts and observations may be
experienced in their relations and made significant. ' ' This
is seen to refer to the psychological activities of the learner.
It does not, however, indicate a process of the mind as given
by Mr. Cramer in the "Method of Darwin," page 30.

Mr. Cramer gives the "scientific method" as "observa-
tion, induction, deduction and verification. ' ' In both cases,
however, the view of method is that which has been termed
the second view in that it relates to the psychological activ-
ity of the learner. Often in the discussion the first view of
method appears. The following are examples: "Educa-
tional method to be of worth should be scientific method
applied to the art of teaching." (Page 147.) "The re-
turn to old methods of instruction and school management,
the repudiation of the theories which have issued from
investigation of biology and psychology have at once indi-
cated that the theories have been found wanting because of
the readiness with which they were constructed from the
few facts. ' ' ( Page 152. ) ' * The application of the method
of science to research in the social heritage of the child of
to-day." (Page 154.) "Many individual teachers in the
schools of this country are in intelligent sympathy with the
aims and ways of scientific method as applied to educa-
tion." (Page 155.)

The second view of method is, however, more prominent
in the article. The definition of the scientific method given
above indicates the second view. The following are also
examples of that view:

"The method of the teacher is simply an attitude of
the mind like that of the scientist. — Page 147. "To teach
children necessitates a knowledge of the mind, the law of
mental activity. "—Page 148. "The first element, the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 119

children, necessitates a readiness on the part of the teacher
in interpreting the contents of mind, clear vision as to
their method, and a sympathetic understanding of general
conditions which are indicated not only by language ex-
pression but also by bodily expression." — Page 150.
" There should be an acquaintance with this which has
been obtained by the psychologic method; that is, through
investigation, through observation of sequences, and also
by the logical method, that is, through making conscious
standards, or norms, of the ends toward which the psy-
chological material points."

''The two aspects of a subject gained by these two lines of
approach, may be called the method of the sub-
ject."—Page 151.

"A growing understanding of the method by which the
mind works and develops shows it to be the inductive
method of the scientist." — Page 154.

The third view appears but once in the discussion. It is
then only incidental. It is indicated in the following: "As
one does not become a botanist or a zoologist by beginning
with the principles and data of pure science, so one cannot
understand the life process of the soul if there be no orig-
inal observation of the activity of the mind preceding the
study of psychology. As in the other sciences, the purely
scientific study must be followed by a return to such ma-
terial as formed the basis of observation and experience in
the first stage, so in psychology the applied science must fol-
low the pure science. In the study of psychology, the
teacher must go through three stages : first, the observational
and introspective; second, the purely scientific and experi-
mental; third, the applied, which is generally termed edu-
cational psychology. He does not go through the third, he
enters into it."— Page 149.

120 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

CHAPTER VI.

METHOD IN A BRANCH OF STUDY.

It is assumed that one who enters upon an investigation
of method in a branch of study is familiar with the facts of
the subject. Upon the basis of this familiarity he investi-
gates the essential features that give organization to the sub-
ject.

These essential features may be held to be: the central
idea of the subject, the scope as determined by the central
idea, the divisions and subdivisions as determined by the
central idea, the relative importance of the divisions and
subdivisions as determined by the central idea.

The act of the pupil in learning a fact of the subject so
characterized constitutes the fifth element. This would re-
sult in special mental effects. These mental effects consti-
tute the sixth aspect of the method in a branch of study.

There are certain rational means, to a large extent pecu-
liar to each subject, for stimulating and guiding the pupil's
process of learning the subject. The method in a subject,
therefore, includes :

I. The Organizing Principle of the Subject.

II. The Scope of Material.

III. The Divisions.

IV. The Relative Importance of the Divisions.

V. The Mental Process in Learning a Fact of the Sub-
ject.

VI. The Mental Effects.

VII. The Means or Devices.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 121

Of these the central or organizing principle is predomi-
nant. It determines the scope, the divisions and subdivi-
sions and relative importance. It contributes in determin-
ing the process in the child's mind, the effect produced in
the mind of the child, and the devices to be employed. The
first four, the organizing principle, the scope, the divisions
and subdivisions and the relative importance relate to the
branch of study. The fifth and sixth relate to the mind of
the learner. The seventh is a stimulus to the mind of the
learner in mastering the subject- matter. It is identified
on the one hand with the knowledge of the pupil, and on
the other hand with the nature of the subject-matter.
These characteristics of method in any branch of study may
be illustrated by the subject of composition.

METHOD IN COMPOSITION.

I. In composition the organizing principle is thought
which -is in a process of development, expressed in language
which is changing to adapt itself to the growing thought,
for the purpose of communication.

II. The scope of composition is that range of material
possessing the distinguishing mark of composition, that
which differentiates composition from other language
studies. This material is found to include an attribute
which unifies composition with all other language studies
and an attribute which unifies it with all existence. The
first is the particular attribute; the second, the general;
and the third, the universal.

III. The divisions in composition must be genetic, that
is, they must involve the organizing principle. The funda-
mental division is therefore into developing content, and
developing expression. The developing content then dif-
ferentiates into developing purpose and developing thought.
The form or expression differentiates into changing audible

122 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

expression and changing visible expression. Both form
and content manifest many other subdivisions.

IV. The relative importance of these divisions and sub-
divisions is determined by the degree to which they mani-
fest the organizing principle of the subject.

V. In composition, as is the case in all other branches
of study, the fifth essential element is the psychological pro-
cess in the mind of the learner.

1. The process.

The first step in the process is the objectification of
a thought. The following paragraph may be used in illus-
tration :

' * The word * noise ' is derived from a Latin word meaning
nausea, through a French word meaning quarrel. The sig-
nificance in each of these derivations is that of the negative.
Noise is sound that is not rhythmical. The movement
of neural life and also of mental life is marked by rhythm.
A noise is, therefore, in a certain sense, a quarrel with these
movements in that it hinders the natural process. Even
rhythmical sound becomes noise if it tends to hinder or to
annual a rational process entitled to occur at the time.
Thus, sweet music, or a well-modulated conversation, if in-
terfering with a required explanation, conversation, slum-
ber, or rest of an invalid, is, under the circumstances, a
noise. Any sound, then, which quarrels with a required
rational process is a noise and a damage."

2. The analysis of the process:

In the given case, the first stage in the process is
the indistinct projection of the subject in language. There
is no separation of content and form. If the idea of the
object is present, the term itself seems to be inseparably
with it. If a distinction is thought in the content, as that
noise is a lack of rhythm, the thought does not precede the
language appropriate to the thought. The language is

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 123

there contemporaneously with the thought. The self may
be said to think in words. Composition is one of the best
subjects by which to illustrate the doctrine that the first
stage of consciousness is a dim apprehension of a fused
unity. The above paragraph when first created was a
fused union of expression and meaning.

The writer may have thought spontaneously of the noise
of a whistle, the stimulus being present. The object thought
of and the expression were known as one. Then there arose
the conception of noise, but the word was there embodying
the concept.

The thought of noise as a damage was the stimulus for
the purpose, and in a subconscious process the writer
thought of mankind as not knowing that noise is a damage ;
created the ideal of mankind as knowing it thus; desired
the ideal condition and then chose it. The purpose to com-
municate the thought of noise as a damage seemed too gen-
eral and the writer spontaneously limited it to the purpose
to explain the kinds of noises in general that are damaging.
The purpose had now become conscious and definite.

This describes the psychological process by which a self
imposes upon itself, at first unconsciously, and then con-
sciously, a purpose. It also reveals the interaction of theme
and purpose. Often a general theme arises in conscious-
ness which stimulates a definite purpose. This more exact
purpose determines the limits of the theme. It is this sec-
ond theme which is expressed in discourse, not the first.
This gives the purpose as arising first and the theme second
in the process of creating discourse when the process arises
spontaneously.

If the creation of the discourse is assigned from without
the purpose precedes the theme. Thus discourse always
expresses a theme limited and characterized by the purpose.

The purpose and the special theme having been created

124 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

in the case given, the writer entered upon the stage of
thinking the subject as a whole, in conceiving it as nega-
tive ; this was succeeded by the stage of distinction in think-
ing noise to be negative when lacking rhythm, and when
possessing it under given circumstances. To this stage suc-
ceeded the one in which all distinctions, while held in con-
sciousness, were unified in the one object characterized as
negative. As each distinction in thought arose, it appeared
clothed in its own language. Thus, at the conclusion of
this movement, content and form are fused. The para-
graph, as it exists now in space, is a fused product, the re-
sult of the first stage of consciousness, although all three
stages have appeared in the process of creating this product.
That was to be expected, however. If the threefold move-
ment is native to consciousness all three will be reflected in
the first movement itself.

The person who has written the paragraph now enters
upon the second stage, that of distinction. Giving atten-
tion to the constructed paragraph, he begins to differentiate
it into form and content. In doing so he enters upon the
second stage of the process in composition. In giving at-
tention to the expression as it is, the process is abstracting.
This expression is then distinguished from its meaning (dis-
crimination). Other similar expressions are reacted. Each
of these reacted expressions is discriminated from the mean-
ing and from the original expression. This terminates the
second stage.

These different expressions are compared with one an-
other and with the meaning. In this comparison the mind
enters upon the third stage, that of unifying. The mind
judges as to the most appropriate expression, and decides
as to the ground for considering this expression the most
appropriate. This concludes the process in composition.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 125

In the given paragraphj;he following may be noted as
activities which exhibit the second and third stages:

Consideration of the paragraph as a whole. Has the
paragraph unity? That is, does every sentence bear upon
the subject noise f In answering this question, sentence
four may be studied. At first it may seem that in this
sentence nothing has been given concerning noise, yet if
the sentence is taken in its connection with the preceding
one, it is found that rhythm is given as the positive of noise.
The words of transition should be near the beginning of
the sentence so as to make the connection between the
thoughts evident at once. Thus the second sentence may
be rearranged and combined with the third so as to read as
follows: "Each of these derivations signifies the negative,
i. e., noise is sound that is not rhythmical." In the fourth
sentence the transitional word is rhythm, so it may be
changed to read, "Rhythm is the characteristic of neural
and also of mental life. ' '

After these changes have been made, the paragraph will
appear as follows:

The word, "noise," is derived from a Latin word mean-
ing nausea through a French word meaning quarrel.

Each of these derivations signifies the negative; i. e.^
noise is sound that is not rhythmical.

Rhythm is the characteristic of neural and also of mental
life. A noise is, therefore, in a certain sense, a quarrel
with these movements in that it hinders the natural process.
Even rhythmical sound becomes noise if it tends to hinder
or to annul a rational process entitled to occur at the time.

Thus, sweet music, or a well-modulated conversation, if
interfering with a required explanation, conversation, slum-
ber, or rest of an invalid, is, under the circumstances, a
noise. Any sound, then, which quarrels with a required
rational process is a noise, and hence a damage.

126 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

Consideration of the details.

Attention is given to the fact that the word, ' ' word, ' ' oc-
curs three times in the first sentence. This may be modi-
fied by using for the second, the word, "term," and for
the third, the word, ' ' expression. ' '

The word, "meaning," occurs twice in this sentence.
"Signifying" and "denoting" may be used instead.

In the second sentence the expression, "words," may be
employed instead of ' * derivations. ' '

After the word, "rhythmical," the following may be in-
serted: "Noise may lack rhythm in being too monotonous,
as is often the case with heathen music, or it may manifest
an unregulated and excessive variety. ' '

The words, ' ' neural action, ' ' and * * mental process, ' ' may
be used instead of "neural" and "mental life."

After "mental process" insert, "This is peculiarly true
of consciousness, because it is fundamentally subject-object,
that is, an existing condition, a departure from it, and a
return to it."

Instead of the expression, "These movements in that it
hinders the natural process," the following may be given:
"The alternate ebb and flow of nervous response and with
the rhythmical process in sense-perception."

The expression, "To annul or even to hinder," may be
used instead of "to hinder or to annul. * '

For the expression, "a rational process entitled to oc-
cur at the time," may be substituted "an activity higher
than the sensuous response to rhythmical sound, or one in
the interest of such higher activity. ' '

After the expression, "modulated conversation," there
may be inserted "or any similar rhythmical activity."

In the last sentence after the word, "and," the term,
"hence," may be inserted.

As finally modified, the paragraph will appear as follows :

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 127

' * The word, ' noise, ' is derived from a Latin term signify-
ing nausea, through a French expression denoting quarrel.
Each of these words signifies the negative, i. e., noise is
sound that is not rhythmical. Noise may lack rhythm in
being too monotonous, as is often the case with heathen
music, or it may manifest an unregulated and excessive
variety. Rhythm is the characteristic of neural action and
also of mental process. This is peculiarly true of conscious-
ness because .it is fundamentally subject-object, that is an
existing condition, a departure from it, and a return to it.

A noise is, therefore, in a certain sense, a quarrel with
the alternate ebb and flow of nervous response and with
the rhythmical process in sense-perception. Even rhythm-
ical sound becomes noise if it tends to annul or even to hin-
der an activity higher than the sensuous response to rhythm-
ical sound, or one in the interest of such higher activity.

Thus, sweet music, or a well-modulated conversation, or
any similar rhythmical activity, if interfering with a re-
quired explanation, conversation, slumber, or rest of an in-
valid, is, under the circumstances, a noise.

Any sound, then, which quarrels with a required rational
process is a noise, and hence a damage. ' '

The process of producing this series of paragraphs in-
volved abstraction (noticing a given expression) ; abstrac-
tion (separating this expression from its meaning) ; dis-
crimination (holding the expression and meaning apart
in the one act of consciousness) ; memorization (reacting or
creating another or other expressions for the same mean-
ing) ; discrimination (holding each of the new expressions
apart from the meaning and from the other expressions).
This practically concludes the second or separative stage.

The mind then enters upon the third stage. This in-
volves comparison, (the act of considering the expressions
as to their relative fitness to communicate the meaning) ;

128 THE PROEU&M OF

judging, (the net of deciding upon the most appropriate
expression} ; deductive reasoning, (the act of becoming con-
scious of the ground or general principle for the judg-
ment).

Farther modification of the paragraph, even in a single
respect, would also involve both the second and third stages
of the language process.

The entire process is — (first stage) consciousness of a
general theme; limitation of a general theme; construction
of a purpose to communicate (consciousness of a limit in
those to be addressed, idealization of condition in which
the limit is removed, desire for that condition, choice of
the desired condition;) consciousness of the theme as
adapted to the purpose; apprehension of the theme as an
indistinct whole: abstraction, or the analysis of the theme
into its elements regarding each one as distinct : judgment
that a siren element is the central or characteristic element;
conception or the knowledge of this central element as
manifesting itself in Tarring degrees in each of the other
dements, (In all this process the thinking was in lan-
guage so that, as the thought was produced, the corre-
sponding language was created. The consequence is that
the thought exists expressed and has become an object for
the mind's activity in the second and third stages of the
language act, which stages appear as follows) : abstrac-
tion of some element of expression; abstraction of this
element from its meaning: discrimination of this mean-
in*: and expression: remembering the construction of simi-
lar expressions; discriminating each of these from the
meaning and from each other; (end of the second or sepa-
rative stage); comparing the expressions as to their fit-
ness to express the meaning; judging the expression most
appropriate to the meaning; reasoning deductively as to
the ground for the judgment; (the end of the third stage.)

iJ'r

180 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

A refinement of taste in the use of words.

The rendering of iteration purposive.

The rendering of slang useless.

Satisfaction on account of the best field for objectifying.

The correspondence of meaning (purpose and thought)
and expression.

The habit of self-examination as a test in the use of
words.

Satisfaction in the knowledge of the thought of the race
as expressed in words.

VII. The devices in a branch of study are general and
special. The general device or means is the organized course
of study. This general device in composition may be given
as follows :

THE COURSE OF STUDY IN COMPOSITION.
STAGES IN THE PRIMARY GRADES.

The First Stage.
First and Second Grades.

In the first stage of composition, conversation is promi-
nent. The effort is to have the child acquire the correct
use of language without giving attention to its structure or
to the principles underlying the structure. The result is
that the child is intent upon communicating only, and
meaning and form are practically fused. During this stage
there should be a strong eifort to awaken the sense of the
value of power in conversation, and the sense of the im-
portance of the English language. The conversation is at
times to be ordered, in that the teacher selects the objects,
and decides upon the successive topics.

This is for the purpose of making the child familiar with
thoughtful, regulated conversation manifesting law. At

THE PROBLEM OP METHOD. 131

other times the conversation is to be more fully under
the choice of the child, in that he will select the object and
determine the successive topics. This will be favorable to
his spontaneity. In bringing about conversation upon any
subject, the pupil will be led to objectify freely his thought
in language. The teacher will then aid him in changing
the meagre, or profuse, or otherwise inartistic forms into
clear, concise and refined expression. Much conversation
centers in the systematic construction of a series of sen-
tences expressing the successive phases of an activity in
nature, or in the life of man, viewed as returning to its be-
ginning phase. Conversation also arises in the form of
the free reproduction of stories read or told by the teacher.
The conversational aspect of the work may be supplemented
by its reproduction in script or print upon the board, by
the expression in script or print of sentences slowly
constructed concerning an inanimate object, plant or ani-
mal being studied, and by the combination of these sen-
tences, and their formation into paragraphs. Conversation,
and also all the more definite forms of work mentioned as
belonging to this first stage, may be both strengthened and
refined by the consideration of songs, poems and artistic
prose.

Five lines of work are thus implied :

Ordered conversation on objects selected by the
teacher.

Conversation on objects chosen by the child.

The learning of selections of a high literary value.

Reading to the children by the teacher for the refin-
ing effect of the language and thought upon the pupil's
power of conversation, and for the purpose of having the
selections read and reproduced substantially.

The construction of a series of sentences expressing
in ordered sequence the elements in acts of nature and in

132 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

the institutions of society. (Astronomy, geometry; an act
in the home ; an act in the school, etc. )

The ordered conservations may be upon natural objects,
upon manufactured objects, upon productions in art, upon
the various activities of instutional life, etc.

Among the objects constituting a basis for these ordered
conversations may be noted the following :
Geographical.

September, Equal days and nights, direction,
the direction of the sun at sunset.

October, Frosts, dew, the formation of dew
on cold surfaces.

November, The winds, their direction, force
and temperature (the thermometer).

December, The short days and long nights, the
length of the sun 's shadow at noon.

January, Snow flakes, the covering for plants.

February, Freezing and thawing, the crumbling
of clods, rocks, etc.

March, Clouds and their forms and names,
action of frost, rain, etc., on the soil.

April, Rain and its measurements, illustrations
of evaporation.

May, examination of a brook, its action in carry-
ing and depositing soil.

June, Length of days, position of the sun in
early morning, at noon and at sunset.

Examination during the year of sand, pebbles, boulders,
gravel, shale, limestone, sandstone, etc.
Biological.
Plants.

September, Aster, golden rod, mustard, gen-
tian, touch-me-not, velvet leaf, the various kinds of mal-
low, corn flower, dodder, beech drop.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

133

October, The flowering plants remaining are the
specimens of September. During October the conversa-
tions could be based upon the material of seed distribution.
Among these may be noted the sandbur, cocklebur, bur-
dock, milkweed pods, seeds of dandelion, seeds of maple,
oak, beech, gum, etc. During November, December, Jan-
uary, February and March, the conversation could be based
upon non-flowering plants. Among these are the common
puffball, earth star, the various toadstools and mushrooms,
lichens (reindeer and others), common bread mould, shelf
fungus, mosses (pigeon wheat preferred), ferns, Indian
compass plant, and some algae.

April, Spring beauty, wind flower, hepatica,
blood root.

May, Buttercup, marsh marigold (see Songs of
Seven), trillium, Jack-in-the-pulpit (see poem, Indiana
Third Reader, page 191).

June, Dandelion, the various mustards, clovers,
spiderworts, iris, wild geranium, water leaf, etc.
Animals.

September, Grasshoppers, beetles.

October, Clams, Oysters.

November, Butterflies, moths. (See book on
Butterflies, pub. by Doubleday, Page & Co.)

December, Crayfish, lobster.

January, Fishes — yellow perch, Jack salmon.

February, The frog.

March, The woodpecker, crow, blackbird, jays.

April, Redbird, sparrow, marsh robin.

May, Wren, thrushes.

June, Hawks, owls.
Manufactured objects.

These are so numerous and so common that no
selections need be indicated.

134 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

Art.

Architecture.

The dome, the Greek column, the Roman arch,
the Gothic window, the spire.
Sculpture.

A selection (probably in picture form) of an
example from Oriental, Greek, Roman, Mediaeval and Mod-
ern Sculpture.

Painting.

A selection from Oriental, Greek, Roman, Me-
diaeval and Modern Painting.

Activities in institutional life.

These are so numerous and so accessible that
no example need be given.

Selection to be read to children.

{Portions of these selections may be commit-
ted to memory by the children after the thought has been
carefully worked out.)

"In Time's Swing," Fourth Reader, McGuffey's, page
77; "The Lapse of Time," Bryant's Poems (household
edition), page 75; "Freaks of the Frost," Fourth Reader,
Harper's, page 46; "The Frost King," in "Rhymes and
Jingles," by Mary Mapes Dodge, page 199; "Snow," in
"Rhymes and Jingles," by Mary Mapes Dodge, page 12;
"Snow Song," Lucy Larcom's Poems, page 123; "The
First Snow Fall," Literary Selections (Lowell), page 320;
"Evening Hymn," Second Reader, McGuffey's, page 43;
"Twilight," Third Reader, Harper's, page 257; "The
New Moon," Second Reader, Harper's, page 161; "The
Moon's Lullaby," Third Reader, Harper's, page 39;
"March," Second Reader, McGuffey's, page 139;" March,"
Lucy Larcom's Poems, page 124; "April," in "When the
Birds Go North Again," by Ella Higginson, page 43;
"The Rainbow," (stanza at the close) Supplementary Sec-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 135

ond Reader, Golden Book of Choice Reading; "The Rain-
bow," Fifth Reader, McGuffey's, page 195; "The Sea-
sons," (the stanza on "Summer"), Fourth Reader, Mc-
Guffey's, page 237; "A Summer Day," School Reading
by Grades, page 35; "The Seasons," (stanza on "Win-
ter"), Third Reader, McGuffey's, page 237; "Winter,"
Lucy Larcom's Poems, page 179; "The Seasons" (stanza
on "Spring), Fourth Reader, McGuffey's, page 237;
"Spring," Third Reader, McGuffey's, page 132; "The
Seasons" (stanza on "Autumn"), Fourth Reader, Mc-
Guffey's, page 237; "The Autumn Is Old," Fourth Reader,
Indiana revision, page 234. Other selections expressing
other aspects of life, both of nature and man, may be
chosen.

Pictures.

Conversations upon objects similar to those indicated in
the foregoing and graded according to the time of year and
difficulty of use, constitute the work for the first and second
years. The work contemplates a definite period for com-
position of not less than ten minutes from three to five days
during the week.

The Second Stage.
Third Grade.

This second stage, although also one of conservation, is
marked especially by the fact that it is a stage devoted to
the discovery of distinctions. Throughout, the pupil is
concerned with differences, and is therefore chiefly analytic
in his procedure. During the year the work is to be so or-
ganized as to lead the pupil to notice and to express himself
as to the following distinctions in language :

The distinction of language to express the external; as,
fence; the spiritual; as, / fear he is not here; the symbolic;
as, / am the vine, ye are the branches. These distinctions

130 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

are to be the more simple ones, and are to be sought in the
readers and in general conversation.

The distinction found in the separation of a stanza or
paragraph into a series of disconnected sentences. The
first stanza of Tennyson's Bugle Song so separated will
read —

1 ( The splendor falls on castle walls.
The splendor falls on snowy summits old in story.
The long light shakes across the lakes.
The wild cataract leaps in glory."
The idea of the sentence.

The distinction of the sentence into its kinds.

The distinction of each kind of sentence into its
two uses — to express some fact, and also to express the
mental attitude or state of the speaker.

The distinction involved in working out different
forms for some one sentence, as,

The plowman homeward plods his weary way.
The weary plowman plods his homeward way.
His homeward way the weary plowman plods.
His homeward way the plowman weary plods.
The distinction of the sentence into its elements.
The distinction of the sentence into its separate
words, especially the chief ones, as nouns, adjectives, verbs,
The distinction found among words, as-
Common noun, proper noun.
The distinctions under each, as names of places,
of animals, etc.

The distinction of words into main parts, prefix
and suffix.

The distinction between the current and the literal
meaning of words.*

The distinctions in the meanings of words as

*See "The Problem of Elementary Composition," by Elizabeth Spalding, p. 27.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

137

shown by readings from such works as Oilman's Short
Stones from the Dictionary.

The distinction of words into those that are mere
signs and those that are onomatopoetic.

The distinction of words into syllables.

The distinction of such words as to, too, two; in,
into ; is, was, were ; has, have, had.

The distinction in meaning belonging to a word
of one form, as race.

The different, sounds belonging to each letter.

The difference as to the beginning of lines in
prose and in poetry.

The difference found in the ending of lines in
poetry.

The different images for a sentence separated
from its context, as, "It was standing near the fence."**

In this work the separate sentence should be placed be-
fore the children upon the blackboard. Each child should
then construct in his imagination an environment which, to
be fully expressed, would require the given sentence along
with other sentences. The pupil's thought of this environ-
ment should then be expressed in the form of a brief com-
position. These compositions should afterward be studied
in order to render them both more full in certain respects,
and more compact and brief as a whole. At this stage the
opportunity arises to consider the different images and the
different meanings possessed by the word it in the different
stories.

The distinction found in the successive elements
in a full activity, as, an act in society, an act in geology
or geography, an act in physics.

**See "language for the Grades," by Job u B. Wisely, p. 141. Published by At-
kinson, Mentser & Grover, Chicago.

138 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

The different objects, actions, etc., mentioned in
a brief selection.

The distinction of the speaker and hearer in brief
selections.

The distinction of letters into their form and con-
tent, and the distinction of the elements of their content.

The distinction in the process of writing and
forwarding a letter.

The distinction of the elements of suspense, sur-
prise and suggestion in stories.

The distinction of the parts of a reading lesson
illustrated by pictures, from the parts not so illustrated.

The distinction of the use of pictures in descrip-
tion, from their use in illustrating an element of a story.

The collection of examples of simile and of per-
sonification in the pupils' ordinary language.

The examination of brief literary selections in
order to discover simple examples of simile and of per-
sonification.

Selections from these and similar distinctions should be
carefully adapted to the development of the pupil and of
the subject.

Fourth Grade.

The work in this stage is essentially constructive. Based
upon the many clear distinctions discovered in the pre-
vious stage the pupil now enters upon synthetic work. Of
course the work in this stage is not solely synthetic. A
stage of work in which differences are discovered always in-
volves unity. In like manner, a stage in which unity is the
main thought is necessarily marked by many distinctions.
The different kinds of work are substantially the following :

1. The study of synonyms.

2. Readings on the literal meanings and history of words

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 139

from such works as, Palmer's Folk-Etymology, Trench's
The Study of Words, etc.

3. The elaboration of a single sentence into a para-
graph.*

The selection of the sentence, as, ''The stream was
very clear."

The enumeration of appropriate details.
The construction of a paragraph based on these de-
tails.

By class and teacher working together.
By the individual pupil.

The analytic study of paragraphs to discover the
truth that a paragraph is merely an elaborated sentence
having a common subject and diverse predicates.

The reduction of paragraphs to this simplest form.
Suitable paragraphs for such reduction may be found in
the works of Irving, Hawthorne, etc.

The analysis of paragraphs to discover :
Topic and attributes.

The law of unity and its relation to diverse ob-
jects, and to opposites, as war and peace.

The study of successive paragraphs to determine :
That the topic limits.
The form of the beginning in each.
The mode of indicating quotation.
The mode of uniting paragraphs.

4. The construction into a brief organized discourse of
some one of the series of separate sentences indicated
under the work of the previous stage. In this work the
pupils should be led to refine and to render more accurate
the sentence and then to notice the order of the sentences be-
longing to the series, and to decide whether it is the order
desired. The sentences should then be unified by the use

*"The Problem of Elementary Composition,'' by Elizabeth Spalding, pp. 64-75

140 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

of and, for, because, etc. The different thoughts should
then be elaborated, the result being fuller expression. This
should be followed by the organization into paragraphs.

5. Selection of a particular object, as a tree, and a study
of this object resulting in a knowledge of the following laws
of the form of composition called Description.

Formation of mental picture (Visualization.)*
Point of view. (Referring to place and distance of
writer or speaker from the object he is describing.)
Manner of describing (mode of procedure.)

Whole by means of its attributes.

Parts by means of their attributes.

Reconsideration of the whole.
Range of senses appealed to.
Action in description.
Ordering of attributes.

Obvious to obscure.

Physical to mental.

Near to remote.
Specific language.
Purpose of Description.

6. The examination of a brief, simple description of a
high grade in order to discover in its structure indications
of the characteristics under 5.

7. The study of some simple object accessible to the chil-
dren and possessing an interest for them.

This study is to lead to the preparation of a brief
description of the object. The description is then to be
studied in order to learn the purpose of the writer.

The purpose of studying the description is to form
the basis for deciding whether the pupil selected just
those attributes and parts needed to accomplish his purpose ;

* "First Steps in English Composition," by H. C. Peterson, pp. 19-20. (A. Flana-
gan Co., Chicago.)

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 141

whether they were in the order necessary to accomplish the
purpose, whether all the attributes and parts needed to ac-
complish the purpose were given and whether there was pro-
portion of treatment.

8. The construction of descriptions of objects when the
point of view is from a distance (a device in harmony with
the first stage of consciousness) and when the point of view
is near (a device in harmony with the second stage of con-
sciousness. )

9. The examination of already constructed discourse to
discover cases of onomatopoetic words.

10. The construction of onomatopoetic paragraphs.*

11. The selection of one or more brief narrations of high
grade, upon topics of interest and value to find the follow-
ing main laws governing this form of discourse.

Essential characteristics, change and coherence.

Theme, purpose and plot of different narrations.

Incidents leading up to main incident.

Setting, time and place.

Characters.

Use the plot, as worked out, in writing first a reproduc-
tion of one of the narratives studied. After this, work out
a plot of an original story with the whole class and have the
pupils write the story. Later let each child write a plot of
an original story and then write his own story.

12. The selection of a brief narration of a high grade,
upon a topic of interest and value, and the examination of
it to discover the laws indicated under 11.

13. The examination of songs in order to stimulate and
to direct effort toward literary production.

14. The selection and examination of letters written by
children during the different periods of English and Ameri-
can History. The letters selected should be, in so far as

*"The Problem of Elementary Composition," by Elizabeth Spalding, pp. 42-43

142 THE PROBLEM OP METHOD.

possible, representative of different classes. They should
pertain largely to home life, and to the relation of child to
parent; of brother to sister, etc. To some extent they
should relate to society and to the church.*

15. Letter Writing.**

The letters in this stage should relate to affairs of home
and school, and to the simple aspects of society for chil-
dren. They should be written to schoolmates, friends in the
neighborhood, friends in distant regions, parents, brothers
and sisters.

The established forms of letters should be made clear, and
the work should enable the pupil to write a brief letter in-
volving any of the relations above given, according to the
accepted form, legible, correct in paragraphing, language,
punctuation, etc., and obedient to the laws of discourse.

STAGES IN THE INTERMEDIATE GRADES.
The First Stage.

The first stage is not one of work in the sense that the
teacher attempts actively to lead the children into the com-
prehension and use of more developed forms of language.
It is that comprehension and use of language resulting from
the work of the fourth and of the other preceding years.
The stage is one of fused unity, although not so fully so as
the first stage in the primary grades. Knowledge is always
partial. The realm of the unknown is far more extensive
than that of knowledge. The clearly known in comparison
with the unknown or the dimly known is always slight. At
the conclusion of the work of the four years the pupil 's com-

*See the "Diary of Anna Greene Winslow," a Puritan girl ten years of age.
The diary contains a series of letters written by her while residing in Boston, to
her parents, then residing in Nova Scotia.

** For additional examples of letters and for helpful suggestions on the process
of beginning the work in letter writing, see pp. 4-5 "The Problem of Elementary
Composition," by Elizabeth Spalding.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 143

prehension and use of language involves many indistinct
aspects. The stage is one of synthesis, because these aspects
are fused into a unity, and because many distinctions are
not noticed.

The Second Stage.
Fifth Grade.

The second stage deals with the discovery of distinctions
which are somewhat more advanced and difficult than those
considered in the third grade. These distinctions are a de-
velopment of the differences studied in the third grade,
and an unfolding of the distinctions not knowrn, or at least
but dimly known, at the conclusion of the work of the
fourth year. Hence this stage is analytic. Among the
distinctions of the stage are the following :

1. The distinction of words as to their current and their
literal meaning.*

2. The distinction of words into those that are mere
signs, as hat, on, sit, etc., and those that are onomatopoetic,
as crash, buzz, etc.

3. The difference in such expressions as he, his, him,
ivho, whom, etc.

4. The difference in the form of the pronoun after the
verb to be and' after such verbs as to have, to strike.

5. The difference in the forms of comparison, and their
relative value, as, more dark, darker.

6. The difference in significance of one and two nega-
tives, as (correct form), I know nothing of it; I do not know
nothing of it (incorrect form).

7. The difference between an indefinite and a definite
subject, and the forms the succeeding pronouns tend to take,
as (correct form), "If Henry should carry this package to

* The distinction into the current and the literal meanings may be aided by
readings from such works as Waites' Forgotten Meanings.

144 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

the store, he would find, etc.; If anyone should carry this
.package to the store they would," etc. (incorrect form.)

8. The difference between the single and the double
direct object, and the tendency toward different forms for
the objective, as (correct form), "He asked me to go; He
asked Mary and 7 to go (incorrect form).

9. In the third grade symbolic language was distin-
guished from language used to express the external, and
from language employed to signify mental states. In this
stage further distinctions in symbolic language are to ap-
pear. These distinctions will be found under both form
and content. Under form are the figurative expressions
belonging to single words, and those found in sentences.

The figurative expressions in words are brought about by
omission. There may be omission from the first of the
word, from within the word, or from the end of the word.
In "The Vision of Sir Launfal" the word 'gan is used in-
stead of began. This is called aphaeresis. This is also
shown in you'll for you will. The second form is syncope.
This is shown in the word o'er. The third is apocope. An
example of this is the use of yon instead of yonder. This is
shown in the "Bugle Song." Another figurative form of
words is that of combining by the use of the hyphen.

In sentences also figures are formed by omission, as in the
ellipsis. An example of this is, The virtue I admire, in-
stead of, The virtue which I admire. Related to the el-
lipsis is the figure called asyndeton. This is the omission
of connectives as, The boy, his father, his mother, his sis-
ter, are present. Another form is obtained by inserting.
The general term for this is pleonasm, as, "Thy rod and
thy staff they comfort me. ' ' A subordinate form under this
is epanalepsis. This is the repetition of an expression
after intervening words or expressions, as The sun — that
great luminary of light and warmth — the sun began to ap-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 145

pear in its glory. Another subordinate form is epizeuxis.
This is the repetition of a word or expression immediately,
as, The sun — the sun, the great contributor of light and
warmth began to appear. A third subordinate form is
termed polysyndeton. This is the employment of many con-
nectives, as The boy, and his father, and his mother, and his
sister, are present. The word or may be used in the same
way. Another figure under the form of sentences is ob-
tained by substituting one part of speech for another.
Among the examples often used are the following :She will
queen it; He will out-Herod Herod.

Symbolic language deals not only with the form, but also
with the content. Under the content the symbolism is
shown by comparison, by association and by contrast. Un-
der comparison are the well known figures of simile, meta-
phor and allegory.

It has been held that the work on the simile should at
first be oral and common to the class. In the beginning
there should be the reading of simile after simile and free
conversation concerning each one in order to awaken the
thought that the function of the simile is merely to picture
or illustrate the writer's thought, and that the thought is
the prominent thing. In this discussion it should appear
that similes are to reveal striking likenesses amidst marked
differences. It is thus seen that the enjoyment of similes-
rests upon surprise.

The work should then change, and the children should
enter upon the examination of literary productions in order
to discover cases of the simile.

By means of these exercises the pupils would be prepared
to construct paragraphs and brief compositions involving
similes. In connection with the metaphor are the forms
known as personification and apostrophe.

The work on personification, as that on the simile, may

146 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

be oral and common at first. This will be introductory to
the examination of literary productions for the purpose of
v discovering and studying examples of personification. The
mode of work recommended in connection with the simile
and with personification is mentioned in order to indicate
the spirit of work with all figures of thought.

Under association are found the two figures spoken of as
synecdoche and metonymy. An example under synec-
doche is, ' * Give us this day our daily bread. ' ' An example
under metonymy is, ' ' The pen is mightier than the sword. ' '
The forms of symbolic language under contrast are anti-
thesis and climax.*

In these the contrast is clearly expressed. There are in
addition the epigram, the interrogation and irony. In
these the contrast is merely implied.

These various distinctions involve many strange terms, as
aphaeresis, syncope, polysyndeton, etc. Shall these pupils
(in age about ten years) be made acquainted with such un-
usual terms? The difficulty in the use of new, long, scien-
tific words is not essentially in their pronunciation, but in
the clear knowledge of their content or exact significance.
When the meaning is simple enough to be considered, the
exact scientific terms should be taught. For example, the
idea expressed by the word polysyndeton is easy of com-
prehension. After the meaning has been worked out the
exact scientific term should be taught and used. To the
pupil there is a distinct pleasure in the mastery of such
terms. These terms have been produced by the race in its
process of development, and they have supplied a distinct
need. To be able to comprehend and to use them is, there-
fore, an. act on the part of the pupil which identifies him

*In connection with the study of the climax, the distinction between it and the
ending may be shown in the examination of selections, involving the climax.
{"The Problem of Elementary Composition," p. 20.)

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 147

with the entire race. It has a tendency to make him univer-
sal, and although he does not distinctly know this, he feels
it to a certain extent and experiences pleasure on that ac-
count. The use of the term,isosceles triangle, identifies the
child and his knowledge with the whole progress of the sub-
ject of geometry; and it gives him this sense of the unity
with the universal, much more than does the expression,
a space inclosed by three lines, two of which are equal.

10. The distinction of a selection, as, the ' ' Bugle Song, ' '
into the aim of the author in writing it; the thought used
to accomplish the aim; the expression; the adaptation of
language to thought, and thought to purpose.

11. The distinction of the sentence into the thought to
be communicated; the aim of the writer or speaker; the
adaptation of the language to accomplish the aim. This
last involves the whole realm of distinctions implied in
careful substitutions. For example, the pupil may be con-
sidering the adaptation of the words in the sentence, Tlw
prisoner's innocence is to be assumed. He may be led to
see by substitution the following : The innocence of the pris-
oner is to be supposed.

12. The distinction of the direct and the indirect quota-
tion, the expressions appropriate and their relative strength.

13. The distinctions found in the successive elements of
the full activity in some form of institutional life, as an act
in the realm of business, of state, etc.

14. The distinctions found in the successive elements of
a full activity in nature, as an act in the development of a
plant.

Selections from these and similar distinctions should be
carefully adapted to the development of the pupil and of
the subject.

148 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

The Third Stage.
Sixth Grade.

The work in this stage is like that of the fourth grade —
essentially constructive. The work of the fifth grade is
a consideration of distinctions more difficult and more ex-
tensive than those examined in the third grade. The pupil
is now prepared to enter upon this higher grade of synthetic
work on account of the preparation given by the work in
the fifth year.

As was suggested concerning the work of the fourth
grade, the work in this stage is not, and can not be, solely
synthetic. In constructive work necessarily certain distinc-
tions are brought into notice; but practically and mainly
this stage is a synthetic one in which language is viewed in
the process of construction.

The different kinds of work are shown by the following :

1. A careful study of the primary law of discourse —
unity (purpose).

Let this law be carefully illustrated. After this has been
done let one or more selections from discourse be examined
in order to show how they exemplify this primary law.

2. A careful study of the secondary laws of discourse —
selection, completeness, order.

Relation to the laws of coherence and proportion.
Carefully and fully illustrate each of these laws, and
then examine brief selections from discourse in order to dis-
cover in them the presence of these laws.

3. A careful and systematic study of the nature of the
paragraph and its laws.*

Examination of paragraphs selected from discourse in

* Study in connection with this work special works upon the paragraph, such for
example, as "Paragraph Writing," by Scott and Den ney, published by Allyn &
Bacon, Boston, Mass., and "Writing in English," by Maxwell and Smith, (especi-
ally Chapter IX,) published by the American Book Co.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 149

order to discover the presence of these principles of the
paragraph. More advanced work in the elaboration of sin-
gle sentences into paragraphs as indicated under 3, of the
fourth grade work.

4. The construction into a brief, organized discourse of
one or more of the series of separate sentences, indicated in
13 and 14, under the work of the fifth grade. Pupils should
in this work be led to consider :

The order of the sentences belonging to the series.
The unity of the sentences. This would involve the use
of and, for, because, etc.

Elaboration of the different thoughts.
Organization into paragraphs.

5. Advanced work in harmony with the suggestions made
under 5 in the work of the fourth grade.

6. The examination of a description of a high grade
somewhat more difficult than that belonging to the fourth
grade to discover in its structure the characteristics men-
tioned under 5 of the work of the fourth grade.

7. The selection of a particular object viewed as chang-
ing, as the formation of the Magna Charta.

The study of this activity as to its purpose, time,
cause, effects and parts.

The study of one of the parts as to purpose, time,
cause and effect.

The preparation of a brief narration by the pupil
setting forth the formation of the Magna Charta.

An examination of this narration in order to test
it by the laws of discourse.

8. Advanced work in harmony with the suggestions
made under 11 in the work of the fourth grade.

9. The selection and examination of letters written by
children and by men and women during the different pe-
riods of English and American History. These letters, as

150 THK PROBLEM OF METHOD.

those belonging to the fourth grade, should be selected in so
far as possible, to represent different classes of society. The
letters in these grades, however, should relate largely to the
more complex aspects of society, to business, to the state,
and to the church. The pupils should make a collection of
letters relating to society, business, state and church, from
their parents, from men of business, from government offi-
cials and from church officials. Selections should also be
made from magazines, works on history and on fiction, and
from the daily press.

Examine one or more of the selected letters, testing
them by the thought of 5 and 11 of the fourth grade.

10. Letter Writing.

The letters in this stage should relate chiefly to the more
advanced aspects of society, to business, to the church and
to the state. Among them, however, should be letters upon
the more simple aspects of society for children; friendly
letters to schoolmates and to friends in general, both in their
own neighborhood and in distant regions ; letters to parents,
to brothers and to sisters. More careful work than that of
the fourth grade should be given to the established forms
of letters. The purpose is to enable the pupil to write a
brief letter that is legible, correct in language, in punctua-
tion, and in paragraphing, on any of the topics above given,
and in any of the relations.

SPECIAL DEVICES OR MEANS.

Many special devices have been referred to in this discus-
sion. Several important ones will be mentioned here. The
last of these — the construction of a series of sentences — will
be given a special explanation, which will bring into view
many auxiliary devices :

1. The use of the picture for the purpose of description.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 151

2. The use of the picture to illustrate some event in a
story.

3. The preparation of a brief outline for a story by the
pupils with the aid of the teacher and the construction of a
story as based upon this outline by the pupils.

4. The preparation of an outline for a story by the
pupils and the construction by them of a story based on this
outline.

5. The construction of a series of sentences expressing
the different events in an activity viewed as returning to its
beginning.

In the appendix examples of the different series of sen-
tences referred to under the fifth kind of work are given.
The action expressed in these sentences is to be found in the
work of nature or in the activities of man. The various
series representing the activities of man are to reveal his
processes in the institutions, that is, in the family, in the
church, in the state, etc. Series of sentences could be con-
structed which would reveal his processes in the arts, as in
architecture, painting, etc., and in the modes of activity by
which he reveals himself in games and plays.

In the series of sentences given in the appendix, none
relate to the field of art or to games or plays. The pupils
under the guidance of the teacher, may be led to grade
games and plays according to their adaptation to the age
and development of the pupils, and to construct series of
sentences expressing the activity in typical games and plays.
The various series presented in the appendix and also others
to be constructed should be graded upon certain definite
principles. Among these principles are familiarity, sim-
plicity, and the rise from a high degree of passivity through
the different stages of advancement to a high degree of ac-
tivity. The different series given as examples are distrib-
uted and graded mainly according to the third principle.

152 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

They are subject, however, to a new distribution and grada-
tion in the light of the first and second principles sug-
gested.*

* The following may be consulted to advantage in the different kinds of work
indicated above :

1. "How to Learn a language in Six Months, by W. T. Stead, (Review of Re-
views, Vol. V, July, 1892.)

2. "The Art of Teaching and Studying languages," by M. Francois Gouin.

3. How to Learn a language," by J. S. Blackie. (Review of Reviews, Vol. VI,
August, 1892.)

4. "The Mother Tongue," Books I, II and III. (Ginn & Co.)

5. " How to Learn a language in Six Months." A Report of Progress, by R.
W. Waddy, and others. (Review of Reviews, Vol. VI, Nov., 1892.)

6. "A Royal Road to Learn Languages." The Result of Six Months' Experi-
ment—W. T. Stead's Report Upon the Experiment in His Family. (Review of Re-
views, Vol. VII, March, 1893.)

7. "The Acquisition of Language by Children," by M. Taine. (Mind, Vol. II,
April, 1877.)

8. An Infant's Progress in Language," by F. Pollock. (Mind, Vol. II, July
1873.)

9. "Thought and Language," by G. F. Stout. Mind, Vol. XVI, Jan. 1891.)

10. The Chapter on— Language Tone and and Gesture; Articulation, Relation of
Tone and Gesture to Words, Speech— in "Mental Evolution in Man,1' by George J.
Romanes.

1 1. "Language for The Grades," by J. B. Wisely. (Atkinson, Meutzer & Grover,
Chicago.)

12. "The Threefo d Purpose of Primary Language Work," by J. B. Wisely. (A
brief article in the Inland Educator, Vol. Ill, Nov., 1890.)

1 -. "Beginning Steps in Composition," by H. C. Peterson. (A. Flanagan, Chi-
cago.)

14. "The Problem of Elementary Composition," by Elizabeth Spalding. (D. C.
Heath & Co.)

15. "The Teaching of English," by Percival Chubb. (The Macmillan Co.^

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 153

CHAPTER VII.

, METHOD IN A LESSON.

The material in a lesson is identical in nature with the
material of an entire branch of study. Method in a lesson
is, therefore, characterized by the same essential elements
as method in a branch of study. Each lesson has its domi-
nant idea. This is the organizing principle. The subject-
matter in expressing the general nature of the material and
the attribute to be emphasized, indicates the scope. The as-
signment sets forth, substantially, the divisions, subdivi-
sions and their relative importance. The steps reveal the
psychological process of the learner, and the devices corre-
spond to the same element in the method in the branch of
study. In the method of the lesson, however, these seven
aspects of method in a branch of study are treated under
subject-matter, assignment, steps, purpose and devices. The
psychological aspect is somewhat more prominent in the
method of the lesson than in the method of a branch of
study. Therefore, the method of the lesson is developed
from the principle underlying the process of education.

The method in the lesson is, indeed, practically the activ-
ity which is characteristic of education. Education is not
merely knowledge; it is aspiration, insight, power. That
branch of study which arouses most fully the activity of
the student, is the one that is the most educative to him.
This subject, to some students, is history; to others, it is
mathematics; and to still others, physical science. Educa-
tion has its principle, and the method in a lesson is identical

154 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

with this principle. A principle is the essential mode of ac-
tivity in an object or process. The principle in education is
that psychological activity or process in the pupil which is
manifested in every stage of his development.

This central, comprehensive principle of education is best
denoted, perhaps, by the term self-determination.

The word determination is not here used to signify a fixed
purpose, although its meaning includes such acts. The ex-
pression, "determination," means limitation, indicating
that when the self is existing in a given particular act a
termination has been put to all other special acts, except in
so far as they are involved in the given particular act, and
furthermore, that a permanent limit has been given to the
self, in that a tendency to react the particular act has be-
come a trait or characteristic.

Why, however, is the principle or mode of activity re-
ferred to as ^//-determination ?

In order to imply that the object in the physical or in the
spiritual environment which seems to be the cause of the
particular mental state is merely a stimulus, an excitant.

The self having been stimulated by some object in its en
vironment, acts upon itself and thus produces a particular
act or state of itself. The self as a distinctive energy or
entity, creates out of its potential condition the special state
of itself.

It is to be noted further that the activity or principle of
self-determination has its process or stages.

1. The self as energy exists as mere capacity, as poten-
tiality. This is a condition of fused unity. In a sense, the
mind is ' * without form and void. ' '

2. The self, aroused by a stimulating object, creates in
itself a definite, particular activity. The result is separa-
tion. The self in this mental state is different from itself

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

155

in the potential stage and also from itself in any other
special activity.

3. The self then becomes negative and brings to an end
its particular activity. The energy involved in the given
activity returns, as it were, to the potential condition, with,
however, a definite tendency to react the special activity
which has just been brought to an end, apparently.

The foregoing signifies that the self, in the process of edu-
cation, gradually gives to itself its own definite traits or
characteristics, by producing them out of its native but un-
developed capacity. This principle of education is an-
nounced by Rosenkranz in "Philosophy of Education,"
page 26.

One may make the principle more real to himself, and un-
derstand more fully its universality, by considering
thoughtfully "The Rhythm of Motion," in First Principles,
by Herbert Spencer, pp. 250-271 ; the process in the seed, in
the amceba, in the object expressed by the sentence, in a
drama or in any other form of fiction.

The second element in the principle of self-determination,
i. e., the special activity, differentiates into :

The process of objectifying or making existent in the
world ideas that are strictly subjective.

The process of rendering subjective objective existences
whether physical or spiritual.

The Objectifying Process. The idea to be objectified may
be that —

Of some object of utility, as the cotton gin, the Brooklyn
bridge, the constitution of the United States.

Of an idealized activity, as the spiritual condition ex-
pressed in ' ' The Chambered Nautilus. ' '

Of a form of conduct or behavior.

Of these three, the last has been selected for a brief con-

156 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

sideration because of its explicit manifestation of the
process in education.

Behavior always implies a criterion to which one is to
conform. This is the reason that any human activity may
become moral.

The first stage in behavior is that in which the criterion
seems to be externally imposed, as the regulations of the
home, the rules of school, the Ten Commandments.

The second stage in behavior is that in which the criterion
is subjective only. This is the realm of conscience. If con-
science is irrational obedience to it can not be justified. If
it is universal it will ultimately become institutional and
thus pass over into the third class of criteria. Paul per-
secuted the Christians in obedience to his conscience. But
his conscience was irrational, because if made universal in
its application it would have meant that every one was to
be persecuted for his religious belief by every one who did
not believe in the same way. The conscience of the East
Indian impelled him to bury the living wives with the dead
husband, but the conscience of the British officer com-
manded the abolition of the custom. In order to be a true
guide the conscience must be educated and thus made uni-
versal.

The third stage in behavior is that in which the criterion
is subjective-objective, thus possessing the form of univer-
sality. The criterion may become subjective-objective in
either of two ways —

1. By having the one who obeys the criterion a partici-
pant in the creation of it.

2. By having the one who obeys it, study the criterion
until he sees the rational ground for it. In this way he takes
it up into his consciousness and recreates it, as it were. For
example, if the Jews had assembled in convention, and un-
der free discussion, had formulated and adopted the Ten

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 157

Commandments as a criterion of conduct, the Ten Com-
mandments would have been a subjective-objective criterion
produced in the first way. After the Ten Commandments
had been promulgated they could have been rendered sub-
jective-objective to any individual Jew by having him
study the reason underlying them until he justified them in
his own reason. He would thus have recreated them, and,
in a sense, would have become the producer of them. In
these ways the regulations of the home, the rules of school,
the rules of base ball, lawn tennis, the by-laws of an or-
ganization, a party platform, the customs of society, the
rules of business, the creed or discipline of a church, and
the laws of the state become subjective-objective criteria.

These stages of activity constitute the principle of dis-
cipline or government.

The Subjectifying Process. This is the process of knowl-
edge or of scholarship. It implies that the Infinite con-
sciousness and the finite consciousness have each passed
from the potential condition into the stage of distinction, or
the separative stage. To exist in this second stage is to ob-
jectify. The Infinite consciousness has objectified itself in
suns, stars, clouds, plants, animals, i. e., in the universe of
nature. The finite consciousness has objectified itself in the
arts, in machinery, in means of communication, in books,
and in all kinds of manufactured objects. Scholarship con-
sists in rendering subjective these two great realms — the
world of nature and the world of man. Each object in
either of these realms is essentially the self. It is the self
objectified. Its essence is the process of the self involved
in the objeetification. The essence of the cotton gin is the
process of Eli Whitney's mind in creating it. It is not
alien to him, and hence not to mankind. The self of the
most immature mind is essentially reflected in the cotton
gin. It is the acme of scholarship to possess the tendency to

158 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

apprehend intelligence, purpose or the process of the self as
the essence of the object. To discover the self in an ob-
ject does not mean that a subjective, introspective ego is ac-
tively present in the object as in the animated body. The
meaning is that the rational process of consciousness is re-
flected in the object. The rational process involves essen-
tially a consciousness of limit or defect, idealization of a
new condition lacking the limit, desire for the new condi-
tion, choice of the reality of the new condition, creation of
the new condition. To become aware of the reason for the
web feet in the swan is to discover the self in the object. It
is to comprehend the process of intelligence in the Infinite
consciousness which, through the process of evolution, gave
rise to that structure in the swan.

The General Nature of Knowing.

It may contribute to a clear knowledge of the stages in
knowing, to refer to the sense in which the words object and
image are used.

In general usage the word, "object," signifies a space-
occupying existence, as a tree, a chair, a cloud, etc. In
psychology, the term is used not only to signify existences
of this kind, but also to denote any existence whatever, phy-
sical or psychical, possible or impossible. The term is used
to denote that which is being attended to by the subject.
Whatever is set over against the self as an activity is con-
sidered to be an object. If the self examines its own ac-
tivity, the activity which is examined is regarded as an
object, while the activity of examining is spoken of as sub-
ject. Even the most fleeting psychological or philosophical
phenomenon is an object.

The term, "image," also has its narrower and wider
significance. In the narrower sense, it denotes a mental

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 159

state which signifies a space occupying object. In this
sense, it is regarded as the mental transcript or picture of
the object. In psychology, however, the word has not only
this meaning, but also an additional one. The term sig-
nifies the special mental state at any given instant. The
particular mental condition at any time, following one
mental state and preceeding another, and characterized by
a certain definiteness of detail, intensity, etc., is an image,
even if it signifies an abstract object. The mental state de-
noting diversity, patriotism, infinity, etc., is termed an
image in psychology. The word, "image" signifies any
initial mental state whatever, and the object denoted by
the mental state may be material or immaterial. The image
is merely the initial aspect of a mental process as the spring
is a source of a river. The spring is not one object and the
river a separate object. That which is termed spring or
source is the river itself in its beginning aspect, while that
which is termed river is the spring or source in its developed
state. In other words, the image is not one distinct mental
state while the succeeding stages constitute another dis-
tinct mental act in which the mind manipulates the image.

In entering upon a study of knowing, i. e., of the process
of rendering the objective subjective, it is to be noticed that
it exhibits certain stages, marked by development.

The first, which has least recognition of the. self in the
object is sense-perception. In every act of sense-perception
there is involved the self as an energy, the process in the
particular act, and the object perceived as present. The
sense-perceptive act is one of fusion- in that the object per-
ceived is regarded as entirely different from the self, there
being no recognition that the object is an objectification of
the self; in that neither the self as an energy nor the
special process in the particular act is in consciousness. In
sense-perception the mind is engrossed with the object as

160 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

something quite distinct from the self. This mode of ac-
tivity is known as presentation.

Its first stage is sensation. This is the process of becom-
ing aware of the entire environment as an indistinct whole.
In the form of successive and simultaneous sensations the
mind responds to the various characteristics of the present
objects. All sensations with their corresponding attributes
are given slight attention, but there is no special emphasis
or selection.

In sensation the mind is rather under the domination of
the external world, although each sensation is a manifesta-
tion of self -activity, in that the self created it out of itself.
It is not received.

The second stage is perception. In perception the mind
withdraws its slight attention from all attributes or objects
being sensed except one. In concentrates its energy upon
this one object, dwelling upon it until it has created a
distinct image of the object. The self projects this image.
That is, it interprets the image to signify the object as
present.

The third stage in presentation is apperception. Percep-
tion is separative. It distinguishes the object from the
fused environment and the special act of perception from
the condition of the self in sensing.

Apperception is, however, a unifying process. It unifies
the present image of the present object with kindred ideas
or tendencies which are already elements or constituents of
the organized self. The present image may be that signi-
fying a present white grape, (the first one known.) In ap-
perception this idea is identified with and differentiated
from already existing ideas of grapes and of other fruits.
This process gives organization to newly created knowledge.

The process of subjectifying has as its second stage rep-
resentation. This is more nearly a recognition of the self

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 161

in the object because, the object being absent, the mind tends
to consider itself as the producer of the image of the object.
The object is still regarded as distinct from the self. There
is no consciousness that the process of the self is the essence
of the real object. There is, however, a knowledge of a
certain degree of identity. The image, which constitutes
one element of the self, is known to be a psychical recrea-
tion of the object. Thus a kind of superficial identity is
felt.

The mechanical stage of representation is memory. It is
spontaneous, voluntary or systematic.

Spontaneous memory exhibits the potential stage of con-
sciousness. The elements in the process are fused or indis-
tinct, and there is no contradiction in the self.

Voluntary memory manifests the second or separative
stage of consciousness. It involves a contradiction in the
self in that there is an effort to direct and stimulate the
spontaneous activities. The mind discovers that, at the
time, it is unable to act in the direction desired. There is
thus, division in the self. It is based upon the act of for-
getting, the negative aspect of memory.

Systematic memory is a remembering which involves both
the voluntary and the spontaneous process. This form of
remembering includes all that is signified by the term mne-
monics from its superficial to its rational aspects. The self
always has a mnemonic system of its own and the value of
this system depends on the degree of culture. Systematic
memory is a remembering planned before hand in order to
enable the self to react voluntarily the beginning element in
the process. This then stimulates the spontaneous process.

A higher form of representation is imagination. The
freedom of the self begins to appear distinctly in imagina-
tion. Not only does the mind recognize itself as the pro-

162 . THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

ducer of the image, but it also discovers that to a degree it
recreates in a new form the object itself.

In imagination the mind interprets the image which it
has produced in itself, to signify a particular object, not
present at the time and never present. The process of
imagination has several forms, as the mechanical, the sepa-
rative and the creative or poetic.

The mechanical imagination may relate to present objects
or to absent objects. For example, while engaged in consid-
ering an object which has just been sense-perceived, the self
may modify one or more of the elements in the sense-per-
ception image, as, the element denoting the roughness. This
changes the image to an imagination image, and the image
is interpreted to denote a smooth object of the kind under
consideration. The object will be known as not present at
the time and as not at any time present.

A similar change may be brought about by the self when
it is engaged in remembering an object. The object of mem-
ory may be a field of green wheat. While existing in the
act of remembering, the mind may reconstruct the memory
image so that it is the image of a field of ripened wheat.
This image is interpreted to signify an object not at any
time present.

The separative imagination is so termed for the reason
that the self creates the image of a given object, as of a
word or of some externality in a product of art, and then
interprets the image to denote, not the object which has
been imaged, but instead, a separate object. For example,
a person may create the image of the expression, "It was
the great hall of William Euf us, ' ' and interpret the image
to signify not this expression, but rather quite a separate
object, namely, a large hall in London, as not at any time
present to the person who is imagining it. This form of

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 163

imagination is very prominent in history, geography, dis-
course, etc.

The second form of separative imagination is concerned
directly with the externalities of ordinary pictures, and of
works of art, as, products in architecture, sculpture, paint-
ing, etc. For example, let it be assumed that a person has
constructed the image of the marble which has been chiseled
into the shape of a hand in the statue of Minerva. The
mind, instead of interpreting this image to denote the actual
marble so shaped, interprets it to signify the actual hand,
as an object not now present, and never present.

The imagination is also creative or poetic. This may be
illustrated by reference to language.

In the very early stages the child uses the same word for
two different objects, not knowing that the objects are dif-
ferent. Since the impression is the same as that previously
experienced, he assumes the object to be the same. Thus
if the child calls the moon a lamp, his language is not fig-
urative. He assumes it to be a lamp, since the impression
is similar to that experienced when looking at a lamp. In
the same way a little child calls any man father.

A second stage in language is that in which the metaphor
is created. There is, first, the existence of a dim concep-
tion, as of something that is protective. This is then dif-
ferentiated into two clear conceptions, as for example, into
the idea of the advantage and protection belonging to one if
the spirit is characterized by a godly disposition and on the
other hand into the idea of a shield as protecting the body.
The third notion is that of the identity of the two concep-
tions. This is expressed in the form of the metaphor, as
"God is a shield."

The next stage in the development of language is that
which gives rise to the simile. Here the discrimination is
greater than in the metaphor. The two objects are seen

164 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

clearly to be different and yet an identity is discovered. The
expression is, "God is like a shield."

The fourth stage in the development of language is one
that gives rise to prose. In this case there is no considera-
tion of two objects, but merely of an object and its attribute,
as "God protects."

In general the creative imagination is that form of men-
tal activity in which a spiritual condition is exhibited in
terms of the physical.

Under representation there is a third stage involving both
memory and imagination, and even higher forms of know-
ing. It is a mode of consciousness in which the transition
to thought is made. It involves the consideration of lan-
guage or signs in general. The term often used for this
mental process is interpretation. Interpretation, however,
indicates one-half only of the language process, i. e., that
process in which —

Language already existing is observed,

The content or meaning is remembered, .imagined or
conceived and

The language is judged to signify the content.
The other process in language is creative. It is as fol-
lows:

The mind constructs an idea.

It imagines or remembers language adapted to this idea.

It judges this language to signify the idea.
A good term for the complete process is the language act.
The third and most important stage in the process of sub-
jectifying is thought. Thought is that mode of activity in
which the self discovers its own process to be the essence of
the object. In the process of thought the mind becomes
aware of its essential identity with the object. Although it
is not obvious, nevertheless any process of answering the
cmestion, "Why?" is a process of discerning- the intelligence

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 165

manifested in the object. If one by study answers the ques-
tion, "Why has the orange a rind?" he puts forth the
process of finding the process of self in the orange. That
is, he becomes conscious of intelligence in the structure of
the orange. In thinking, the mind has its own process as
its object, although its object seems to be something else.

To become conscious of the reason for the stopper in an
ink bottle is to comprehend the intelligence in the stopper,
the significance of it. The stopper is an object of meaning.
This is to say that it is the objectification of a volitional
process. Before the existence of the stopper a conscious
process substantially as follows occurred :

1. A person became aware that the ink in the receptacle
with no covering evaporated too rapidly, received too much
dust and was likely to be lost through the overturning of
the receptacle.

2. He idealized or imagined a condition in which these
things could not occur.

3. He experienced some degree of mingled pain and
pleasure on account of the consciousness of the contrasted
conditions.

4. He desired the idealized condition.

5. He chose to produce it.

6. He thought out the process of producing it; that is,
he constructed the notion of the stopper and of the process
of creating it.

7. His purpose and intelligence having given freedom to
the appropriate impulses he put forth the series of actions
necessary to produce the stopper.

8. He judged and accepted the result.

In this sense the stopper is an objectification of the
process of the self. When the stopper is sense-perceived,
remembered or imagined, this process is not known. To

166 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

think the stopper, however, is to obtain a notion of the
process of mind which is its essence. Thought discovers the
intelligence under the object. In the process of thought the
self faces its own process and identifies the process with
itself.

There are degrees in the clearness with which this is done.

The first and lowest stage of thought is called understand-
ing. This is the dim knowing of the process of the self as
the essence of the object. It is an indistinct consciousness
of intelligence of meaning as the reality of the object. The
peculiarity is that it fails to realize that the object has with-
in it a process or energy which creates and organizes it. To
the understanding, the object is organized from without;
the distinctions of the object are externally imposed. They
do not, to the understanding, arise from a generic force
within the object.

Still the process of understanding is a process of thinking,
because there is some consciousness of meaning, or of the
ego as the essence of the thing understood.

Understanding is marked by three stages.

The first stage is apprehension. In this stage the mean-
ing is grasped in a fused or indistinct way.

Apprehension is rather a feeling of meaning. This is in-
dicated by the popular use of the word.

The second stage is that of distinction. This stage is
separation. In it the mind analyzes or isolates in order to
remove the indistinctness of apprehension. The processes
in distinguishing are abstracting, discriminating and com-
paring. Comparing is a separating or distinguishing which
has an element of unity in it. It is therefore the basis and
the transition to classification.

Classification is the third stage of the process of under-
standing. It also has subordinate stages within it.

The first is identifying. In this act the mind unifies the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 167

object with a class on the basis of some external attribute.
This act is sometimes termed generalizing because it indi-
cates a somewhat superficial consideration. The word gen-
eralizing is, however, usually restricted to the act of discov-
ering a general truth in the inductive process.

The second is separating the object into cause and effect.
This unifies it with two classes — causes and effects.

The third is unifying the object with its own inner law or
organizing energy. This process is the discovery of the
structural principle of the object, but the mind as under-
standing becomes aware of it merely as a passive attribute,
and not as a genetic, inner force giving rise to all the dis-
tinctions in the object.

The second stage of thought is sometimes termed ratiocin-
ation. It is the distinguishing process of the mind as a
thinking activity. It is the separative stage growing out of
the stage of fusion or potentiality represented by under-
standing. This stage of thought differs from the previous
stage in that the energy producing the object and its details
is regarded as within the object.

When the mental process manifests development, a new
term is required to denote the differentiation. The word,
" understanding," signifies a mental process which termi-
nates in a knowledge of the central meaning of the object,
regarded as merely there, but not as giving rise to the ob-
ject and its differentiations. As the self develops, this
central characteristic, which the mind has discovered in its
act of understanding, appears to the self as a generic
energy. This is really consciousness of the general or uni-
versal as manifested in the particular which it has pro-
duced. The object known constitutes, therefore, the true
individual. If this awareness of the unity of the generic
activity with the particular which it produces is somewhat
potential, with the emphasis upon the general, and with the

.168 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

distinction between the general and the particular rather
implicit, the act is conccptive; if the distinction is explicit
and the awareness of the two clearly distinct aspects is
definite, the act is one of judgment; if in discovering the
unity of the two aspects the awareness is deeper than a
consciousness of the unity, in that it includes also, and
mainly, a knowledge of the ground or reason of the unity,
the activity is that of reasoning. In case the ground, or
mediating principle, is the uniformity of the process of the
generic force, which has been discovered in the particular
object, or in a number of such objects, the reasoning is in-
ductive. If the mediating principle is the identity of the
characteristics of the class with each particular of the class,
the reasoning is termed deductive.

To designate the common characteristic of these four
stages of becoming conscious of the generic in its relation
to the particular, the term, " ratiocination, " is employed.
T?y roine psychologists, the words, "elaboration" and "re-
flection" are used in a somewhat similar sense. The word,
"ratiocination" emphasizes the idea of a generic energy
v/hich is productive of the object and also of the differences
in it and in the class. The category of the mental process
denoted by this term is difference while that belonging to
the act of understanding is identity. It is true that in
understanding an object its distinctions are discovered, but
they are regarded as imposed mechanically, or from with-
out, while the differences recognized in ratiocination are
known as arising from the creative energy which gives
origin to the object itself. In ratiocination the idea of an
object is regarded as that which gives it being and which
accounts for all of its parts, attributes and relations. The
term has its root in the Latin word, "ratio," which signi-
fies reason. John Stuart Mill limits the term to the process
of necessary inferences because he is unwilling to admit

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

that ratiocination is, properly speaking, reasoning. If the
process of ratiocination is to be thought of as including rea-
soning, it is, on the other hand, to be distinguished from
the higher stage of thought known as reason, intuition or
insight. Sir William Hamilton's notion of the process of
ratiocination is referred to in "Fleming's Vocabulary of
Philosophy," page 334. The word is not extensively em-
ployed in psychological writings. Notwithstanding this
fact, it is here used because it seems best suited to express
in one comprehensive unity the processes of conception,
judgment, inductive and deductive reasoning, as activities
of recognizing the identity of a particular with a universal
which is the generic aspect of the particular. In "Angell's
Psychology/' page 218, one form of the word is employed
as shown by the following: "Beyond this we can say very
little, save that there seems some reason to believe that all
the jnore reflective and ratiocinative forms of thought pro-
cess involve in an important way the action of the Flechsig
association centers." The term is rarely used in common
speech and in current general writings. 'In this respect, it
differs distinctly from the great mass of terms employed
in the science of psychology. Such tern-s as desire, mem-
ory, conception, distinction, etc., belong to the everyday
speech of the people, in all ranks of life. In consequence
of the lack of exactness which belongs to the science of
psychology as compared with the exactness of other sciences,
the terms in psychology are mainly those of common usage,
and it is only occasionally, in order to express definite dis-
tinctions as they arise, that strange terms which are held
to be especially suitable, are employed. There is not that
elaborate development of technical scientific terms which
is found in the definitely organized sciences. This may be
clearly realized by examining any set of terms used in a

170 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

closely organized science to express the closely discriminated
distictions that belong to its subject-matter.*

The first stage of ratiocination is conceiving.

In its beginning in any given case, conceiving is a contin-
uation of the highest stage of classifying. The organizing
attribute of the object, which in classification is regarded
as merely common to all aspects of the object, is, in concep-
tion, discovered to be genetic.

In the second stage of conceiving the mind attends to the
particulars or distinctions produced by the creative activity.

The third stage of conceiving is one in which the self be-
comes aware indistinctly that each particular is genetic.
The energy of the object is now observed to be creative of
all the distinctions in the object. The universal and the
particular are, in this stage of conception, identified.

The second stage of ratiocination, namely judging, is the
mind's process of apprehending indistinctly the particular,
i. e., the object; of isolating and knowing clearly the univer-
sal, i. e., the isolated attribute, of ceasing to regard the at-
tribute as isolated and noting distinctly its unity with the
other aspects of the object.

Reasoning, the third stage, renders explicit the develop-
ment of the identity expressed by the copula.

One reason that students have difficulty in comprehend-
ing the process of judging and of reasoning is that their
first approach to each of these processes is usually logical
* FUNGI.

Series I.

Class 1. Phycomycetes— The alga-like fungi.
Sub-class I. Oomycetes .

Order 1. Chytridineae. On algae, etc.

Order 2. Saprolegniineae. Water moulds. Those grow-
ing on seedlings. Those growing on insects.
Order 3. Peronosporineae. White rusts.
Sub-class II. Zygomycetes.

Order 1. Mucorineae. The red mould, etc.

Order 2. Entomophthorineae. Insect parasitic fungi, etc.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 171

rather than psychological. In regard to the judgment it is
often said that consciousness being possessed of two ideas,
one universal and the other particular, identifies them or
discriminates them, thus producing the judgment or propo-
sition. This is a mechanical explanation and removes judg-
ment from the realm of actual psychological processes of
discovering truth in actual objects. Judging begins in the
construction of the idea of a single object whether general
or particular. In the examination of this object the self ab-
stracts or isolates an attribute (or the absence of the at-
tribute) and then identifies it with the object. In the first
case the sentence would express identity. In the second the
direct expression is that of non-identity, although in reality
the judgment is always the discovery of identity. The judg-
ment thus expressed is called a proposition.

Reasoning has often received the same mechanical ex-
planation as that referred to concerning the judgment. Rea-
soning is said to be a connection of propositions. One who
reasons is supposed to have in consciousness two propo-
sitions, and to deduce from these a third proposition. This
explanation is based upon the notions of formal logic and
not upon the nature of the psychological process of reason-
ing. The logical process is a generalization based upon the
psychological process. In the psychological process of rea-
soning the mind is concerned with a single object and is
making a real examination of it in order to discover some
fact concerning it — a fact not immediately accessible. The
first process is that of judging. That is, the mind constructs
the idea of the object as a whole; then, as a result of con-
tinued contemplation of the object, it abstracts or isolates
an attribute, and then identifies this attribute with the ob-
ject and its class, or with the object through its class. The
self does not, however, have in consciousness a judgment'
concerning the object and a judgment relating to the class

172 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

and then deduce a third judgment termed the conclusion.
The truth it discovers as to the class belongs to the process
of reacting similar past experience common to all processes
of knowing. There is no attention to a class until the neces-
sity for its consideration arises in the direct examination of
the object. It is a great aid in obtaining a knowledge of
reasoning to note that the mind always spontaneously re-
gards each object old or new as one of a class. The reason
for this is that each object of its entire past experience has
been found to belong to a class. In reasoning there occurs
a judgment, and then the process of discovering the ground
for the identity. There are three stages in this process.

The first is termed identification. In identification the
minds apprehends indistinctly the relation to the class which
is the ground for asserting identity. This indistinctness is
the basis of the inaccuracy so frequent in this stage. Rea-
soning always involves the particular, the general or class
and the universal. The mind in identifying unifies the par-
ticular with the class because it has discovered in the par-
ticular an attribute (the universal) which it is aware be-
longs to the class. This attribute may, however, belong to
another class, and may thus g've rise to an incorrect conclu-
sion, somewhat as follows: In examining a word, as red,
the characteristic expressing an attribute may be isolated
and then identified with the word. This completes the judg-
ment. Based upon past experience, the characteristic — ex-
pressing an attribute — may be identified with the class, at-
tributive verbs. The word, red, may then be identified with
the class attributive verbs. The defect in the process is lack
of distinction or differentiation in knowing fully the isolated
attribute. The characteristic which has been abstracted has
three elements, but one only is noticed in the given case.
The act involves, expressing an attribute, of an object, with-
out asserting it.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 173

The psychological process is —

Becoming conscious of the word,red, as a whole.
Isolating the characteristic expressing an attribute
of an object without asserting it; but observing only the
element, expressing an attribute.

Unifying the isolated attribute with the object
(the word red}.

Identifying the isolated attribute with the class,
attributive verbs.

Identifying the word, red, and the class attribu-
tive verbs on tho ground of their unity in expressing an at-
tribute.

The syllogism in the logical process is —

The word, red, expresses an attribute.
Attributive verbs express attributes.
The word, red, is an attributive verb.
It is to be noticed that the middle term is the universal,
and that it is expressed in the predicate of the major and of
the minor premise.

This stage of reasoning is that of fused unity. It resem-
bles the potential stage in the mind's activity.

The second stage in reasoning is known as induction. It
is the separative aspect of reasoning. It is the stage of dis-
tinction, although the final result is synthesis. The char-
acteristic element in induction is the isolating or discover-
ing of the distinguishing attribute of the class. Therefore,
the result is both synthetic and analytic. The objects of
the class are unified on the basis of the central attribute and
the class is separated from the other classes on the same
basis.

In induction there is always a particular object to be in-
vestigated. Let it be assumed that the object is the word,
red, as found in the sentence, "The leaf is red," and that it
is the first lesson in thinking the nature of the adjective.

174 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

It is also to be assumed that the pupil does not know the
name of the class or that there is a class. While it is not a
new word, it is practically new so far as its definite meaning
is concerned. Many objects exist thus to the pupil, and
even to the mature scholar.

The psychological process in induction with the word red
as its object is: The pupil's mind attends to the word as a
whole ; abstracts the characteristic expressing an attribute
of an object without asserting it; judges or rather assumes
the object to belong to a class; gives consideration to (ab-
stracts) the creative activity which produced the words
of the class; judges it to be uniform in its process; infers
that all the words of the class possess this characteristic —
expressing an attribute of an object without asserting it.
This is essentially the mind's process in inductive reason-
ing, and as a mere process is as clearly revealed with one ob-
ject as it would be with many. In order, however, to insure
validity to the result, there must be an investigation of
many objects.

The syllogism of the logical process is —

The creative activity of a class is uniform in its
process.

The creative activity produced this object (the
word red,) with the characteristic — expressing an attribute
of an object without asserting it.

All objects of the class possess that characteristic.

This equips the mind of the pupil with a general prin-
ciple, called in logic the major premise.

It is to be noted that the attribute abstracted is
actually found to be present. It is also to be observed
that the subjects in the first and second propositions are the
same, while in the identification the predicates were the
same. Induction begins by discovering an attribute in a sin-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 175

gle object and ends by asserting that attribute of the whole
class.

The third stage in reasoning is deduction. It resembles
the third stage in the process of consciousness. It is syn-
thetic in that it unifies an attribute with a single object,
but the result is to distinguish the object. That is, it ter-
minates in analysis or separation.

The psychological process in deduction is as f ollows :

The learner attends to some object as a whole, as,
to the word, red, in the sentence, ' ' The red sandstone is ex-
pensive. ' '

He inquires whether the word, red, limits the ap-
plication of the word, sandstone, or whether it merely em-
phasizes an attribute belonging to the object named by that
word. This is the act of abstracting the attribute limiting
and inquiring whether the word,red, possesses it in this
special case. The second step in deduction is always, sub-
stantially, of this form.

He then classes the word, red, on the basis of an
attribute which is different from the one inquired for. This
second attribute is one that is observed to be present. In
this case the characteristic on the basis of which the word is
classed is expressing a quality (color) which is variously
manifested by the object denoted by the substantive.

He then analyzes the class. In this analysis the
class is found to consist of words which express an attribute
of an object ; the attribute is found to be one which appears
in various forms in the object; the word is seen to express
one form of the attribute only and therefore to limit.

He knows that the words of the class limit, because
his analysis has shown limiting to be one of the characteris-
tics of the class.

He infers that the word, red, limits the application
of the word, sandstone, because it was found to belong to

176 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

the class expressing a quality (color) which is variously
manifested.

The syllogism of the logical process is —

All adjectives expressing attributes belonging to
only a part of a class are limiting.

The word red is an adjective, expressing an at-
tribute belonging to only a part of the objects expressed by
the word, sandstone.

The word, red, possesses the attribute of limiting
the application of the word, sandstone, in the sentence,
' ' The red sandstone is expensive. ' '

It is to be noted that the attribute isolated is not
directly known to be present as is always the case in in-
duction. In deduction the attribute isolated, i. e., thought
of, is not directly accessible. The mind gives attention to
the attribute and inquires whether it is possessed by the ob-
ject. Sometimes the person in the process of deduction cen-
ters attention upon the fact that the object has a cause, a
use, an effect, a relation of likeness or difference, and in-
quires, not whether it has the function, etc., but what the
function or relation is.

It is to be further noticed that the subject of the major
premise is the predicate of the minor premise. While the
truth discovered in induction is based on uniformity in the
creative process and is given a general application, the truth
discovered in deduction is based on the uniformity of the
essential class attributes produced by the creative activity,
and is given a particular application. This indicates that
there is no "inductive method." Induction is only one
stage of a process. Deduction is the other. Induction, be-
ginning with a single object, discovers a general truth. De-
duction, beginning with the general truth, discovers that the
general truth belongs to a certain particular object. The
growth of knowledge is not ' ' from the particular to the gen-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 177

eral" but from the particular, through the general to a par-
ticular, which is enriched to the mind by the discovery that
it (the particular) possesses the general.

Analysis of the Process in Knowing.

The special stages in the process of subjectifying or know-
ing are here to be reconsidered briefly, in order to illustrate
them somewhat more fully, as a basis for the interpretation
of lessons taught in the various grades:

I. Presentation.

The characteristic of presentation is that the self,
in an act of sense-perception, regards the object denoted by
the image to be particular, present in space now, and to be
entirely different from the knower. This is expressed in
Dewey's Psychology, page 159.

1. Sense-perception. In an act of sense-perception
there are, on the one hand, a present object or stimulus, as
a postage stamp, and on the other hand, the mind's act of
sense-perceiving which involves the creation of the image,
the reacting of similar past experience, the relating of the
present image and the past experience, and the judgment
that the present image signifies a postage stamp present
now.

This entire mental process is practically sub-conscious.
The only thing the mind seems to be conscious of is the ob-
ject itself. The mind ignores the fact that it has created
the image of the object and has obtained the meaning of
the image by adjusting its past experience to the image..
It is engrossed with the meaning, i. e., with the object. It
does not discover its own nature or process in the object, al-
though it is just its own process which constitutes the es-
sence of the object. The postage stamp is the objectificationi
of the process of the self. It came into being through the?

178 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

fact that the self became aware of some defect, idealized a
new condition, desired the new condition, chose it, thought
out the means, etc. All this process underlies the produc-
tion of any human product, and a similar process in the
mind of the Infinite is at the basis of the productions of the
objects of nature. The self is, in this sense, the essence of
each object. The characteristic of sense-perception is that
this unity of the object with mind itself and hence with the
mind of the one who is perceiving it is not known. The ob-
ject is regarded as a particular existence present in space,
and the fact that it has an essential unity with the mind
of the one who is knowing it is not even considered.

Sensing. The first stage in sense-perception — sensing —
is a general process in that the person is sensing at any
given instant all elements of his environment. He senses
or is dimly conscious, for example, of the blackboards, of
the wall paper above, of the light entering from the east,
of the open door at the west, of the chandeliers, of the
benches, of the students in the class, of the desk, of the dic-
tionary upon it, of the postage stamp lying upon the dic-
tionary, of the breeze, of his own position, of the sounds of
the hammer, of the murmur of distant voices, etc. The
mind in a sub-conscious way constructs a sensation for each
of these objects, practically simultaneously, and by adjust-
ing its past experience to each sensation, indistinctly in-
terprets it. This is the initial stage for many acts of per-
ception, but it is too fused and general to be termed per-
ception. Sensing is a condition in which many acts of per-
ception are merely potential. The attitude of the pei
to his environment is that of indistinctness or undifferen-
tiation. There may be, also, a special sensing, as of a sin-
gle quality. It would be helpful to the student to trace
full circuit of this.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

179

Perceiving. The transition may be made, however, from
sensing to perception at any instant. For example, the
sensation which the mind has created in response to the
postage stamp as a stimulus, may develop into the percep-
tion of the stamp. The perception would begin in the con-
centration of the attention upon that object. This is a
separative process. It isolates the object from the world
of objects and it separates the perceiving mind from the
undifferentiated condition of sensation, and from its con-
dition in any other special act. The initial result is an in-
distinct image of the object as a whole.

This is the mere beginning of perception, however. The
process continues by further isolations. For example, the
face of Washington with its surrounding frame is dis-
tinctly isolated and imaged. This occurs also with regard
to the four stars in their exact location, with regard to the
figure " 2 " and its surrounding wreath, with regard to the
round corners below and the pointed corners above, etc.
The creation of a distinct image in each of these cases stim-
ulates the reproduction of appropriate past experience, the
adjustment of this past experience, and the judgment as
to meaning. The act of perception is, therefore, a series of
acts of knowing. One by one the parts and attributes are
distinctly attended to and thus clearly imaged. As each
part or attribute is imaged, the image is interpreted, and
its meaning unified with the meaning as a whole. All of
the images successively constructed fuse into a distinct
image of the one complex object. The image is always in-
terpreted to signify a particular object, present now, and
different from the self.

Apperceiving The definite particular created in percep-
tion, is not left isolated. It is, through the mind's ten-
dency toward unification, classed with its kindred ideas,
just as a geologist, upon obtaining a new specimen, places

180 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

it with its own kind. In the example given, the mind would
apperceive by ordering the idea of the two-cent stamp
with such ideas as those of postoffice, mail car, letter car-
rier, special delivery stamp, etc. Apperceiving is ordering
or modifying a given set of tendencies or ideas by unifying
with them a kindred idea. This idea modifies the estab-
lished ideas and they in turn modify it. The conclusion of
sense-perception, then, is the classing or ordering of the
newly constructed idea. This is done to a certain extent
sub-consciously, but in the process of education the learner
should be made distinctly conscious of the relation. It
would be of great advantage to work out, at this stage, the
neural basis of sense-perception, as an aid in understand-
ing both the process and the pedagogical principles derived
from it.

Among the pedagogical principles implicit in the process
of sense-perception, the following may be mentioned :

An object to be sense-perceived must first be presented as
a whole to the learner's mind without calling attention to
its various parts and attributes.

The ideas, feelings, etc., that are already in consciousness
when one is beginning to perceive should be harmonious
with the object to be perceived, because the learner is prone
to perceive the object corresponding to his existing mental
state, whether it is present or not.

The sense-perception should, in the second place, become
analytic, because while the object is at first perceived as
"single and distinct," it is merely distinct from other ob-
jects. This analysis should be accurate, because the ideas
are to be the basis of future acts.

The process should, in the third place, be made appercep-
tive, that is, the idea should be identified with the other
ideas of this class. For example, as suggested above, the
idea of postage stamp should be identified or classed with

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 181

ideas of the postal service, as, with the idea of letter box,
etc.

II. Representation.

The term representation denotes the mind's act
of reproducing some former particular experience con-
sciously. It does not, as here employed, indicate that sub-
conscious employment of former experiences which is a
characteristic of all forms of knowing. An act of represen-
tation involves the recreation of a former mental image by
the self and the interpretation of this image to signify a
particular object, not now present, other than, or alien to
the self. All this mentioned is consciously known. The
case may be one in which the self is aware that the object
being represented has been present before, or it may be a
case in which the mind knows, that, in its present condi-
tion, the object has never been present. The act of rep-
resentation involves the unconscious reproduction of past
experience in order to interpret its present image, as does
sense-perception, but, in the main, the mind is conscious
that its state is a represented state.

It seems evident, therefore, that the characteristic of
representation is as follows : It is an act in which the mind
recreates in itself a particular image, and by relating this
to already acquired experience, interprets it to signify a
particular object, other than the self, once present but not
now present; or not present now, and not at any time
present in its imagined form. The object, as in sense-per-
ception, is regarded as different from the self, or rather it
is tacitly assumed to be different from the mind knowing it.
The separation of the object from the self is less complete,
however, than it was in sense perception. In representation
the self is distinctly aware of the image, and that it is the
image of an absent object. This gives rise to a certain

182 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

feeling of identity. An image which constitutes an ele-
ment of the self, and is also the actual image of the object
must, therefore, be kindred to the object. Thus, the mind
is aware of a superficial identity between it and the object.
It does not, yet, however, discover that its own process is
the essential nature of the object.

It will appear from the foregoing that the mind in repre-
sentation manifests itself in three forms — memory, the
more simple and the more strictly reproductive; imagina-
tion, the more complex and the more creative ; and the lan-
guage act, which involves the previous processes and is also
a transition to thought.

1. Memory.

The act of memory exhibits three stages — spontaneous,
voluntary and systematic.

Spontaneous memory.

The characteristic of spontaneous memory is the lack of
intention, and of consciousness in the process. All of the
four movements are put forth by the mind automatically,
and throughout the first three movements, i. e., throughout
the re-creation of the image, the re-acting of similar past
experience, and the process of comparing and contrasting
the present image with the ideas of the past, there is, prac-
tically the absence of consciousness.

In the fourth movement, however, namely, in the infer-
ence, consciousness is present.

The process in an act of memory includes, as just indi-
cated, the re-creation of the image, which becomes thus, the
memory image; the reproduction of similar past experi-
ences, the relating of the memory-image to this past experi-
ence, and the inference that the memory image denotes a
particular object, as the leather back of a book, observed
at a given time and place with certain environments. The
object is assumed to be different from the observer, but not

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 183

so completely, as is the case in sense-perception. A super-
ficial identity of the knower and the object being remem-
bered is indistinctly felt, since the image — an element of
the self — is the image of the object.

The first step in the process is that of creating the memory
image. This begins in the production of what may be
called the initial element of the memory image. This initial
element must be an element of a present mental act, and it
must have been an element in the former experience. There-
fore when this element is produced by the self, the mind
has really entered upon the former act. In the former
act of sense-perception, for example, there may have been
in the image an element appropriate to the curve of the
leather on the back of the book. In the present act of sense-
perceiving a dry, crooked, tapering branch of a tree in a
forest, there is in the image constructed by the mind a
similar element denoting the curved surface of the branch.

This element is the initial element of the memory image.
Its presence is due to the stimulus in the object and to the
self-activity of the mind. Having produced this element in
itself, the mind is, to a degree, existing in the former act.

What are the other elements of the former image, and
what occasions their reproduction? The other elements
may be assumed to be the element denoting the material,
leather, the element denoting the length of the leather, that
denoting the width of the leather, that denoting the place of
the object, that denoting the time of the observation, that
denoting other persons present, etc. What stimulates the
mind to react these elements, which, with the initial element,
constitute the complete memory-image? The stimulus is
not an extra-organic stimulus, but rather an Internal one,
viz., the tendency of the mind to complete any activity it
has reentered. But the question may arise, "Why did the
mind re-enter just this former act, when, no doubt, the ini-

184 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

tial element was the beginning of many former acts ? ' ' This
is answered by reference to subordinate laws of association
as determined by recentness, repetition, novelty, and rela-
tive interest.

When the mind has thus fully reconstructed the memory
image it has not, as is often supposed, completed the act of
memory. To complete the act of remembering requires
three additional movements or mental conditions. The first
of these is the process of reproducing former experiences,
as, for example, experiences at various times and places in
the past in which the mind has become aware of leather
as belonging to the binding of books.

The second is an activity of relating. The mind carefully
compares and contrasts the present memory-image with the
reproduced experiences, one by one, and finally identifies
it with a certain one of them. This identifying is of the
nature of an inference. On the basis of the process of re-
lating and the feeling of similarity, the mind interprets the
memory-image to signify a particular piece of leather ob-
served at a certain time, under definite circumstances, but
not present now. The object remembered is always as-
sumed, tacitly, to be other than the self. That is, the self
does not, as yet, discover the object to be merely an objectifi-
cation of its own process, although it is aware of a super-
ficial identity between itself and the object because its
image is the image of the object.

This form of memory — spontaneous — corresponds with
the first stage of the law of consciousness, since it is so
fully marked by unconsciousness, by lack of differentiation.

Voluntary memory.

This second form of memory is separative, manifest-
ing thus the second stage in the law of the mind. It is
based upon the negative aspect of memory — forgetting —
and is intended to negative the negation.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 185

Voluntary memory arises because some act of spon-
taneous memory is incomplete. The first movement is to
become aware of the lacking element. For example, the
element in the memory-image signifying the color of the
leather on the back of the book may not have been re-acted.

The second stage is to construct in consciousness the pur-
pose to react the lacking element, or, using objective terms,
to become aware clearly of the color of the leather. It is
the existence of this purpose which constitutes the volun-
tary aspect of the act of remembering. This form of mem-
ory is often termed recollection.

The third stage in voluntary memory is the act of judg-
ing or deciding upon the set of objects which are adapted
to stimulate mental images which may initiate the spon-
taneous re-acting of the sought-for mental state. For ex-
ample, the mind may judge that its attention should be
concentrated on leather as to its natural color, on leather
as possessing other colors as revealed by past experience,
especially on leather as used in the manufacture of book
covers.

This third stage merges immediately into a fourth as-
pect which is the mental reconstruction of these various
objects with their various colors. Among these ideas which
have been re-acted is the one signifying the color which
had not been remembered, or one so similar to the idea
of the sought-for color that under the stimulus of it the
mind spontaneously reproduces the particular mental ele-
ment denoting the color, of which color the mind was,
without effort, unable to become conscious. The act of
voluntary memory is, however, incomplete until this men-
tal state is recognized as the desired one, or in objective
terms, until the color, now reproduced in consciousness is
recognized as the one which was upon the leather. This
mental act of recognition is due, probably, to the feeling of

186 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

familiarity as arising from the similarity of both the idea
and its neural basis to these two forms of re-action in the
former experience. The process of recollecting a name
would involve a process consisting of the same stages.

Systematic memory.

The third form of memory may be termed systematic.
It involves a distinct preparation at the time of learning
the object. The person who is becoming acquainted with an
object or event has, it is to be assumed, special reasons for
desiring to be able to reproduce, with facility, the idea
of the object or event at any future time when it is needed.
He, therefore, plans to learn it in the way that will give
him most power in reproducing the idea of it. The most
economical mode of doing this is to relate the object being
learned to objects whose corresponding mental states are
habits in the life of the learner. For example, if the
learner is a minister, the objects for which he has habitual
corresponding psychical activities are his parsonage, his
church building, the hymnal of his church, the Lord's
Prayer, Paul's journey to Damascus, etc. In case he should
relate the new object to one or more of these familiar ob-
jects, it would, in future be necessary only to react volun-
tarily the idea appropriate to the familiar object to stim-
ulate the spontaneous reproduction of the idea of the new
object.

The central fact in the preparation is that the ob-
ject being learned is to be related with objects whose
mental representatives have become habitual in the life
of the learner. It is evident, therefore, that the act of
relating in the case of any person would reveal features
peculiar to him, and also features common to him and
others.

The individual should relate the new object to fa-
miliar objects under one or more of the relations given in

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

t

n

m

r

1

sh

g

f

b

d

j

k

V

P

ch

c

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 187

the following descending grade: To familiar objects as to
their purpose; cause and effect; likeness and difference;
time and place; or perhaps to a familiar artificial system.
This last is referred to as a mnemonic system by Angell on
page 201 of his work in psychology, and by James under
ingenious methods, on page 298 of his "Briefer Course.'*
The latter gives as a common figure alphabet the following :

o
s
c
z

g q*

In this alphabet the vowels are not to be considered.
Therefore, if one wished to remember 1718 as a date in
history or as a street number he could relate it to some
such expression as "To go to fee." It may help the stu-
dent to understand the relations referred to above, to de-
cide upon the relations one should seek to establish in or-
der to gain permanent knowledge of "1718 Talbot Ave-
nue," as a street address, or of the thoughts of the "Com-
pact on the Mayflower," in their order.

All this is merely the preparation for an act of sys-
tematic memory. The process in the act of remembering
is now to be noticed. The first stage is that of reacting
voluntarily the mental elements or states denoting the sys-
tem of objects which have been related to the object to be
remembered, as, for example, reacting voluntarily the idea
of the expression "To go to fee. ' '

The second stage is the spontaneous reacting of the
idea of the object to be remembered, as the idea of the
number, 1718. The example given belongs under the artifi-
cial system of relations, but the stages are the same when
the established relations are inherent in the object to be
remembered.

188 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

The value of relating the new object to objects habitually
considered by the self is evident.

In what respects is memory more fundamental than
sense-perception? Range of consciousness of relations is
the factor which determines whether one mode of mental
action is more fundamental than another. Mind is held to
be "the universal substrate," and whatever form of men-
tal activity exhibits most of the self-activity of the mind is
most fundamental.

With this as a criterion, memory appears to be more
fundamental than perception in these respects : It involves
a more extended range of consciousness. In sense-percep-
tion the mind has constructed an image, but the self is
unconscious of the image, the attention being centered upon
the external object only. In memory, however, the mind is
distinctly conscious of the image and of its process in know-
ing the absent object.

Memory is more fundamental than sense perception, also,
in the fact that it involves a more complete idea of the
self. Sense-perception is limited to the immediate present.
It involves but a brief portion of the observer's life. In
memory the individual is conscious not only of his present,
but of a definite past, and in a certain sense of his life
during the intervening period.

Memory is also more fundamental than sense-perception
in that in an act of memory the mind ignores, to a certain
extent, the various details of the object of which it was
distinctly conscious in the act of sense-perceiving. This
act of ignoring the details in the object is a more advan-
tageous basis for thought, since it concentrates attention
upon the essential nature of the object more fully than is
done in sense perception.

The student should here make a careful study of the
neural basis of memory.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 189

Among the pedagogical principles that are implicit in
the act of memory the following may be noted :

The mastery of an object involves repetition, a repetition
that should reveal elements of differentiation. That is, in
re-studying an object, or the material of a lesson, the re-
view should vary to a certain extent from the original
work. It is evident, also, that the ability to remember an
object is closely related to the interest of the person who is
engaged in the act of knowing the object in the beginning.
Interest is the basis of attention, and a discriminative at-
tention insures greater efficiency in the memory.

The third principle may be stated as follows : The child
should be led to make clearly conscious to himself the ele-
ment that is lacking in any case of voluntary memory. In
voluntary memory the object is already largely known.
Some aspect of it, however, is lacking in consciousness. In
enabling the child to re-know this aspect of the object he
should be led to define to himself exactly the element
which is lacking.

In the fourth place, the child who is preparing to re-
member an object should be given a clear knowledge of
closely related objects. These relations should also be, in
so far as possible, essential relations.

In the fifth place, the child should be led to identify
the object he is studying with other objects according to a
certain grade of relations. If necessary, the child should
identify the object with other objects by means of certain
aspects of an artificial system; by means of relations of
time and space; through relations of likeness and differ-
ence; through relations of cause and effect; and through
relations of purpose.

2. Imagination.

a. Mechanical imagination.

There are two kinds of mechanical imagination^

190 THK PROBLEM OF METHOD.

i. e., the modification of images signifying objects present,
and the modification of images signifying objects absent.

In the first kind the mind creates the sense-per-
ception image of a pencil, which is, for example, a paper
pencil with certain letters on the outside, and a blue crayon
point. The mind then changes the element signifying blue
in the crayon point, and produces in its stead the element
signifying red as the color of the crayon point. It con-
tinues to act along with this, all the other elements of the
sense-perception image, and interprets the new image, which
is now the imagination image, to signify the pencil with at-
tributes indicated as not present now and never present.

In the second kind the mind constructs, for exam-
ple, the memory-image of a particular gold-handled pen.
In creating the memory-image the mind reconstructs all of
the elements of this image just as they were. The mind
then constructs instead of the element signifying gold-
handled, the element signifying pearl-handled, retaining
all the other elements of the memory-image and interpret-
ing the modified image to signify a pearl-handled pen not
present and never present.

b. Reproductive imagination.

There are two kinds of reproductive or separative
imagination. The first is the interpretation of the image
appropriate to words, to denote objects expressed by the
words, rather than the words themselves. In this in-
terpretation the objects are felt to be objects never ex-
perienced in that exact form.

The second is the interpretation of images appropri-
ate to pictures or to the mere externalities of works of art,
to signify the objects which these express. These objects
are known as objects which have never been experienced.

In the first kind take, for example, these words,
"Through the black smoke of the city rose the lofty tower

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 191

of the court house." As the mind sense-perceives the
sound of these words it interprets the auditory image ap-
propriate to the words, to signify the object — a tower loom-
ing up through the smoke, rather than the words, ' ' Through
the black smoke," etc. One element of the activity is the
consciousness that this object has never been experienced.

In the second kind take the example of a photo-
graph. As the mind perceives light and dark shades it in-
terprets the image of these to signify the actual body of
the person, the actual material of the dress, etc., as objects
never experienced.

c. Creative imagination.

Creative imagination is either productive or inter-
pretative. Its range is much greater than that which is
included under the process of creating the metaphor, yet,
since this process is typical, creative imagination will be
explained from this point of view.

In that form of creative imagination which is termed
productive, the mind creates the ideal, images an object ap-
propriate to the ideal, and judges that this object sym-
bolizes the ideal.

There are three forms of productive imagination,
i. e., that which satisfies the aesthetic interest, that which
satisfies the intellectual interest, and that which satisfies
the volitional interest.

The creation of the object expressed by the metaphor,
and, in fact, the production of the world of art in general,
come under the first form.

In the creation of the idealized object symbolized by
the metaphor, the mind in the first stage, attends to some
general idea. In the second stage, the self differentiates
its idea of the general into two aspects, one signifying a
sensuous or physical object and the other, the spiritual ob-
ject. Each of these involves the general of which the mind

192 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

is conscious in the first stage. In the third stage the mind
identifies the spiritual object with the physical as its sym-
bol. For example, in the first stage, the mind may be con-
sidering the general object, purity. In the second stage
it differentiates its idea of this general into two aspects,
one of which signifies the physical object, as a lily, snowy
white, growing in a quiet valley ; and the other signifies the
spiritual object, a soul unstained by sin. In the third stage
the mind identifies the physical object, the lily of the valley,
with the spiritual object, the unstained soul, as its symbol.
Strictly considered, this concludes the act of creative imag-
ination, but the imaginative process naturally merges into
the language act, and the mind expresses the idealized unity
by some such expression as "The soul is the lily of the
valley."

A modification of this process is that in which the
first stage is a consciousness of a single object either phy-
sical or spiritual, but usually physical. In the second stage
the mind retains in consciousness the idea of this particu-
lar object and constructs in contrast with it the image of
an opposite, but kindred object. In the third stage the
mind identifies the physical object with the spiritual, re-
garding the physical as symbol. For example, the mind
may be conscious of a lute which the various breezes are
playing. In the second stage the mind continues to be
conscious of this object, and creates in contrast with it the
image of a spiritual object, i. e., the soul, stirred, sometimes,
by the passing whims of fashion into discord, and soothed,
at times, by deeds of philanthropy. In the third stage, the
mind identifies the physical object — the lute — with the
spiritual object, the soul, regarding the physical as its
symbol. By the language act the mind may express the
idealized unity somewhat as follows : ' ' The soul is the lute
upon which every passing breeze may play. ' '

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 193

In the second form of productive imagination — that
which satisfies the intellectual interest — the process is simi-
lar to that which satisfies aesthetic interest. There is first
the creation of some notion, as, for example, that of plant-
life ; second, the creation of the expression, as a discourse on
plants; third, the identification in the mind of the author,
of his discourse, and his thought relating to plant-life un-
der the relation of symbol and thing signified. The process
in the invention of the sewing-machine, and of the cotton-
gin belongs under this form.

In the third form of productive imagination — that
which satisfies an ethical interest — the process is similar
to that under the intellectual and the aesthetic interest.
The mind constructs the idea for some general truth or
principle as, for example, that expressed by "all just gov-
ernment derives its authority from the consent of the gov-
erned. " In the second movement, the mind creates some
embodiment of this, as, the constitution of the United States,
or the charter of a city. In the third stage it judges that
this constitution or this charter manifests this principle.

Interpretative imagination, in a way, reverses the
process in productive imagination. For example, let it be
assumed that a statue is being studied. At first the mind
will contemplate the particular object. It will then, by re-
flection, comprehend its inner meaning. It will conclude,
by estimating the statue, i. e., by judging whether, as a
symbol, it adequately expresses the meaning. ( See Dewey 'a
Psychology, pp. 195-200..)

It seems evident from the foregoing discussion that
the process of imagination is more fundamental than the
process of memory. Some of the main ways in which there
seems to be greater development may be mentioned:

The imagination reveals more freedom from external
restraint. In the act of remembering the pencil, the mind

194 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

created the image of the particular pencil, and this image
corresponded exactly to the external object. In the act of
imagination the mind created the image of an object — a
pencil — which had never been experienced, thus manifest-
ing the mind's initiative.

It has more of consciousness in it because in any
given case the mind ceases to act an element or elements
then being produced and constructs other elements signify-
ing other characteristics of the object. There is also a
fuller range of consciousness, since, in imagination, the
person is slightly aware of the general. For example, in
the case of the pencil, the mind ceased to act the element
signifying blue in the crayon point, and constructed in its
stead the element signifying red. Since the object with the
new characteristic, red crayon, is still regarded as a pencil,
it is evident that the mind is slightly conscious of the gen-
eral idea which the word, ''pencil," names.

It is more developed than memory because its activ-
ity is related more distinctly to the purposes of the self.
Every time the self images an object, either in an improved
form or merely in a new form, the first step toward pur-
posing to have the object in that form has been taken. In
harmony with this idea it has been said that "brain paths
lead to action."

The imagination is more fundamental than memory
in that it is more closely related to the feelings, particu-
larly to the aesthetic feelings. Any creation arouses the
feeling of satisfaction in the form of admiration or nega-
tive aesthetic feeling.

At this stage let the student make a careful investi-
gation of the neural basis of imagination.

Some of the main pedagogical principles which
originate in imagination are as follows:

The child should be trained to select words that

THE PROBLKM OF MKTHOD. 195

are graphic, picturesque. For instance, the child may be
led to listen to the sound of the wind until he will be in-
clined to describe the wind as howling.

The child should be led to image according to true
relations. For example, if he is writing a description of
the object suggested by this sentence, "Aunt Polly sat
in her little back parlor paring a panful of red apples be-
fore the fire," he may, by a few suggestions, be made con-
scious that Aunt Polly 's parlor would not be furnished with
a piano or with a Brussels carpet.

The child's imagination must be so trained that he will
tend to seek the inner meanings of works of art. For in-
stance, in the picture of St. Michael and the Dragon the
child should first sense-perceive the picture as a whole.
Then he should be led to distinguish the picture into its
constituents or parts — an angel with large wings, bright
face, and great arms, holding a mighty sword in one hand
over a dark scowling figure with small wings, and with the
other hand forcing this ugly figure down into a dark pit
between two mountains. By explanation, questioning, and
suggestion the child may be led to interpret the great arms
and large wings to signify strength, and the bright, fair
face, goodness; the small wings, weakness; the scowling
face, evil. The child is then to be so directed that he will
unify the various parts with their meanings in a way to
catch, creatively, their general truth, ' ' Good conquers evil. ' '

3. The Language Activity.

This is a mode of mental activity concerned with sym-
bols, i. e., letters, words, sentences, etc. In one aspect it
is partially an objectifying activity. It is a complex activ-
ity involving sometimes sense-perceiving, remembering,
judging, imagining. Sometimes it contains conceiving and
reasoning. Its content or object of consideration is lan-
guage. The act has been termed memorization. This term

196 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

is somewhat objectionable, however, because it suggests
the activity of memorizing which is quite a different activ-
ity from that referred to as memorization or the language
activity. The general nature of the language activity is ex-
plained in Psychology, by Dewey, pp. 211-212.

The language act is the process of the self in either
producing or interpreting language.

a. The act of producing language.

In this act the mind first becomes conscious of an
object. The term, object, is here used in the sense set
forth on page 158. It denotes the object known in sense-
perception, memory, imagination or introspection, and the
relation or meaning of which one becomes conscious in an
act of understanding, conception, judgment, reasoning, or
intuition. For example, through the presence of an object,
or of a picture of it, or through language, a person may
become conscious of an animal, as, the squirrel ; or through
introspection the mind may become conscious of its dis-
tinct mental states and be impressed with each as a unit;
or through abstraction the mind may become conscious of
an attribute or characteristic of an object, as is illustrated
in the botanical experiments of Mr. Luther Burbank. In
examining closely a new fruit he noted particularly, i. e.,
abstracted, certain characteristics of both the potato and
the tomato, as, the green top of the potato, the growth of the
fruit on the top, like the tomato, the size and shape of a
small tomato, white colored flesh, like the potato. This
was an example of abstraction. The abstracted attribute
was the object which was afterwards to be expressed in
language.

The abstraction is the first stage in the productive
language act. Adam, according to Scriptural account, em-
phasized a certain characteristic of his companion. This
was the first stage in his process of naming his companion.

THE PROBLEM OP METHOD. 197

By reflection or abstraction he became conscious of the
general characteristic — "Mother of all the living." This
characteristic is the object which is to be expressed in lan-
guage.

In the second stage of the act of producing lan-
guage the person becomes conscious that there is no suitable
term to preserve the idea of the object of which he became
conscious in the first stage. He, therefore, purposes to
produce such a symbol. In the first of the cases referred
to above, having noticed particularly the tail of the ani-
mal, and especially its bushy character which enables it to
cast a shadow, he imaged the term, squirrel. In the second
case, having emphasized the distinctness of each mental
state, and the unity of the mental states in this respect, he
imaged the term psycJiome. In the third case, having been
impressed with the characteristics of the new fruit which
he had obtained by crossing the potato and the tomato he
imaged the term, pomato. In the other case mentioned, the
special attention to the characteristic expressed by ' ' mother
of all the living," stimulated the act of imaging the name,
Eve.

The third stage in the act of producing language is,
practically, contemporaneous with the second, and implied
in it. It is the judgment or decision that the imaged term
is appropriate to the meaning. This is its selection.

This act of judgment and selection may be very
brief, or it may require considerable deliberation. The
process which has been indicated for words, is also present
in the construction of phrases, sentences, paragraphs, chap-
ters, and entire volumes.

b. The act of interpreting language.
This process is essentially the reverse of the former
process. The assumption is that the language has been

198 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

produced, and that the learner is examing it in order to be-
come conscious of its structure and meaning.

The first stage is the process of becoming conscious
of the term as a visible or audible object. For example, the
pupil may become conscious of the word, "squirrel," or
"psychome," or "Eve," or "psychiatrist," as a visible or
audible expression. Since this term is always a particular,
material object, the process of becoming aware of it is al-
ways sense-perception, memory or imagination.

The second stage in the interpretative language act
is the process of remembering, or constructing for the first
time the idea of the object or meaning expressed by the
term. For example, the child may be led by questioning,
explanation, and the use of reference books to interpret the
word, "squirrel," to mean an animal with a bushy tail;
the name, ' ' Eve, ' ' to mean ' * mother of all the living ; ' ' the
term, psychiatrist," to mean one who ministers to 8 mind
diseased.

The third stage is the act of the mind in judging
or asserting distinctly that term which was considered in
the first stage is an appropriate symbol for the idea which
has been either recreated or created. This act of judgment,
while distinctly a separate movement in consciousness, does
not succeed the second stage in time, but is rather co-exist-
ent with it.

The language act is a more fully developed form of
consciousness than imagination. Some of the manifesta-
tions of this development are as follows: In the language
act, the mind is more distinctly conscious of the relation.
(Symbol and thing signified.)

It is more distinctly conscious of the general. ( The
idea expressed in the language.)

The object or symbol which is created in the second
stage of the productive language act is more fully in

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 199

identity with the self than the object which is created in
imagination. For example, a picture, a statue, a work of
architecture has in it more or less of the material, while a
word, as, "faith," is very largely a product of the self,
manifesting, to a certain extent, its fundamental process.
There is a more distinct consciousness of social relations,
because the object created, i. e., the word, phrase, etc., is
for the sake of communication. For example, the rattling
of a window produces a sound, but the sound has no social
significance. The sound, "Good-morning," does, however,
have social relations because it is uttered by one person,
to reveal that which is in his consciousness, and is heard by
another, and its meaning becomes a part of the conscious-
ness of the person hearing.

The student may here make an investigation of the
neural basis of the language act.

Among the pedagogical principles implicit in the
language act are these :

The child should be led to distinguish the three
kinds of language, i. e., objective, subjective, and symbolic.
(See page 135.)

He should be led to value, and to secure a rich fund
of terms.

He should be taught to discriminate closely, and to
be satisfied with exact expressions only.

He should be given a close acquaintance with the
literal meanings of words.

It should be the aim to give him the habit of empha-
sizing content or meaning over expression or form.

III. Thought.
1. The Understanding.

The language act is the transition from imagination
to thought, because in becoming aware of the meaning the

200 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

thought processes are involved. The content of language is
usually the concept, the judgment, or the product of some
process of reasoning. The general nature of thought
was shown on pages 164-165. It was there noted that its
main stages are understanding, ratiocination, and intuition
or reason. The mental activity termed understanding is
the lowest, most indistinct, and most mechanical form of
thinking, although in its highest stages it becomes a very
important process, involving considerable reflection. In its
lowest stage it takes the form termed apprehension. This
is the mode of activity referred to in Angell's Psychology,
pages 203-206, as "consciousness of meaning." On these
pages it is shown that perception, memory and imagination,
while signifying primarily particular objects, denote, also,
in an indistinct v, ay, the meaning exhibited in these ob-
jects. The author says: "Perception could never lead to
the establishment of habitual co-ordinations were we not
able to apprehend the meaning of that which we see and
hear and touch. Memory would be an abortive resuscita-
tion of the past could we not recognize the meaning of that
which we recall. Imagination in all its forms would be a
mere mental logomachy were it not for our ability to un-
derstand the meaning of the images which occupy our
minds. From beginning to end, therefore, of our mental
activities the presence of meaning is absolutely indespensa-
ble."

The essential nature of understanding is indicated
by stating that its predominant category or relation is
identity. In its act of understanding the mind becomes
aware of the different parts and attributes of the object,
but these parts and attributes are regarded as brought about
in the object by forces that are external to it. The mind,
in the stage of development known as the understanding,
does not become conscious of an essential inner force in

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 201

the object as giving rise to all of its parts and distinctions.

The predominant stages of the understanding have
been given as apprehension, distinction and classification.

In apprehension the mind constructs the image or
special mental state appropriate to the object, reacts simi-
lar past experiences and interprets the image to signify
a given meaning. This meaning is reached without the
conscious process of reasoning, and there is a tinge of
doubt as to whether the true meaning had been discovered.
This doubt is reflected in the term "apprehension." The
mind therefore attempts to test the result reached. The
doubt develops into the process of distinction, in which
one by one, the mind abstracts and examines the different
parts and attributes of the object in order to discover the
special meaning of each. It then holds the particular mean-
ing of the attribute or part in consciousness along with the
meaning which has just been apprehended, being aware that
they are different, although known in the one mental act.
This is to discriminate them. The two separate meanings
are then compared. It is thus evident that the total process
in distinction consists of abstraction, discrimination and
comparison. The mind examines, thus, in its process of
distinction, the various parts and attributes of the object
until it feels justified in classifying it.

The first process in classification is that of classify-
ing the object as a whole, on the basis of the meaning dis-
covered in the examination of the various parts and at-
tributes.

The second process in classification is the act of
identifying the object with its causes and effects.

The final process in classification is to identify the
object with its central meaning. In this stage the mind
becomes aware of the generic force which underlies the ob-
ject as its dominant characteristic, but is not conscious of

202 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

it as creative; that is, does not recognize it as a generic
force. It merely becomes aware of this central truth as
in the object. Through the whole process of understand-
ing the object or objects the mind regards all parts, at-
tributes, divisions, etc., as externally imposed.

The following examples will reveal in simple form
the general nature of the process in understanding :

Let the object be a glass pen in which the tubular
holder tapers at one end to form the point.

In the first stage — that of apprehension — the mind
first creates an image appropriate to the object. The
image stimulates the mind to react similar past experiences,
and to compare and contrast them with the present image.
Upon this basis the mind dimly interprets the image to
mean a glass pen. This completes the stage of apprehension.

The presence of this meaning stimulates the process
of distinction. In this process the mind first abstracts
one particular element of the image to which it directs its
attention. In this case it abstracts the element signifying
the tapering point. The mind then sets the idea of the
tapering point over against the apprehended meaning of
the object. This stimulates the comparison of the idea of
that particular characteristic with the apprehended mean-
ing to discover whether or not it is in harmony with it,
thus tending to prove it to be the correct meaning. The
mind may put forth this full process of distinction with at-
tribute after attribute of the object until it is certain as
to whether or not the meaning apprehended is the correct
one. In this case the element signifying a tapering point
supports the meaning, a glass pen, and the apprehended
meaning is correct. This completes the stage of distinction.

The process of distinction develops into the stage
of classification.

First, on account of the external attributes of the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 203

object, the mind classifies it, as a whole, as a glass pen.

The object is then classified as to its cause and effect.
To do this the mind reflects concerning the process in the
consciousness of the producer. What ideas caused him to
produce the object ?

This reflection may result in the idea that the
producer wished to make a pen in which the pen and holder
would be in one piece. He may have thought that a glass
pen would prove more attractive to the child than an or-
dinary pen, and that in consequence the sales might be
greater. He may have known that a glass pen would be
easily broken, and that this would also tend to increase the
sales. The person who is studying the object may, by his
reflection, have discovered many other causes of the glass
pen, but these are sufficient to make the example clear.

The mind of the investigator next discovers the
effects of the production of the object. He finds that the
pen is always ready for use, since it is made in one piece;
that it attracts the attention of the child, and that every
child will have one if possible ; that it is easily broken, and
that a paper written with a glass pen does not present as
neat an appearance as one written with a steel pen.

The last stage in the process of classification is the
discovery of the central idea in the object. In this case it
discovers the idea, writing with a one-piece object to be the
dominant notion. This central characteristic of the object
is, however, considered as passive, as merely there.

Let a second example be the process of understand-
ing some strange plant, as the water-mould.

The act begins by the apprehension of the mould
as it lies on a piece of mounting glass. In this process of
apprehension, as shown in the previous example, there are
three distinct movements, e. g., the mind sense-perceives
the mould on the mounting glass, reacts similar past ex-

204 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

perience and compares and contrasts the idea of the pres-
ent object with similar past experience and is thus led to
infer that the object present now is water-mould. Appre-
hension is really the first aspect of the law of self as mani-
fested in the act of understanding.

The presence of the apprehended meaning stimulates
the mind to pass into the stage of distinction. This stage
either proves or disproves the inference made in the stage
of apprehending. It also is a complex process: First, the
mind abstracts an attribute as colorless. It then discrim-
inates the meaning of this attribute and the general idea or
meaning — water-mould — which it had apprehended. It
compares the meaning of the abstracted attribute — color-
less— and the meaning of water-mould, asking the ques-
tion, "Does the meaning of water-mould harmonize with
the meaning of the abstracted attribute ? ' ' One distinction
may furnish sufficient basis for the classification of the ob-
ject, but the mind usually abstracts many attributes. For
example, in this case the student may, by means of the
microscope, isolate the characteristics — thread-like parts,
spore-producing, particularly shaped spores, etc, and in
each case discriminate and compare, asking, meanwhile, the
question given above.

When the process of distinction has disclosed con-
siderable significant data, there is a development into the
higher process of classification.

In this process, on the basis of the meaning of the
attributes discovered, i. e., living in water, receiving nour-
ishment from seeds, fish eggs, fish and dead insects, col-
orless, thread-like, spore-producing, having spores of a
characteristic kind — the mind makes the general classifica-
tion of the whole object as water-mould. This meaning is
more fully mediated than that of apprehension. This act
of general classification is succeeded by the act of classing

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 205

the object with its causes and effects. It is discovered, for
example, that the causes of the water-mould are the pres-
ence of water in large quantities, of dead insects in the
water, its own nature, etc.

The self continues its process of classification by be-
coming conscious that the effects are as follows: the dis-
integration of the lifeless insects, and the restoration of
the elements in them to the air and soil, the destruction of
dormant fish, the prevention of the hatching of fish eggs,
the destruction of the germ in the seed, etc.

The conclusion of the process of classification is the
act of identifying the water-mould with its predominant
characteristic, i. e., putting forth its peculiar mode of ac-
tivity in water, as its name signifies.

The understanding is more fundamental than the
language act in that the most active element of conscious-
ness— attention — is concentrated more largely upon mean-
ing, as such, than is the case in the language act.

As previously indicated, the element of relation or
meaning is indistinctly and indirectly noticed even in
sense-perception and memory. This apprehension of mean-
ing becomes slightly more explicit in imagination and still
more so in the language act. It remains true, however,
that in each of these forms of activity the focus of atten-
tion is upon the particular object which, in the language act,
is language or expression itself.

In the act of understanding, the focus of atten-
tion has changed from the particular object to its meaning,
i. e., the mind does not apprehend the particular object,
but rather the meaning of it; it does not notice the ab-
stracted attribute, but the meaning of the abstracted at-
tribute; it does not discriminate the object and the ab-
stracted attribute, but the meaning of the object and the
meaning of the abstracted attribute, etc. This is an im-

206 THK PROBLEM OF METHOD.

portant advance. It is the act of being concerned with,
relation, a general, permanent something, rather than with
a particular, transient existence.

What is the neural basis of the stages in the progress
of understanding?

The following may be given as pedagogical princi-
ples implicit in the activity of understanding :

The pupil should be led to feel that sameness is the
relation emphasized in the understanding and that distinc-
tion is for the purpose of identity.

His process in knowing the meaning should be in
harmony with the order of development in the process of
understanding — apprehension, abstraction, discrimination,
etc., but there should be no effort to make him acquainted
with the process itself.

He must be led to feel that the true totality of an
object is found in its causes, its present condition and its
effects, and that what is usually called an object is only
abstract, i. e., partial.

Finally the pupil must be so directed in his work
of discovering the meaning of objects that he will feel that
each object possesses a central characteristic which gives
most insight into its nature.

2. Ratiocination.

The nature of this general process has been sufficiently
considered on pages 168-170. Attention is to be given here
to its first form.

a. Conception.

The beginning stage of ratiocination is the process
of conception. The idea resulting from the process is
termed the concept. Conception takes its origin as do all
other mental processes, in an initial condition, the image.
(See page 158.) The image is the preliminary adjustment

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 207

of the mind to the object. It may be said to be any partic-
ular mental state of the self prior to the discovery of the
function or meaning of that state. The image is the germ-
inal stage of the total mental act, the other stages of which
develop from the image according to the general laws of
the mind and the special culture of the individual. The
process of conception may be defined in a preliminary man-
ner, as the construction of an image which is an adjustment
to a particular object present or absent, and the in-
terpretation of this image as symbolizing, not the particular
object, but rather its creative activity. That is, the past
experience is so adjusted to the image as to invest it with
a general meaning. In other words, the image in concep-
tion signifies a relation of the object, and not merely the
particular object, and this relation is the essential nature
of the object.

It is held by some psychologists that one may have
a concept of a particular object, as of Lake Michigan.
This seems to be the position of Herbart and those who are
in harmony with his psychological doctrine. The view is
not limited to these, however. In Angell's Psychology,
pages 213-214, the same opinion is expressed: "We define
conception as a process of forming general ideas, and this
seems to be the most striking feature in the process. But if
all words are essentially concepts, we must have concepts of
individual objects as well as of classes; or at all events,
our method of thinking individual objects must be the same
as our method of thinking classes. This is, indeed, the fact.
We really have a concept of Jupiter, as well as of gods ; a
concept of earth, as well as a concept of planets ; a concept
of this particular book, as well as of books in general. We
have only to remember that conception is, after all, at bot-
tom simply a mental process of designating meanings, to
see that we can in this way indicate any meaning we wish ;

208 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

e. g., the meaning of a single object or a dozen; the mean-
ing of a mathematical relation, or of an historical relation ;
the meaning of a familiar object, or of an impossible one.
In each and every case we shall have a concept, and in most
cases a word, or a word-image, will be a very convenient de-
vice by means of which to think it.

We may easily connect the process by means of which
we gain concepts of single objects with the process by
means of which we obtain general ideas of classes of ob-
jects, if we observe that in both cases we have simply set
a boundary line about certain things; in the one case the
boundary contains one object, in the other it contains an
indefinite number. But in both cases our mental act has
been the distinguishing of one kind of meaning from all
other kinds of meaning. That form of the process in
which our idea refers to some common property, or proper-
ties, of a number of experiences has commonly been re-
garded as the true type of conception, because we appear
in such cases to have abstracted the common qualities of
a number of events, then generalized upon these, and so
obtained the concept, or general idea. But the process by
which we reach a concept of a single object involves abstrac-
tion just as truly, if not so extensively, as the previous
form of operation. To obtain a concept of London involves
setting the idea of London off against all other ideas; in-
volves abstracting it in a perfectly definite way. In a
sense, too, our concept of London is just as complete, just
as universal, as is the concept city. It applies to all of its
object, as truly as does the concept city, and it is in a
measure an accident, an irrelevant incident, that the total
object referred to is singular and not plural."

In objection to this doctrine two things may be said :
In the first place, close introspection would probably show
that a person while considering the seemingly particular

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 209

objects, e. g., Jupiter, the earth, London, etc., is in a sub-
conscious way, aware of each as one of a class.

In the second place, the process of abstraction, which
is said to be involved in the act of creating the concept of a
particular object, really resolves the particular object, as
London, into many objects, and hence the meaning ob-
served is a general meaning in that it is common to all
the aspects of the particular object. For example, one
may dwell in London for months, or years, and gradually
become acquainted with its streets, docks, tramways, banks,
cab lines, bridges, tenement houses, etc. In each of these
aspects of London he becomes aware of a common spirit
or meaning. This common meaning is the concept or sig-
nificance of the many objects or aspects of the one city.

A more common notion of conception is that the act
is one in which the person interprets his image of a single
object to denote a meaning common to it and to all others
of its class. In this case the person is aware that the par-
ticular object is merely one of a class. The image of a
particular object is related to the observer's past in such
a way as to symbolize the common attribute, or the group
of common attributes as passive, i. e., as merely there.
This aspect of conception is closely allied to the under-
standing. This more common notion is shown on page 208
of Angell's Psychology: "We may say, following the
common usage, that conception is that mental operation
by means of which we bring together the common points
of our various experiences and mentally consolidate them
into ideas; ideas which we are then able to use as symbols,
or representatives, of these manifold ideas."

This is probably the notion of the concept which is
best adapted to educational work in the grades and to a
large extent in the high school.

In the closing years of the high school and to a

210 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

limited degree somewhat earlier, the pupil is able to know,
or at least, to feel a more fundamental meaning. To this
more generic aspect of the meaning created in conception
attention will now be given.

The essential idea in conception is that of creation
or production. It is an act of constructing an image of
a particular object, as, for example, of a column, and
interpreting the image to symbolize the creative activity
which gives rise to this object and to all other objects of
the class. In Dewey's Psychology this doctrine is thus ex-
pressed on page 204-205: "A concept is an image having
the function of symbolizing some law or principle in ac-
cordance with which a thing or a number of things may
be constructed."

In the Public School Journal, Vol. 11, pages 128-130
the same writer in explaining the act of conception says :
"The concept arises from the percept through realizing
the full meaning i'm-plied, but not e^-plicit in the percept.
For example, take the percept of the triangle. So far as
this is a mere percept, it is regarded wholly as a particular
thing. Knowledge of it from this point of view would be
exhausted in getting its exact shape, size, length of sides,
degree of angles, stuff made of, color, etc. The mind
would nowhere be led beyond the consideration of the bare
thing present. If it were found that the sum of its three
Interior angles was equal to two right angles this would
be a trait of the particular angle, a bare item of informa-
tion of no more general value than that the length of one
side was one and two-seventeenths inches.

But suppose the mind advances beyond the particu-
lar triangle to the thought that there is a principle involv(
in the triangle; that the triangle, like everything else
the world, is made upon a certain principle which is em-
bodied in it; that this principle furnishes the plans an<

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 211

specifications according to which anything must exist in
order to be a triangle at all ; a principle which, if exceeded
or come short of, there is no triangle at all. What shall
we call this principle? Is it not evident that, since it is
this principle which constitutes the particular thing a
triangle, rather than a pumpkin or a stove pipe, it is this
principle we really mean by triangle and are attempting
to know? Well, it is this principle which forms the con-
cept, * triangle'. The concept of 'triangle,' in other words,
is the way in which three lines are put together; it is a
mode or form of construction."

In regard to this doctrine Dr. W. T. Harris, Com-
missioner of Education, offers the following on page 179
of the same volume of the Public School Journal :

"I was very glad to see Professor John Dewey's
article on the question, 'How does the concept arise from
the percept.' I think that his answer to the question is
substantially the right one, and I do not know of anything
more important in psychology than this view of the ques-
tion. The concept arises from the percept, not by omis-
sion of certain traits and features that are not common to
the special percepts — it does not arise from abstraction —
but it arises by a deeper insight into the constructive na-
ture of the process which creates or generates the particu-
lars which form the objects of perception. Sense-percep-
tion furnishes us objects which are dead results. The con-
ceptive faculty perceives the generatives causes, the for-
mulative processes and sees these, more or less adequately,
when it uses general names. The conception thus, as Mr.
Dewey tells us, perceives a deeper reality than sense-per-
ception. Nominalism had inverted the true order. It sup-
posed that the objects of sense-perception were the true
realities, and that concepts were mere classifications or
empty names, without a corresponding reality.

212 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

There are two grades of reality; the dead results
offered to our senses, and the living process or force, which
brings or causes these dead results or things. The process
is the deeper reality, because the cause contains in it all
the reality of the effect and also all of the reality which is
necessary to annul the effect. However, few people have
learned to think sufficiently to see that change involves,
first, the reality of the thing as it is; secondly, a deeper
reality which annuls the thing as it is and causes another
thing to exist in its place. ' '

The process in the act of conception may be illustrated
by considering it in relation to the column as a feature in
architecture. With the Greeks there were at first two
orders, the Doric and Ionic. From these there developed
the Corinthian order, and in later times, under Roman
influences, there arose the Tuscan and the Composite orders.
Each column consists of base, shaft and capital. The base
usually includes the plinth, torus and scotia. The shaft
is a cylinder varying in height from four to nine and one-
half diameters. It is fluted, and the flutings vary in num-
ber, from sixteen to twenty-four. It slightly increases
in diameter for about one-third of its height, and then de-
creases gradually to the capital. The capital consists of
one or more grooves running around the top of the shaft
at right angles to the flutings, the echinus, and the abacus.
There is great variety in regard to these different features,
but amid all variety the column maintains its central func-
tion of supporting and manifests a gradual transition from
the stylobat to the architrave.

Let it be assumed that a Doric column is present to
the observer. "What is the process in his act of conceiving
the column?

His mind adjusts itself to the particular column present

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 213

as it would in an act of sense-perception. That is, it con-
structs a definite image of the object.

The presence of this image stimulates the reaction of
similar past experiences. The presence of the present im-
age and of the re-acted experiences in consciousness, stimu-
lates the relating activity of the self. The result is a care-
ful comparison of the present image with the re-produced
experience.

The act of relating gradually becomes an inference.
The mind infers its present image to denote, not the present
particular column, not the set of common attributes be-
longing to columns, but something still more fundamental,
i. e., the creative activity which produced this and other
columns.

The process thus terminates in the idea of the prin-
ciple or energy which produces columns.

In perception the mind would have interpreted the
image to signify the particular column as present and as
different from the self.

In the act of conception, however, the image is in-
terpreted to denote a much more complex object. It de-
notes (1) the generic energy or column-producing activ-
ity as undifferentiated ; (2) the differentiation of this uni-
versal energy into its principal modes of activity, as the
activity revealing itself in the Doric order, that revealing
itself in the Ionic order, etc., and the differentiation of each
of these predominant modes of activity into particulars;
(3) The manifestation in each of these particulars of the
universal mode of producing columns, as well as the more
special mode, as, for example, the Doric principle.

It thus appears that the mind in its act of concep-
tion reads into its particular state or image a rich and im-
portant meaning. The image denotes a generic force, a
universal; the differentiation of this universal into sub-

214

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

ordinate modes of activity, and the further differentiation
of the subordinate modes into the particulars; and the
manifestation by each particular of both the subordinate
and the universal energies or modes of activity. The great
significance of the act of conception is that it results in an
implicit recognition of the unity of the universal and the
particular. It is important to have merely a feeling that
the particular is generic.

Conception is more fundamental than the act of
understanding in the following respects: It involves a
consciousness of the central characteristic as a creative
force. It is the change from the comprehension of an ob-
ject as passive to the notion of it as active, as having within
it a mode of activity which creates its parts and attributes.

It would be advantageous to work out at this stage
the neural basis of the act of conception.

Among the pedagogical principles implicit in the
process of conception the following may be noticed :

The teacher may lead the pupil to think of the
idea in the object itself as determining the various parts
and attributes of each particular object. For example,
the central idea or function of the column — supporting —
determines that there shall be a base, a shaft and a capital ;
that the plinth shall be a transition from the scotia to the
torus, etc.

The pupil should be led to see the unity of function
of the parts and attributes of each single object.

He should be encouraged to select the common
characteristics of the objects or subordinate classes and of
the total class.

He should also have awakened in him the desire
to clarify his indistinct concepts. This sometimes widens
the meaning, as when Jesus said to the Jews, "Ye shall
now the truth and the truth shall make you free." It

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 215

sometimes restricts the meaning, as when one thinks the
word teaching to denote all instruction, and afterwards
conceives teaching as the art which puts the learner more
into possession of himself,
b. Judgment.

The psychological activity of judging is a develop-
ment of conception. In conception the self is conscious of a
universal, a particular, and their unity. There is a distinct
consciousness of the universal as such, but the knowledge of
the identity of the universal and the particular is implicit.
Judgment is a higher mode of knowing than is conception
in that the consciousness of the relation of the general
to the particular becomes explicit. The judgment involves
discrimination as an element, because the universal or
general and the particular are held apart in consciousness,
but comparison and the act of identifying are also elements.
The explicit knowledge of the identity constitutes the de-
velopment out of conception.

The awareness of the relation of the general and the
particular is so distinct that it is called an assertion and
may afterwards be expressed in the copula of the sen-
tence. Since in the act of conception the mind is conscious
of the universal or the generic activity, the subordinate
modes of the generic activity, the particular, and of the
fact that the particular manifests the generic activity,
the act of judging is merely the explicit knowledge of
the same factors.

The characteristic fact of which the self becomes
conscious in its process of judging is that the particular
is generic. This is implicit in every judgment and may
be observed by noticing any expressed judgment, as, "This
Doric column is fluted." It is evident that the subject of
the sentence expresses a known object, the predicate a
known attribute, and the copula a known identity. The

216 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

fact that the particular is spoken of as a column and as
Doric, indicates that the mind is aware that the particular
manifests the generic, i. e., the universal activity which
produces columns, and that it also manifests that sub-
ordinate form of column-producing activity known as
Doric.

The word "fluted" also denotes the presence of
generic activity, since the attribute expressed by the word
is one of the potentialities of column-producing activity.

It appears from this analysis that the process in an
act of judgment is: Consciousness of a particular, of a
universal, and of their unity. Hence, the judgment seems
to represent more closely than does any other form of
knowing, the characteristic process or law of the mind.

The inference is that the subject of a sentence always
expresses a particular, at least in comparison with that
which the predicate denotes, the predicate a universal and
the copula a unity of the two.

Let this inference be examined by a consideration
of examples under the classes of sentences:

1. On the basis of the characteristic process of the
self, judgments are immediate, conditional, or definitive.

Examples of these forms are :

This flower is blue.

If the snow is melting it is warm.

A circle is an enclosed space, every point in the
circumference of which is equally distant from a point
within called the center.

2. On the basis of whether the attribute expressed
by the predicate adds to the meaning of the object ex-
pressed by the the subject of the sentence, judgments are
analytic and synthetic, as :

The robin is a bird.
This flower is blue.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 217

The shortest distance between two points is a
straight line.

The first of these is regarded as analytic, because
the object expressed by the word robin is thought to in-
clude the characteristics denoted by the word bird. The
second and third are considered to be synthetic on the
ground that the attribute expressed by the predicate adds
a new characteristic to the object expressed by the subject.
It is probable that all judgments termed synthetic are,
psychologically viewed, analytic.

3. On the basis of the necessity of the unity of the
particular and the universal, judgments have been classed
by Kant, Brougham, Sir William Hamilton and others as
contingent and apodeictical. An example of the contin-
gent form is "All existences are useful," while the apodeic-
tical form is shown in "Only one straight line can be
drawn between two points."

4. On the basis of purpose judgments are classed
into four kinds exemplified by the following :

Iron is a metal.

Is the book heavy?

Open the letter.

* ' How far that little candle throws its beams ! ' '

5. On the basis of the number of psychological as-
sertions of the unity of the general and the particular, and
the relation of these thoughts, judgments are classed as
simple, complex compound and compound-complex, as :

This flower is blue.

This flower which is in the vase is wild.
This flower and the vase are mine.
This flower which is in the vase and the vase
are mine.

6. On the basis of whether the relation asserted is

218 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

unity or difference, judgments are classed as positive, or
negative, as:

Anger is an emotion.
This fruit is not an apple.

It will be of advantage to examine, one by one,
each of these judgments given to illustrate the various
classes, in order to decide whether the mind is conscious of
a particular in that which is expressed by the subject, and
of a general or universal in that which is expressed by the
predicate; and also to determine whether the relation ex-
pressed is always, fundamentally, one of unity, even in
those cases in which the writer's intention is to denote
difference.

It is evident that the mind asserts a unity between
the particular and the general in the judgment, ''This
flower is blue. ' ' In the sentence, ' ' Iron is a metal, ' ' is this
also the case ? A single fragment of the iron of the world,
or the whole of the iron existing may be regarded as a
particular object. That which the self is conscious of as
denoted by the predicate seems on the surface to be a
space-occupying object. Reflection, however, indicates
that the mind is thinking of the characteristics of metal or
the attribute, being in the class, metals.

Each of these is a general, and hence wider than
the object expressed by the word * ' iron. ' '

The same may be shown in regard to the mind's
act of judging as expressed in the sentence, "Anger is an
emotion. ' '

The nature of the mental process in judging, may
be made more clear by examining the negative form in
order to determine whether the clearly expressed relation
of difference is really intended to signify the existing na-
ture of the object. If this is the case, all acts of judging
are, essentially, a consciousness of the unity of a particular

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 219

and a general, although the expression in the sentence may
manifest the mind's attention to difference, which mental
stage is also present. The example given above is, "This
fruit is not an apple."

The one who uses the sentence evidently intends to
express the thought that the fruit under consideration is
different from the apple, i. e., that it does not manifest
the characteristics of the class, apple. Does not the writer
thereby express, secondarily, the unity of the particular,
this fruit, with the attribute, being different from the
apple f

The foregoing examples may be examined further for
the purpose of considering whether the mental act of judg-
ing is an awareness of the unity of a particular object and
the attribute of that object, or whether it is a consciousness
of the relation of concepts.

In the judgment expressed by the sentence, ' ' This flower
is blue, ' ' does the writer of it intend to express his thought
that the idea of the object is in identity with the idea of
the attribute, or is it his purpose to express his notion that
there is a unity of the space-occupying object expressed by
the words, "this flower," and its actual attribute denoted
by the word, "blue?"

The judgment has been spoken of as "the assertion of a
relation between two mental elements." This assumes that
the judgment is a mental process of becoming aware of
one concept, then of another, and then of their relation.
This seems too mechanical, and it always implies three fac-
tors as underlying every sentence, e. g., "This wood is
hard." These factors are,

The actual wood, the actual attribute expressed by
the word, "hard" and the relation of unity.

The concept denoted by the word, "wood," and the

220 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

concept denoted by the word, "hard," and the concept of
their unity.

The consciousness of the unity of the two concepts.

Considered psychologically, the given sentence expresses
the known unity of the actual object and the actual at-
tribute of which the person is conscious. This attribute
was abstracted from the complex object and identified with
it at the same time, for the second and third stages in the
act of judging are practically contemporaneous.

What, psychologically, is the relation of the extent of
the object expressed by the subject of the sentence, and the
extent of the attribute expressed by the predicate?

The mere form of the sentence, sometimes indicates that
the attribute may be of wider extent, as, The pencil is hard.
In other cases the form suggests equality of extent, as, A
man's a man. Four equals four.

Considered as an element in the psychological process,
the attribute denoted by the predicate appears to be of
greater extent in all cases than the object expressed by the
subject. This seems evident in regard to the sentence,
"The pencil is hard." Reflection will show that such is
the case, also, in the other examples, "A man's a man,"
and "Four equals four." The word "man," in the sub-
ject means a particular man, i. e., a man with his ignorance,
poverty, ragged clothes, evil tendencies, etc., while the
word, "man," in the predicate denotes manhood, or the
potentiality of manhood. A similar explanation may be
given for * ' Four equals four. ' '

The fact that judgment is studied as a development from
conception, does not imply that this mode of psychological
activity is not manifested at all in the earlier stages of con-
sciousness. The mind is really judging implicitly in sensa-
tion, sense-perception, memory, etc. Even the mental ac-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 221

tivity of the child which is expressed in the single word,
"ball," is the implicit judgment, "This is a ball."

Why, then, is there an explicit treatment of a special
form of psychical action known as judgment? Judgment,
as that form of mental action which is the stage succeed-
ing conception, is a distinctive form. It is a judgment con-
structed after the mind has become somewhat conceptive
in its thinking and it involves, consciously, a concept in
the predicate. It thus seems that the psychological activity
of judging is a constant form, appearing at first implicitly,
and afterwards, explicitly.

While, however, the judgment may be viewed as a psy-
chological activity developing from conception, it is in a
crude form the mental state out of which the concept
arises. This is well shown by the following from Angell's
Psychology, page 228 : ' ' All of which seems to indicate with
no great uncertainty that the origin of such a concept as
badness is to be found in mental processes which are
in their nascent stages crude, vague, undeveloped judg-
ments, involving a rudimentary recognition of relations be-
tween certain more or less distinct portions of our experi-
ence. We get at these elements of experience mentally by
means of rudely distinguished ideas — in the case of our
illustration the idea of the act and the idea of its conse-
quences. Such concepts as this, i. e., badness, owe their
creation, then, to elaborations of already attained ideas in
a primitive form of judgment."

The judgment is more fundamental than conception be-
cause, as noted above, it involves a more extended conscious-
ness. In conception the awareness of the unity is implicit,
while in judgment it has become explicit. This implies a
more distinct discrimination of the general and the par-
ticular. The general and the particular also become more
distinct or differentiated in themselves in judgment.

222 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

The foregoing explanation of the psychological process
in judgment leads to an investigation of its neural basis.
This investigation may be assisted by a study of pages 241-
251 of AngelPs Psychology, and pages 170-177 of Thorn-
dike 's Elements of Psychology.

The following pedagogical principles are among those
which seem to be based on the nature of judging :

1. To foster accurate habits of judging in the pupil he
should be so directed in work that he will first concentrate
his attention on the object. This will isolate it from the
environment.

2. He should then be directed so that he will analyze
the object, thus abstracting the included attribute. As he
becomes aware of this attribute he identifies it with the
object.

3. He should then be led to analyze the attribute, that
is, the general. It is important to have the pupil become
as clear as possible concerning the nature of this attribute
which is in unity with the object, because it is by means
of this clearly understood attribute that the nature of the
object is to be learned.

4. His educational work should also lead him to com-
pare the extent of the attribute with that of the object. This
means that the pupil is to become distinctly conscious that
the attribute, for example, that expressed by the word,
"blue," belongs to many objects besides the one under con-
sideration, and that this object is thereby identified to a
degree with all the other objects in which this attribute is
found.

5. The pupil should also observe that this attribute is
narrower in a certain sense than the total object, because
it is only one of the many different aspects of the object.

6. The power of judgment can be strengthened still
further by a careful examination of sentences. For exam-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 223

pie, in studying the sentence, "The yellow pine hardens,"
ability in judging is increased by answering such questions
as, "What change in the extent of the object expressed by
the word, "pine," is made by considering the attributes
expressed by the words, "yellow" and "the," as belong-
ing to it ? What attribute is expressed by the word, * ' hard-
ens"? "Does this word also denote the unity of the ob-
ject and the attribute ? " " How can the predicate be given
so as to express, explicitly, both attribute and relation ' ' ?

7. The pupil's power of judgment may be increased in
a very effective way by having him express a thought and
then, after studying the expression, again express it more
precisely.

c. Reasoning.

The relation of the particular object to the universal
is explicitly known in judgment. The word, "judgment,"
is often used in popular speech to signify the act of rea-
soning, as in the sentence, "He is a person of excellent
judgment;" but strictly considered, the relation of which
one is aware in judging is not consciously mediated. What
is the advance in consciousness which mediates the rela-
tion? When, in judging, the self discovers the unity of
the particular with the general, it has become aware of a
truth concerning the particular object. In order that this
truth shall become mediated to the mind, the consciousness
of its dependence on another truth must arise. The rela-
tion or truth which is known in judgment is always an
element of a larger truth, or this second truth is the invari-
able accompaniment or sign of the relation known in the
act of judging. In the mere act of judgment, however, this
other relation, which is the ground or sign of the relation
asserted, is not noticed, at least not explicitly. If this other
truth is observed and held to be the basis or sign of the rela-

224 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

tion between the particular and the generic, of which the
person is conscious in judging, the relation is mediated.
This is the development in consciousness which reasoning
manifests considered as a stage of knowing which arises out
of judgment.

In judgment the idea that the particular is in unity with
or different from the generic is in a certain sense immediate.
The function of reasoning is to mediate this idea. It be-
comes mediated when the person becomes conscious of the
basis of the relation, when he knows why he deems the rela-
tion to be true. This thought is expressed on page 221 of
Dewey's Psychology, as follows: "Reasoning is that act
of mind which recognizes those relations of any content of
consciousness through which it has the meaning which it
has, or is what it is."

There are three forms of reasoning, although they are
merely elements or aspects of the one process.

Identification.

This is the inaccurate reasoning of the un-
trained thinker who notices but partially the truth which
is supposed to be the basis of the relation asserted. The
relation thought of in identification as the ground of the
unity between the particular and the generic is characteris-
tic of more relations than of the one asserted. It may or
may not be its basis in the given case. If one regards a
certain ground material to be coffee, because it is brown
in color, the act is identification.

The initial stage in the process is the creation of an image
of the object. Identification is merely a case of inaccurate
induction or deduction.

Induction.

The particular object in induction is the en-
tire class. The universal is an attribute which is judged

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 225

to belong to each object of the class and not merely to those
which have been examined.

What are the relations or truths which are regarded as
the ground of the identity of the particular and the gen-
eral of which one is conscious in the judgment involved in
the act Df induction? This may be shown in an example.
Assume that one becomes conscious in an act of induction
that "All adverbs express an attribute of an attribute."
The objects denoted by "All adverbs" constitute the par-
ticular object; the attribute denoted by "express an at-
tribute of an attribute" is the general; the relation is one
of unity.

What are the two other relations which are the ground
or sign of this relation? They are (1) the unity of adverb-
producing activity and sameness or uniformity, and (2) the
fact that the activity has produced this one adverb with the
characteristic expressed in the predicate.. Thus the per-
son believes that the process of producing the adverb is
always substantially the same and he observes that in this
case, it has made the adverb possess the characteristic of
"expressing an attribute of an attribute."

What are the special stages in the process of induction?
These have been previously considered on page 174, and
hence will be but briefly noticed here :

A particular object (an adverb) is imaged and known
in the process which has been spoken of as the language act.
This special process may occur with many such objects.

The result is that the mind abstracts an attribute, as, ex-
pressing an attribute of an attribute.

The objects are then thought of as being members of a
class. It may be that the name is known and that they
are understood to be adverbs.

The person who is studying them then becomes aware
of the other relations on which the asserted relation de-

226 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

pends; namely, that there is a uniformity in the process
of creating adverbs and that the process has given to all
those which have been examined the characteristic of ex-
pressing an attribute of an attribute.

The inference is then made that the relation expressed
in the judgment is true because of the truth asserted con-
cerning the process of producing the adverb.

This completes the process, and the relation expressed in
the judgment of the induction has become mediated.

The act begins in the creation of an image and the func-
tion of this image is to denote not especially the relation of
the particular and the general, but rather the relation of the
identity which is asserted to the other relations, which are
(1) the uniformity of the objectifying process and (2) the
special result of the creating activity in this given case.

Induction is sometimes spoken of as analytic. It isy
however, both synthetic and analytic. It begins with an in-
definite knowledge of an object as a whole, analyzes the ob-
ject in abstracting one of its attributes, identifies the object
with a class, identifies the class with an activity which is
uniform in its process and by these means synthesizes the
particular object and the isolated attribute. If the con-
sciousness of these two relations which are the basis of the
identity asserted in the judgment is implicit, induction may
be termed empirical or a posteriori reasoning. If the con-
sciousness is explicit, the induction may be termed a prion
reasoning.

The stages in an act of induction are the awareness of
the particular object as a whole in an act of sense percep-
tion, memory or imagination ; the abstraction of an attribute
found to be present; the identifying of the object with its
class; the identifying of sameness or uniformity with the
process which produces the class, and the identifying of
the isolated attribute with all objects of the class because

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 227

the special objects examined have received the attribute by
the action of the uniform creating process.

The process of induction is more fundamental than
judgment in that it involves not only a consciousness of
the direct relation between the particular, which is the
whole class, and the general, but also a knowledge of two
other relations, namely, the uniformity of the process and
its specific results in this given case. Along with this there
is also a knowledge of the fact that these two relations are
the ground of the direct relation.

The pedagogical implications in the inductive process
contain among others* the following:

1. The pupil should examine, as a whole, a sufficient
number of objects to emphasize the attribute which is to
be abstracted.

2. The attribute should then be clearly abstracted and
considered.

3. Attention should then be given to the process and
to the fact that it is substantially uniform. For example,
if the object is a grain of corn and the attribute to be ab-
stracted is that of possessing a pericarp, the process is corn-
producing activity and the pupil should be led to notice
that it seems to be practically uniform. The general uni-
formity of processes in nature and in the activities of man
should be illustrated in examples that may be easily under-
stood.

4. Emphasis should then be given to the special re-
sult in the given case of this process which is held to be
uniform, that is, the fact should be dwelt upon that this
process has manifested itself in this special case by pro-
ducing a given particular attribute and that it is consid-
ered to be uniform in its mode of action.

5. The fact that this abstracted attribute is a charac-

228 THK PROBLEM OF METHOD.

teristie of the class should then be stated as a law in simple
language.

6. The pupil should finally be led to test the law by
the examination of new cases.

The general result should be that the pupil would tend
to experience dissatisfaction if he were not given an op-
portunity to examine an adequate number of objects in
order to discover the law and afterwards to study a suffi-
cient number of new cases to test it.

Deduction.

This process is merely one aspect of reasoning, in-
duction being the other. The result of induction is
that the self has become aware of a general truth or
law of the class. This has enriched the mind's past ex-
perience, which is always employed in knowing new ob-
jects or new truths about old objects. The employment of
this general idea which the mind has discovered in its in-
ductive process, to answer an inquiry about a particular
object is deduction. The assumption is that the object is
not accessible and hence can not be examined, or that for
some reason it is not advisable to examine it directly to the
extent necessary to ascertain whether it possesses the in-
quired-for attribute. The particular object in deduction
is, therefore, some single existence and not a class.

The deductive process begins with the idea of this par-
ticular object as a whole.

This idea stimulates the mind to abstract or isolate some
attribute and to inquire whether the object is characterized
by this given attribute.

Since there is no direct way of determining whether the
object possesses the attribute, the mind proceeds to identify
the object with a class suggested by other attributes which
are obviously present. It is the assumption that the act

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 229

of identifying it with that particular class will give special
aid in knowing whether the inquired-for characteristic be-
longs to the particular object. It would not suffice to class
the particular object with any class whatever. The person
engaged in the deductive act knows his own purpose and he
will naturally be impelled to identify the object with a class,
the consideration of which will further the investigation.

The act of classing the object is succeeded by an
analysis of the class to which it has been referred in order
to have clearly in consciousness the essential characteristics
since this will give opportunity to notice whether the in-
quired-for attribute is among the characteristics of the
class.

The result of this analysis may be that the attribute
which was inquired for is not found among the essential
characteristics. In such a case, the mind considers that at-
tribute to be lacking in the particular object. This last act
is the conclusion, or the deductive judgment.

What are the related truths, the consciousness of which
has mediated the truth asserted in the deductive judgment ?
One is the fact that the inquired-for attribute is not an
essential characteristic of the class. The other is the iden-
tity of this object with the class.

In order to illustrate the process, let the following activi-
ties be assumed: The mind becomes conscious of a certain
grain. This is knowing it as a whole. The mind then, in-
fluenced by some external stimulus or idea, abstracts, i e.,
centers its attention on a certain attribute, as, having an en-
dopleura, and begins to think whether this grain possesses
such a coat. In order to answer this question the grain
must be identified with some class which its obvious attrib-
utes suggest, provided such identity will aid in the answer,
as will usually be the case if the object is thoughtfully class-
ed. In the given case, the fact that the grain is wedge

230 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

shaped and that it has an indentation on one side at the
scutellum are noticed and in consequence, the grain is
classed as a grain of corn. The mind then remembers the
general truth concerning the arrangement of coats in grains
of corn which it has acquired in previous inductions,
namely, that grains of corn possess two coats only, the
pericarp and a slight testa.

This leads to the judgment that the grain being consid-
dered has no endopleura. This ends the deductive process.
Its result concerns one object only.

In deduction the mind is synthetic in first becoming aware
of the object as undifferentiated ; it then becomes analytic
in abstracting the inquired-f or attribute ; the process is then
synthetic in the act of classing the object ; it then becomes
analytic in distinguishing the class into its essential charac-
teristics; the process is finally synthetic in the concluding
judgment, and in identifying the truth expressed in the
judgment, (1) with the idea that grains of corn possess no
endopleura, and (2) with the idea that this is a grain of
corn.

If the consciousness of the relation of the truth expressed
in the judgment to the other relations that are its basis is
implicit, deductive reasoning is empirical or a posteriori.
If the consciousness of this relation is explicit, the reason-
ing is a priori.

The two aspects of the one process of reasoning are, con-
sidered as a unit, a procedure from a somewhat fused par-
ticular through a general to a more clearly known particu-
lar. This is also the process in each aspect, although, if
superficially noticed, induction seems to be merely a pro-
cedure from the particular to the general and deduction a
procedure from the general to the particular.

The fact that the identity asserted in both the deductive

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

231

and the inductive judgment is grounded on other relations
gives rise to the syllogism so much emphasized in logic.

Deduction is, as a process, less vital and fundamental
than induction because it seems to be concerned with ac-
complished results rather than with producing activities,
and results are always less universal than the creative
energy which gives rise to them. Deduction is more funda-
mental than judgment in that it involves not merely a judg-
ment, but also a consciousness of the relation of the identity
asserted in the judgment to two other relations oi? identity ;
namely, the identity of the whole class with the essential
characteristic and the identity of the particular object with
the class.

It would be advantageous to give attention, at this stage,
to the neural basis of reasoning.

Among the pedagogical principles which may be traced
to deduction the following should be noticed:

1. The essential characteristics of any class of objects
should be clearly distinguished from those that are merely
common, and also from the unessential characteristics.

2. The learner should be led to notice carefully what
the inquiry concerning the object is. For example, in re-
gard to the rrrain which was observed he should emphasize
the fact that the inquiry concerned itself with the coats
of the grain, and particularly, as to whether it possessed the
coat called endopleura.

3. He must then be made aware that he must know two
things in order to answer the question; namely, the class
to which the object belongs, corn, and the characteristic of
the class in regard to coats, i. e,, that it has two coats only,
the pericarp and the testa.

4. He should be given exercises that will improve his
ability to select promptly and accurately the special at-
tribute or attributes that indicate the class of the object.

232 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

For example, in regard to the grain of corn, he should ob-
serve that two attributes, especially, are helpful in classing
it; namely, its wedge-like shape and the indentation upon
the side.

To render the various processes of knowing concrete, the
student should examine them as manifested in the acts of
the pupils during their recitations. For example, the les-
sons presented to the children in the different subjects, and
in the various grades, should be observed in order to note
the psychical processes put forth by the children in becom-
ing acquainted with the subject-matter presented.

The object of each act of knowing, i. e., that which is be-
ing known in each process should be clearly distinguished
in these attempts to interpret the lessons which are ob-
served.

A form for recording the results of the observation, which
may be suggestive, is given in Appendix II.

The Function of the Image.

On pages 158-159 the nature of the image is briefly ex-
plained, and in the first paragraph of the treatment of con-
ception, page 204, of Dewey's Psychology, a distinction is
made between the image or particular mental act and its
function. The author indicates that perception does not
differ from conception on account of the difference in the
particular image, but rather on account of a difference in
the function or meaning which the image has.

It may be of advantage to show this distinction through-
out the series of intellectual activities :

Sense-perception — An act in which the mind constructs a
particular image or state, and then interprets it to mean a
present particular object.

Memory — An act in which the mind re-creates a particu-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 233

lar mental state or image, and then interprets it to mean a
particular object once present but not present now.

Imagination — An act in which the mind creates a partic-
ular image, and then interprets it to mean a particular
object not present now and at no time present.

The Language Act — An act in which the mind constructs
a particular image appropriate to language and meaning,
or to meaning and language, and then interprets it to sig-
nify that the language symbolizes the meaning. Thus, the
image denotes that identity of language and meaning which
may be referred to as the relation of sign and thing signi-
fied.

Understanding.

Apprehending — The mind 's act of creating a particular
image and then interpreting it, indistinctly, to signify the
meaning of the object.

Distinguishing.

Abstracting — The mind's act of creating a particular
mental state or image, and then interpreting it to mean an
isolated element in the meaning of the object.

Discriminating — The mind's act of creating a particu-
lar mental state or image, and then interpreting the image
to mean the difference of the two or more objects being
contemplated, notwithstanding their unity in a single men-
tal activity.

Comparing — The mind's act of constructing a particu-
lar mental state or image, and then interpreting the image
to mean the unity of the two or more objects discriminated
in regard to some selected common attribute.

Classifying.

Generalizing — The mind's act of creating a particular
image, and then interpreting it to mean the unity of the ob-
ject with the class.

Analyzing the object into cause and effect — The

234 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

mind 's act of creating a particular state or image, and then
interpreting it to mean the object as distinguished into
cause and effect.

Discovering the structural idea of an object — The
mind's act of creating a particular mental state or image,
and then interpreting this image to mean the activity or
idea revealed in each aspect of the object.
Ratiocination.

Conceiving — The mind 's act of creating a particular
mental state or image, and then interpreting this image to
signify the universal creative activity underlying the given
object and all others of its class, the prominent subordinate
modes of the creative activity, and the fact that each ob-
ject manifests the producing activity, i. e., that each par-
ticular is generic.

Judging — The mind's act of creating a particular state
or image, and then interpreting the image to signify the re-
lation existing between an isolated attribute and the re-
mainder of the object from which the attribute has been
isolated.

Reasoning.

Identifying — The mind's act of creating a particu-
lar mental state or image, and then interpreting the image
to mean that the object being known belongs to a class on
the basis of an attribute pertaining not only to that class,
but to other classes.

Inductive reasoning — The mind's act of creating a
particular image, and then interpreting the image to signify
that the attribute isolated from an object, or a number of
objects, belongs to all the objects of the class, on account
of its relation to the fact that producing activity is uni-
form in its process and to the additional fact that it has
produced the object or objects examined as possessing the
isolated attribute.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 235

Deductive reasoning — The mind's act of creating a
particular image, and then interpreting the image to signify
that a certain general characteristic known to belong to the
class in which this object is found is in identity with the ob-
ject.*

THE LESSON.

A true lesson is an art product, because it has a predom-
inant activity (the Universal) and objective elements which
adequately exhibit, or stimulate and guide that activity (the
Particular).

The Universal. The predominant activity or universal
is in the pupil's mind. It is the essential process of his
mind in learning, that is, in rendering an object subjective
or known.
The mental process in the child is as follows :

1. He experiences a feeling of limit.

2. He then apprehends indistinctly the object as a whole.

3. As he does this he imagines himself as understand-
ing the object.

4. On account of the consciousness of the two diverse
selves (the real and the potential) he experiences feelings
of dissatisfaction and satisfaction.

5. He desires the potential or ideal self.

6. He gradually changes this desire into purpose.

1. In order to accomplish this purpose, he analyzes the
object which was indistinctly apprehended in the second
stage into its elements or distinctions.

8. He then reconsiders the various distinctions in order
to discover the predominant distinction. This is continued
until the characteristic element is known.

* The outline of psychologcial activities on pp. 177-23! has been directly suggested
by the the treatment of the intellectual process in '•''Psychology and the Psychosis^
by Denton J. Snider, Sigma Publishing Co., 2iO Pine Street, St. Louis.

236 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

9. He concludes by judging the other elements as to
their relation to this central element.

This mental process indicated as exhibiting itself in a
series of successive stages is the universal in a lesson because
it is the form of consciousness to be awakened in any case
of learning.

In school work it is seldom that the activities, 1 to 6, re-
quire direct stimulation. The process in a lesson usually
involves 2 slightly, 7 distinctly and with considerable con-
tinuity, and 8 and 9 in the form of organization or re-uni-
fying.

The process noted in 7 may require a series of lessons.
In that case each distinction becomes a whole in itself and
stimulates the universal process. The elements of the pro-
cess involved in 8 and 9 are more brief but more difficult.
They are not infrequently neglected, and as a rule, even
when stimulated, they are inaccurate and incomplete.

The Particular. A lesson, as a work of art, requires, how-
ever, not merely a universal, but also a particular aspect
which adequately exhibits or stimulates and guides the uni-
versal. This particular consists of,'

1. The subject-matter or the material acted upon. It is
the exercise-ground for the learning mind.

2. The acts of the teacher. These are to be considered
in a comprehensive sense as including bearing, assignment,
questions, explanation, encouragement, etc.

3. The acts of the pupil. These are replies, explana-
tions, questions, etc. They reveal to the teacher the condi-
tion of the universal process. They also increase the pupil 's
knowledge of the object.

4. Analogous environment. The environment referred
to as a stimulant to the universal process is analogous
both the subject-matter and the universal process. If, foi
example, the subject matter is the embarkation for Troy,

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 237

pictures of Greek ships, of the gods and goddesses, the walls
of Troy, etc., would constitute an analogous environment.

THE ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS IN A LESSON.

The subject-matter. This constitutes the first of the five
essential elements in an organized lesson. In its definite
form the subject-matter is a direct result of the principle or
process of self-determination in the form of knowing. The
subject-matter must be expressed so as to indicate both the
general and special aspects. The general indicates the ma-
terial and the special expresses the particular attribute to
be emphasized in the given lesson.

It may be of advantage to the student to indicate the sub-
ject-matter in the material expressed in the following as-
signment for a lesson based on an extract from The Hia-
watha Primer: (The class considering the extract belonged
to the third grade in a rural school.)

Draw one line under the word in every sentence used to
express what is being talked about: —

The cradle was safely bound.

Nokomis bound it with sinews of the reindeer.

Hiawatha rocked in his cradle.

He was in the wigwam of his grandmother.

It was dark and he was fretful.

Nokomis stilled his fretful wail.

She was singing of the forest.

She said the bear lived there.

She called him the Naked Bear.

Nokomis rocked the cradle of Hiawatha, saying,
' ' Hush ! the bear will hear thee !
Hush ! the Naked Bear will hear thee ! ' '

The Assignment. — The statement of the subject-matter
usually awakens the thought of one differentiation only. The
assignment leads to the thought of more than one distinc-

238 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

tion. Hence, in constructing the assignment, the teacher
is differentiating the subject-matter more fully than in the
process of discovering the general and the particular.

The difference between the subject-matter and the as-
signment may be shown by examples :

In history —

I. Subject-matter. The actual growth of the spiritual
Attitude of the American people as revealed by the events
•concerning slavery during Jackson 's administration.

II. Assignment. —

1. The condition of the public mind concerning
slavery just prior to Jackson 's adminstration.

2. The slavery problem during Jackson's adminis-
tration.

a. Cause.

In the north.

Physical.

Spiritual.
In the south.

Physical.

Spiritual.

b. Development.

Through Garrison.
What he did.
Results :

On the north.
Physical.
Spiritual.
On the south.
Physical.
Spiritual.

c. Results.

Immediate.
Remote.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 239

Montgomery, paragraphs, 262, 263, 264.
McMaster, paragraph 333.
In grammar —

I. Subject-matter. The basis of the classification of
verbs into transitive and intransitive.

II. Assignment. —

1. Tell the nature of the attribute expressed by each
verb in the following sentences.

2. Classify the verbs on the basis of the nature of
the attribute expressed.

Age shakes Athena's tower but spares gray Marathon.

Every plant demands good soil.

The beams of the moon struggled through the rain.

The setting sun threw a flush over nature.

Time passes quickly.

A comparison of the subject-matter and the assignment in
the two cases will show that the latter has as its function to
awaken attention to more distinctions than were suggested
by the statement of the subject-matter.

In addition the assignment is intended to indicate the
order of the distinctions, and, to a degree, their co-ordina-
tion and subordination.

It must not, however, be detailed enough to enable the
pupil to recite from it alone, as such recitation tends to ren-
der the lesson spiritless. There must be opportunity for the
animation arising from the teacher's active test, guidance
and co-operation.

The assignment is most closely a stimulus to the first
process in self-determination — the indistinct apprehension
of the subject-matter. Still, it fosters a transition into the
second stage. Viewed with reference to the universal process
in a lesson, it is a device to arouse the second stage and to
promote a transition into the seventh.

240 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

The purpose of the assignment is to awaken an indistinct
consciousness of

1. The main material of the lesson.

2. The salient distinctions.

3. The central attribute or characteristic with refer-
ence to which the subject-matter is to be examined.

4. The order of the distinctions.

In addition to this, its aim is to stimulate and direct the
discovery of further distinctions.

Thus, the assignment, while related most immediately to
the first process in self-determination, is a strong stimulus
to the second. It even promotes the third process, to a de-
gree.

It would be helpful to examine the two assignments given
above in order to note their relation to the process of self-
determination and to decide what changes, if any, can be
made in order that they may conform more closely to the
purpose of an assignment.

Attention should also be given to the relative advantages
of,

The written and the oral assignment.

The assignment given at the beginning and that given at
the close of the lesson.

The Steps. — The third element in the structure of a lesson
is spoken of, in a figurative sense, as the Steps. According
to the Herbartian pedagogy, the step is the external activity
of the teacher and manifests itself in five successive stages.
The stages are called the five Formal Steps.

The term step as here employed, however, signifies the
psychological activity of the learner. It denotes the second
stage in self-determination — the separation or special act of
the learner's consciousness. This step must, however,
since it is the process of the self, involve more or less dis-
tinctly all three stages of the essential movement of con-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 241

sciousness. It is important to remember that each step in
a lesson is not only a determination, but a ^/-determina-
tion, because this brings into prominence the fact that
some degree of independence or origination is present.
The more fully the process is an example of the learner's
initiative or independence the more clearly is it self-deter-
mination. Whatever of truth the pupil really grasps, he
must recreate or earn. It is for this reason that induction
seems to be more independent, more clearly ^/-determina-
tion than does deduction. Neither is, however, the com-
plete process of self-determination. Each is merely one
aspect of it. The scientific method involves, as essential
elements, both induction and deduction, but the first is the
more characteristic, because it manifests the creative or in-
dependent tendency the more strongly. It is a mark of ar-
tistic teaching, therefore, when considering the character-
istic step of a lesson to ask,

1. Is this characteristic step essentially inductive?

2. How may it be made strongly inductive?

The characteristic step of a lesson is the learner's ac-
tivity involved in the comprehension of the truth in the
subject-matter.

This characteristic step arises through subordinate steps
which constitute its stages. For example, in a given les-
son the characteristic step may be the act of conceiving and
the subordinate steps may be the feeling of limit, sense-
perceiving, etc.

In the most comprehensive view the characteristic step of
a lesson can differentiate into three subordinate steps only,.

1. The indistinct apprehension of the object as a whole.

2. The discovery of all of the distinctions in the object
appropriate to the pupil's stage of development, regarding
each distinction as independent or isolated.

3. The selection of the central distinction, and the or-

242 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

ganization of the object by becoming aware of the relation
of the other distinctions to the main distinction or attribute.

In a more analytic view the steps are the stages in the
full process of a lesson indicated on page 235.

In a still more special sense a step in a lesson is any one
of the activities of the self in rendering subjective the ob-
ject to be learned. These, in so far as the acts of knowing
are concerned, are indicated on pages 177-231. Each step
consists of process and meaning or of form and content. To
render the characteristic step or any subordinate step defi-
nite both form and content should be given.

The Purpose. — The purpose in life may be said to be the
establishment of the habit of freely choosing freedom itself
for the self and others equally. To possess this habit is to
have freedom both in form and in content. The freedom
which is to be chosen is,

1. A mode of knowing which promotes the independ-
ence, the development of all selves.

2. Satisfaction in a condition indicating a development
of all.

3. A tendency toward rational choice in every one.

4. A skillful, disciplined body for every one.

The purpose in the teacher is the act of choosing a certain
condition of freedom in the pupil. This condition of free-
dom in the pupil is to be brought about by his own activity
in mastering the subject-matter of the lesson. This act of
rendering subjective the subject matter of the lesson is the
second stage of self-determination as explained on page 154,
and the tendency or effect produced by the activity upon
the subject-matter is the third stage.

The subject-matter of any single lesson is always a frag-
ment of the immediate larger whole.

This is the basis for the distinction of the purpose, in so

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 243

far as it relates to knowledge, into the special purpose and
the general purpose.

The special purpose is to stimulate in the pupil the exist-
ence of the adequate idea of the subject-matter as a habit.
In any given case this idea must be stated definitely by in-
dicating both form and content.

The general purpose is to awaken in the learner the ade-
quate idea of the immediate larger whole. This is partly
accomplished in any one lesson. Its complete accomplish-
ment requires the given lesson and one or more additional
lessons.

The statement of the special and general purpose must
not merely echo that of the subject-matter, but the thought
of the subject-matter should be rendered somewhat more
definite by that indicated in the statement of the purpose.

Since the special subject-matter of a lesson is a fragment
of many larger immediate subjects, the statement of the gen-
eral purpose by the teacher to himself is necessary to insure
the emphasis of the relations unifying the special subject-
matter with the selected larger whole.

The freedom which was said to be the aim of life is to be
attained,

1. "By elevating the individual to his species." He is
to reproduce in himself the achievements of man.

2. "By making habitual in the individual activities that
reinforce rational institutions and which, in consequence,
the rational institutions can afford to reinforce."

These two statements are merely different forms express-
ing the same meaning.

In interpreting a lesson as to the effect purposed the
teacher or observer should,

1. Indicate, in definite mental terms the special effect
purposed.

244 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

2. Identify it with freedom, according to either of the
above statements.

3. Explain briefly the identity.

Devices. — A device is not merely some object, as a map, or
a box of geometrical forms. It is not merely a picture, a
drawing or an outline. It is essentially an outward act of
the teacher, as a question, a direction, an explanation, a
commendation, the use of a map, the production and use of
a drawing. A device may include a question or direction
of the teacher, a reply or work at blackboard by the pupil
and the discussion of the reply or of the work.

1. The central requirement of a device is that its effect
shall be to concentrate the pupil's attention on the object be-
ing studied and its relations, rather than upon his language,
his manner, the degree of success he is attaining, the effect
upon his mental development, or the impression he is mak-
ing. The artistic device is one that leads the pupil to be-
come objective, to lose himself in the object and its rela-
tions.

The teacher is assumed to know that knowledge is not
the end, but that inspiration, insight, character, constitute
the end. Still, this is not to be the attitude of the pupil in
the recitation. The device should aid him in becoming en-
grossed in the object being investigated.

This characteristic of device is based on the idea that all
true development in the pupil is due to the concentration of
his interests in something which seems to be other than
himself. The doctrine implied in this function of devices is
self -estrangement. (Philosophy of Education, by Rosen-
kranz, pp. 27-28.) Self -estrangement is the second stage
in the law of the self. The aim is to enrich the mind of the
learner by having the strange object become familiar. Thus
the central characteristic of all devices rests upon the total
process of consciousness in that it assumes a potential or

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 245

unspecialized condition in so far as the strange element in
the object is concerned, stimulates directly a concentration
upon the alien feature of the object and thus contributes to
the enrichment of the self which returns from the estrange-
ment.

The nature of the central characteristic of devices makes
it evident that they should harmonize with the following
thought :

a. That the ideal in education is the total experience
of humanity and not merely knowledge. It is not enough
for the pupil to gain a knowledge of the main facts con-
cerning the Emancipation Proclamation. The aim must be
to have him experience, to a degree, in his particular life,
the total process of the race in objectifying itself in that
event.

b. That the change or determination to be brought
about in the child is to be se£/-determination. His attitude
must not be that of passivity. His initiative and choice, his
modes of expression and explanation, are to be given en-
couragement as fully as the development contemplated in
the lesson will permit. The tendencies to inquire and to
test are to be fostered. For example, he is to be given free-
dom from the text by a series of devices that will develop
the power to wrest meaning from the text. Otherwise he
will become passive. The ability to grapple with a difficult
sentence or paragraph and to interpret it by an intelligent
process of study is an important form of se^-determination.

c. That the pupil's process or method in his de-
velopment is at once negative and positive. It is the renun-
ciation of inaccuracy and caprice in any given instance and
the active reproduction of the positive experience of the race
in regard to the same instance. For example, the pupil may
have the habit indicated in the following: ''If any one
wishes to read some one of a number of books and they can

246 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

find no time to read them they will become discouraged."
To establish the pupil's education in regard to the appro-
priate language in this case requires both a negative and a
positive process, and the latter is in harmony with the cul-
ture of the race. This negative and positive process is es-
sential in all aspects of education. To be educated by a
study of the Tories of the Revolution, their negative and
their positive traits must be understood. To obtain a true
development from an investigation of a virtue, as truth-
telling, of a church service, as a prayer-meeting, of the his-
tory of a political party, the process must be one which
brings into consciousness the negative and the positive.

d. That the teacher must identify himself as fully
as possible with the pupil in his struggle to know the object
being investigated. The pupil has his dim vision, his par-
tial insight, his separative attitude, his distrust of his own
powers, his dependence upon words.

The teacher must reproduce these mental conditions in his
own consciousness as they are manifested from time to time
in the lesson. Then he must project them and identify them
with the pupil, thus realizing strongly within himself that
they are actual conditions of the pupil's mind. He must
finally vividly think these conditions as possible in himself
under similar conditions. Thus he has identified himself
with the pupil, and is in sympathy with him. This enables
the teacher to appreciate the pupil's failures and successes,
and to appear as a co-seeker of truth. Teacher and pupil
become, in a certain sense, comrades in a quest for the un-
known.

e. That the central or organizing principle of the
branch of study to which the subject-matter belongs, and
the process of consciousness suggest the order and the con-
centration of devices. For example, in the study of the
Emancipation Proclamation there should be a concentration

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

247

of devices to develop a knowledge of the outward event, of
the mental attitude giving rise to it, and of the mental at-
titude succeeding it. In the study of each of these three
aspects there should be a concentration of devices to awaken
an indistinct knowledge of the aspect as a whole; a
clear knowledge of the distinctions within it, and of its
systematic unification upon its characteristic or dominant
attribute.

248 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

CHAPTER VIII.

PRINCIPLES OF TEACHING.

From time to time reference has been made to various
pedagogical principles, particularly in connection with the
discussion of The Analysis of Knowing. At this stage,
however, it is deemed advisable to turn attention to various
pedagogical principles based, not merely upon the nature
of psychological activities, but also upon the aim of life
and the nature of the branches of study. It will, no doubt,
be admitted that the most comprehensive central principle
of education is expressed in the statement that the mind is
self -determining. This means that the mind, in the be-
ginning of its existence, is without definite habits and ten-
dencies and that gradually, as it adjusts itself to the en-
vironment, it gives to itself certain characteristics of knowl-
edge, certain modes of emotional response and certain forms
of choice.

To say that the mind determines itself is to assert that
it gives to itself particular tendencies of action. At first
the mind is potential, that is, capable of acting in any one
of many forms, but by responding in a particular way to
a particular stimulus, it determines itself in that mode of
action. It gives to itself the characteristic of being more
inclined to that kind of activity than to any other. Self-
determination of the mind is, therefore, at first, poten-
tial, a general capacity for many kinds of action.

In the second place, this general capacity becomes speci-
fic. By this it is meant that the mind constructs in itself
certain particular forms of activity. These become, as it
were, distinct, habitual processes. Among these determina-
tions are the processes of sense perception, memory, imag-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 249

ination, conception, etc. The condition of existing in any
one of these kinds of activity is the second aspect of self-
determination.

Common observation, however, shows that if the mind
producess in itself any special form of activity there results
a tendency toward that form. Thus as life proceeds the
mind acquires definite tendencies toward action. These
constitute the final aspect of determination.

Determination in the mind is called se£/-determination
because the energy of the mind is a factor in deciding its
own condition. Environment does not determine every-
thing. It does not cause the different mental changes. En-
vironment is merely a stimulus. Upon the existence of this
stimulus, the mind may, by its own energy, create in itself
a corresponding particular condition.

The general nature of the principle of self-determination
has been referred to on pages 154-155. Growing out of
this central principle of education there are various subor-
dinate principles. The leading ones among these are briefly
cited in the f ollowing :

1. Without attention there can be no adequate education.
What is the nature of attention? It is a mode of psychical
activity belonging to all conscious states. Every conscious
state consists of elements, because the objects of which a
person is conscious are very complex. Even so small a
thing as a child's ball is complex, for it possesses form, size,
color, smoothness or roughness, hardness or softness, dis-
tance, direction, etc. Any single mental state denoting this
single object is complex in that it possesses various ele-
ments denoting the various parts or attributes of the ob-
ject.

Is the whole act of consciousness attention? By atten-
tion is meant the most active element of a conscious state.
In different terms, attention is the focus of consciousness.

250 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

In every mental state the mind is attending with definite
energy to some one aspect of the object or to some one
object among many, while it is in a faint way noticing the
existence of other attributes or other objects.

This most active element in a consciousness, namely, at-
tention, is at first synthetic because it seems to denote the
object as a whole. But it soon becomes analytic, since the
attention is centered now upon the color, now upon the size,
now upon the distance, etc.

There is also an organized synthetic attention, in that
the mind having discriminated for example, two characteris-
tics of the object gives attention to their unity, that is, to
the oneness of the function they have in the nature of the
object.

For example, a person in examining a water pitcher may
attend at one time to its handle, at another time to its lip,
at another time to the shape of the bottom which enables
it to stand firmly upon a flat surface. During all this
process the attention has been analytic. It now becomes
synthetic, however, because the mind gives strict attention
to the fact that all three of these characteristics are in har-
mony, when considered with reference to the use of the
pitcher. Since the education of the child rests upon atten-
tion and his education consists in the acquirement of the
power of attention, the teacher should understand the cen-
tral nature of attention, the synthetic and analytic aspects
in the process and guide the work of the recitation in har-
mony with it.

2. In the process of educating a child concerning any
object or event, the whole of the object or event should,
in so far as practicable, be placed before him m the begin-
ning. This harmonizes with the first stage of self-deter-
mination because this device stimulates in the child an in-
distinct notion of the object as a whole. This is necessary

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 251

in order to prepare him to understand the relation of the
various parts and attributes that may be discovered after-
wards. In obedience to this principle, the child should ex-
amine all of a poem or all of a division of it, all of a para-
graph, or all of a problem before turning special attention
to any given part or characteristic.

3. The original feeling which an object stimulates in
the person who is investigating should be changed gradually
into dear knowledge. When one begins to examine any ob-
ject, as a poem, the voyage of the Mayflower, a part of
speech, etc., he has an indistinct feeling of the meaning
which it exhibits. The object should be analyzed and
specially studied in all of its various aspects so as to change
this instictive feeling into definite knowledge. All instincts,
as instincts of behavior, impulses toward charitable action
or impulses toward industry should be changed through
work and study into definite ideas. If a parent, a teacher,
or a person engaged in any of the vocations of life, acts
mainly upon instinct, even if the instinct is a true one, his
action is unreliable. Only when feeling and instinct are
grounded in a clear knowledge of the nature of the act
which manifests them is the result reliable.*

The following show, in poetic form the transition from
indistinct feeling or impulse to clear knowledge.

"May that which works and lives, the ever-growinp1,
In bonds "f love enfold you, mercy-fraught,
And Seeming's changeful form, around ye flowing,
Do ye arrest in ever-during thought."

Goethe's Faust, The Prologue in Heaven.

"Oxer his keys the musing organist
Beginning doubtfully and far away,
First lets his fingers wander as they list,
And builds a bridge from Dreamland for his lay :
Then, as the touch of his loved instrument
Gives hope and fervor, nearer draws his theme,
First guessed by faint auroral flushes sent
Along the wavering vista of his dream."

I/j well's The Vision of Sir Launfal : Prelude I.

See "A Study of Child Nature," by Elizabeth Harrison.

252 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

4. All educational work should be regarded as unsatis-
factory if the distinctions made by the pupil concerning the
subject being studied lack clearness. Nothing aids more
fully the true comprehension of an object than the distinct
idea of its various parts and attributes which can be made
by abstracting each and making a careful study of it as it
seems to exist in itself. In obtaining this distinctive knowl-
edge the attributes or parts which are being studied should
be closely compared and even more closely contrasted with
the other attributes and parts. It should be a point of in-
terest to both teacher and pupil to discover two things
that are so closely related as to require special attention to
discriminate them. Sometimes, for examples, it is said that
a certain law is ' l null and void. ' ' Just what is the distinc-
tion between the objects expressed by these two words ?

5. In the discovery of distinctions the child should have
an orderly process. It is meant by this that the object be-
ing presented should be distinguished, first, into its pre-
dominant divisions, and then these predominant divisions
should be sub-divided. These smaller divisions should be
then further subdivided. For example, in studying the
industries of the New England states it would be inartistic
work to begin by discovering all of the characteristics con-
cerning the people as engaging in the business of shipping.
The distinctions should be made first rather in order to
show that they were engaged in shipping, in manufactur-
ing, in mining, in agricultural work, etc. This principle
it is evident relates to the second stage in the process of
self-determination.

6. The distinctions that are to be considered in connec-
tion with any object or subject should, of course, be
adapted to the pupil's stage of development. Many rela-
tions would be shown concerning the voyage of the May-
flower in the eighth year grade that would not be consid-
ered in the fifth year grade, provided this event should be

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 253

one of the subjects taught in the fifth year grade. In the
later grades when studying United States History, atten-
tion would be given to the characteristics in the govern-
ment which adapt it to a people desiring self-govern-
ment. Probably this relation would not be considered in
the earlier grades. The more simple relations would there
receive attention in that the work would be centered upon
the less complex events in the life and government of the
people.

7. The concluding work in dealing with any subject, as,
for example, the American Revolution, is to lead the pupil
to decide upon the central characteristic and then to think
out the degree to which all the other characteristics manifest
this central characteristic. In studying the American
Revolution he would become aware of many distinctions.
Some one of these is the predominant characteristic of the
whole event. This predominant characteristic, after be-
discovered, should be shown to be predominant by having
it appear that each of the other characteristics is this
predominant characteristic in a special form. This process
of thinking is a manifestation in the pupil of the third
stage in self-determination.

8. When any object or event being studied has been
learned or rendered subjective, in the form of idea, feeling
or volitional tendency, it should then be made objective in
order to accomplish two things. The first is that of mak-
ing the process of knowledge complete. The process in
knowledge is never entirely complete until the child has
expressed in some way the psychical condition which has
been produced. The second is that of enabling the teacher
to test the accuracy of the pupil's thought concerning
the object which has been studied.

This principle is intended to emphasize the importance
of the motor factor in education. It is therefore the basis

254 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

of manual training, drawing, written examinations, oral
recitations, etc.

The total activity is as follows: The child goes through
the process of gaining a knowledge of the object which has
heretofore been alien or objective to him. That is, he be-
comes aware of it, feels concerning it, and has volitional
tendencies in regard to it. He must then study out some
mode of exhibiting the thought, feeling, etc., to others. This
psychical state may be manifested in drawings, water col-
ors, oral expression, written examinations, etc.

Complete education includes contemplation, or thinking
out the nature of a thing, and objectification or revealing
in actions, words, writing, etc., the thought that has been
gained in the study of the thing. Dante reveals these two
sides of education, the merely contemplative and that which
includes contemplation and manifestation by speaking of
Leah and Rachel:

"Know ye, whoever of my name would ask,
That I am I^eah: for my brow to weave
A garland, these fair hands unwearied ply.
To please me at the crystal mirror, here
Here I deck me. But my sister Rachel, she
Before her glass abides the livelong day,
Her radiant eyes beholding, charm'd no less,
Than I with this delightful task, Her joy
In contemplation, as in labor mine."

Dante's Purgatory, Canto XXVIII, lines 101-109.

If, after explaining a given thought in the class, the
teacher should ask, "Do you understand?" and the pupil
should reply by saying that he does, this principle requires
the teacher to say further, "Show what you see," or, "You
may explain." It is not at all unusual to have certain de-
fects in the thinking of the pupil revealed by this attempt
to explain it. Even if this does not result, the thought will
be made more prominent and more exact by the expression.

The reply in a complete sentence is not merely for the
purpose of securing practice in language. The complete

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 255

sentence reveals the relation of the attribute to the object,
and in consequence, one important function of the full
statement is to indicate whether the pupil has the true view
of the relation. For example, the teacher having explained
a certain thought in physiology may ask, "What does this
imply?" and the pupil may answer, "It implies nervous
action." "What nervous action?" the teacher may con-
tinue. The reply to this may be, "The action of the
neurone." A further question may be, "The action of
what neurone?" To this the pupil may answer, "The
neurone in the spinal column. ' ' This will reveal an error
in the- thought of the pupil, because the true answer in the
supposed case would be, "It will denote the action of the
neurone in the cerebral cortex. ' '

9. When the pupil is about to enter upon the considera-
tion of some new subject, as, for example, the minerals of
Indiana, or the birds of his own county, he should free his
mind from existing feelings, purposes or ideas that are not
of a nature to promote a clear knowledge of the new sub-
ject which is to be investigated. This is in order to render
effective the specific act of knowing the new truth. It also
promotes the appropriate feelings and tendencies toward
choice which belong to the new knowledge. This relates to
the second aspect of self-determination, namely, that of
establishing in the self a definite, effective psychological
condition, in harmony with the object being studied.

10. There should be a gradual increase in attention to
the relations of objects as the child progresses from grade
to grade. This is especially true in regard to the relation
indicated by the word "why." It seems an incorrect edu-
cational doctrine to assume that the child should for many
years consider objects only, disregarding their relations. In
the beginning grades simple relations should be considered,
in the immediately succeeding grades, relations that are

256 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

somewhat more difficult ; in the still higher grades relations
that are still more difficult. It was Agassiz who said that
objects considered apart from their relations are stupid
things. The tendency to consider objects as entirely sepa-
rate things is already too strong when the pupil enters
school. Little by little he should be led to see tne relations
within the object itself and the relations of the object as a
whole to other things. The important thing is to grade the
process of discovering relations, but all stages in school
work should deal with relations of some grade of difficulty.

11. Sense-perception furnishes the minimum of truth.
This is not usually held to be the case. Many people think
that a direct examination of objects through sense-percep-
tion gives the deepest and most prominent truth concerning
the object. There should, of course, be no effort to minimize
the great importance of this direct examination. It should
be seen, however, in its true relation. It is to furnish ma-
terials merely for the discovery of deeper truths which are
to be learned, not through sense-perception itself, but
through higher forms of mental activity. Memory, even,
gives a deeper truth than sense-perception, because it makes
the individual acquainted with his life as it bears upon both
the present and the past. Sense-perception does not make
the pupil acquainted with the essential realities. This prin-
ciple concerning sense-perception hints to the teacher the
graded series of activities in knowing. Memory does not
reveal a truth as fundamental as that given by imagina-
tion. Imagination does not make the person acquainted
with a truth as fundamental as that given in conception,
etc. This is the basis of the distribution of time and em-
phasis.

12. The process in the cultivation of sense-perception
involves, in the first place, the examination of the object
as a whole. This gives the basis for the discovery of the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 257

various distinctions in the object. One by one each of the
attributes in the object is to be given distinct attention and
thus clearly known as a thing in itself. Finally each of the
attributes and parts distinguished is to be examined in its
relation to the central meaning in the object.

This makes it evident that the power of the child ade-
quately to sense-perceive an object depends upon the clear-
ness of the ideas he already has. The greatest aid in en-
abling the child to perceive with rapidity and accuracy the
object he is to examine, is to aid him in rendering his idea
of the present object explicit and accurate, by the observ-
ance of this process.

13. As noted above, memory gives rise to a Knowledge
which is more substantial than that of sense-perception.
This is because an act of memory requires more self-activity
on the part of the mind and it requires greater attention
to the past and the present in their relations. Sense-per-
ception involves attention to the past, but the attention is
rather sub-conscious. In memory the attention to the past
in relation to the present is explicit and definite. This fact
is the basis of higher estimation of memory and of the in-
centive to make memory systematic. (See p. 186.)

14. The sense in which the imagination gives a greater
truth than memory, as previously noted, is as follows: In
memory the object is regarded as merely particular and
there is no hint of the general. Imagination, however, is a
somewhat distinct movement toward the idea of the general.
If the mind creates a state denoting a change in the charac-
teristics of the object and at the same time regards the ob-
ject as belonging under the same v^lass that it did before it
was changed, the inevitable result is to lead the mind to
contemplate two objects in somewhat different form which
receive the same name. That necessarily suggests the gen-
eral.

258 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

Imagination also indicates more fully the self -activity of
the mind, since it reveals greater freedom over the external
stimulus. In memory the mind is strictly obedient to the
stimulus which was present in the former act. In imagina-
tion the self feels free to produce in itself an image denot-
ing a modification of the stimulus in obedience to its own
interests. This relation of memory to imagination should
be carefully considered by the teacher and recognized in
the emphasis given to the cultivation of the latter.

15. The tendency to idealize should be cultivated as an
essential stage in the process of thought. Idealization is
regarded by many persons as a mere byplay in life. It is
held to belong to the dreamer, but not to the worker. The
teacher should know that all thinking is rendered impos-
sible if the ability to idealize clearly is lacking. Idealizing
is the process of imagining a present condition in a modified
form. It is necessary, therefore, as a basis for discrimina-
tion. It is also necessary as a basis for feelings of satis-
faction and dissatisfaction which lead from desire to choice.
The chosen desired condition, when analyzed by the intellect
stimulates activities adapted to make the idealized condi-
tion real.

The clear thinker is always a person whose power of
idealization is strong. The teacher should therefore feel
entirely free to lead the child into modes of study that will
cultivate well grounded processes of idealization. It would
be helpful while considering this subject to examine ' ' Scien-
tific Uses of Imagination, " in ' ' Fragments of Science, ' ' by
John Tyndall. A valuable contribution upon the same
subject is "The Imagination," in "Poetry, Comedy and
Duty," by C. C. Everett.

16. The language activity, as explained on pages 195-
199, is the process of producing and also of Interpreting
language. The second phase of the activity is termed in-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 259

terpretation. The interpretative aspect of the language act
is the first process in a reading lesson. The language ac-
tivity as producing, must of necessity have been at work,
however, in order to bring into existence the selection which
is to be interpreted. The true reading of a selection, there-
fore, involves both the process of interpreting it, and, in
a secondary way, the process of creating it. In fact, to
produce in the mind the knowledge of any object is, in a
certain sense, to re-create it.

It is an advantage to the teacher to know that the full
knowledge of a selection in reading involves (1) the process
of becoming aware of the language, the embodiment, the
thought and the purpose and (2) the process of beginning
with the purpose, which is the initial stage in the author 's
mind, and noting how the purpose leads to the selection of
a definite thought, and then, in succession, how the thought
selects and limits the embodiment and the language.

It therefore follows that the final view of a selection which
has been studied in the reading class is that of noting the
adaptation of the language and the embodiment to the
thought and purpose. This is the artistic aspect of reading
work. It can be regarded but slightly in the lower grades,
but as the child advances in his education, this aspect
should become progressively more prominent.

17. In studying a word or any other form of language,
or in considering an attribute of an object, the important
thing is to comprehend the reason for it. The most advan-
tageous mode of discovering the reason for an existing thing
or attribute is to make the pupil conscious of the effects of
its absence. Let it be assumed that the teacher wishes to
lead the pupils to understand the reason for the presence
of the adjective in the language. This can be approached
by work which will make the child conscious of the limita-
tion or difficulty that would arise if no adjectives what-

260 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

ever were existing. He might, for example, be led to make
the attempt to express his thought concerning even the
most simple thing, under the regulation that no adjective
was to be used. This would impress him with the important
place it occupies in the language, and would equip him for
a careful study of the reasons for its existence. In like
manner, the intelligence which underlies any part of an
object or any attribute of an object can be best shown by
awakening the idea of the results which would necessarily
accompany the absence of it.

18. It was said, on page 200, that the mind, when in
the stage of the understanding, considers the various dis-
tinctions or traits of objects to be externally imposed. In
order, therefore, to cultivate self-direction in the pupil,
the teacher should endeavor to assist him to rise gradually
out of the attitude peculiar to the understanding. This
means that the child should gradually begin to think of the
activity in any plant, animal, or person as largely deter-
mined by the nature of that plant, animal, or person.

Environment has, of course, a certain influence. It is
to be regarded, however, as a stimulus. For example, the
evils coming upon one must not be thought to be determined
by the star under which he was born. This notion is ad-
mirably expressed in Act I, Scene II. of King Lear, by Ed-
mund. This expression is:

This is the excellent foppery of the world, that when we are sick
in fortune — often the surfeit of our own behavior — we make guilty of
our disasters the sun, the moon and stars : as if we were villains by
necessity, fools by heavenly compulsion ; knaves, thieves and treach-
ers, by spherical predominance ; drunkards, liars and adulterers, by
an enforced obedience to planetary influence ; and all that we are evil
in, by a divine thrusting on."

The same idea is promulgated in Act I., Scene II., of
Julius Caesar. Cassius, in speaking to Brutus, says :

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 261

" Men at some time are masters of their fates :
The fault, dear Brutus, is not in the stars,
But in ourselves, that we are underlings."

It will be an aid to the pupil to feel that excellent results
of every kind, as well as evil effects, arise largely from the
acts of the person affected; that each person, in a sense,
works out his own salvation.

19. On page 201, it has been shown that the activity of
understanding begins with the indistinct process known as
apprehension. Rising through intervening stages of ab-
stracting, discriminating, comparing, generalizing, and dis-
covering the relation of cause and effect, the self finally be-
comes aware of the structural characteristic of the object.
This is an important stage in the process of education. It
adds greatly to the power of a person to be able to think
of an object or event in relation to its structural charac-
teristic. The poem called "The Child Musician," Har-
per's Fourth Reader, page 228, has as its structural idea
the sense of monotony.

" He had played for his lordship's levee,
He had played for her ladyship's whim,
Till the poor little head was heavy
And the poor little brain would swim," etc.

In the poem, "To a Waterfowl," the structural notion
is that of faith. In "Evangeline" the structural charac-
teristic or formative idea, is woman's devotion. In the
Constitution of the United States, the structural conception
is the idea of "A government of the people, by the people,
for the people." The artistic teacher has an instinctive
sense that each object, whether belonging to inanimate
nature, animate nature, or to human beings and their prod-
ucts has a structural characteristic which has given to it
its various aspects. This instinct made somewhat conscious
would be a valuable guide in all the details of school work,
whether relating to instruction or discipline.

262 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

20. In all instruction leading to the formation of the
concept, the teacher should remember that while the process
of conception is, in its more superficial sense, a conscious-
ness of the set of common attributes belonging to a class of
objects, it is, in its more fundamental sense, a consciousness
of the producing activity which gave rise to the objects and
to all of their parts and distinctions. During the first six or
seven years of school life, the work upon the general idea
should usually terminate in the notion of the group of com-
mon attributes. As the higher grades are approached, how-
ever, the pupil should, little by little, be led to know, at
least to a degree, that there is a creative activity which gives
rise to the class. All this emphasizes in his mind the im-
portance of a process. He begins to comprehend that the
process is more important than its products. The object
or product is merely a way-station in the process, because
the process produces the object and then slowly removes
it, producing another object in its stead. This notion of the
process gives the key also, to the teacher's procedure in
promoting intellectual and moral progress.

The self-activity of the pupil brings about, largely, his
present intellectual and moral condition. This condition
may be regarded for the time being as static, as an es-
tablished condition of the self, or as an habitual mode of
being. The same self-activity, however, naturally annuls
this condition and produces a higher one in its stead. This
locates responsibility in the pupil, mainly, and not mainly
in his environment nor in his " stars" as indicated by such
words as disaster.

21. The nature of the concept requires that the pupil
should be led to see that the knowledge of each new object
of a class tends to enrich the content or meaning of the
class, and also to increase the extent of the concept. This
is because the concept is the idea of the common creative

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 263

activity. If a person has a knowledge of the right-angled
triangle and the scalene triangle only, his notion of triangle-
producing activity would signify only the activity capable
of producing these two kinds. If he afterwards becomes
acquainted with the nature of the isosceles triangle, two
things have occurred: (1) he discovers that the activity
which produces triangles has a capacity that he was not
before aware of, (increase of content), and (2) he also
knows that the extent of the class triangle has been enlarged.
It gives vitality to education to have the pupil feel as he
progresses from grade to grade that the discovery of every
new object and event makes him acquainted with new ca-
pacities in the creative activities and with an enlarged ex-
tent of the classes.

In the old notion of the concept, namely, that it signi-
fied merely the common attributes, the discovery of a new
object under the class was said to increase the extent of the
class but to decrease its content. If this were true, as one's
education progressed his knowledge would become more and
more empty.

22. Education seeks to render explicit the concept which
the child has constructed. This is done by developing the
thought of the concept into a series of judgments. These
differentiating judgments express the details of the thought
denoted in the concept. On the assumption that tne con-
cept is that of the island, it can be rendered clear by lead-
ing the child to express in various sentences all of the dif-
ferent essential thoughts concerning the island. This is
really the analysis of the concept and it results in clearness.

23. It has been shown on page 216 that the fundamental
forms of the sentence are, those that express the immediate
judgment, the conditional judgment and the definitive judg-
ment. This indicates their order of difficulty and hence
the order, in general, in teaching them.

264 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

The immediate judgment is expressed in a sentence which
explicitly denotes only one relation, namely, the relation
between the subject and the predicate, as, The ground is
wet. In taking up the work under sentences various ex-
amples of this class should be considered before those ex-
pressing the conditional judgment, as The ground, if it has
rained, is wet. In sentences of this second kind, the child
is required to be acquainted not only with the relation be-
tween the subject and the predicate, but also with the rela-
tion of this unity to a certain condition.

The sentences which express definitive judgments should
be the culminating work under the sentence, since they are
sentences that express, in a complete way, the exact nature
of the object which is denoted by the subject of the sentence.
This evidently requires a higher grade of thought than that
necessary to deal with the other forms of the sentence, as
may be realized by analyzing the process in creating the
thought expressed by the following definitive sentence : A
square is a parallelogram having four equal sides and four
right-angles.

24. The teacher should gradually learn to look upon the
predicate as expressing an action or the result of an ac-
tion. For example, in the sentence, ''This Doric column
is fluted," the predicate expresses the attribute of "being
fluted," but that attribute is the result of the activity con-
cerned in producing Doric columns, i. e., ability to pro-
duce the attribute fluted is one of the capacities of the ac-
tivity which produces Doric columns. The attribute in the
predicate always reflects the capacity of the activity which
produced the object that is expressed in the subject. If the
teacher is fully possessed of this thought, it will be an ad-
vantage in showing the child the close relation of the uni-
versal expressed in the predicate to the particular denoted
in the subject.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 265

25. The copula should be regarded by the teacher as
denoting an identity which is fused, undifferentiated. That
is, the person reading the sentence, and often the one who
produced it, is not conscious of the relations on which the
identity is based. It would be easy to say, for example,
"The Doric column is fluted," and at the same time be
unable to explain on what grounds it is judged to be fluted.
The act of reasoning is required in order to become distinct-
ly conscious of the basis of the identity between the ob-
ject and the attribute. Then the copula no longer denotes
a fused unity. The consciousness of this truth will tend
to prevent satisfaction with mere statements by teacher or
pupil. There will be an inclination to show the basis or
ground for the assertion. This will of necessity render
teaching more thoughtful.

26. The pupil in inductive and in deductive reasoning
should be led to employ consciously, the differentiated
psychical process rather than the fused logical process. In
the logical process he makes three assertions, as, ' ' All grains
of corn have a pericarp. This is a grain of corn. There-
fore it has a pericarp."

The differentiated, psychical process in deductive reason-
ing, for example, involves five mental stages instead of
three :

a. The child becomes aware of the object as a whole.
He knows it as an object distinct from other objects, but he
has not a clear knowledge of the distinctions in it itself.

b. He abstracts or isolates the attribute "having a
pericarp," and inquires whether this object has that at-
tribute.

c. On the basis of the shape of the object and other
known attributes it is classed as a grain of corn.

d. The mind then analyzes this class in order to dis-

266 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

cover the various attributes, and among these finds the at-
tribute "having a pericarp."

e. The assertion is then made that this object, since
it belongs in the class, has a pericarp.

27. When the process of the pupil in reasoning is that
of identification, his limitation is that of not fully knowing
the nature of the attribute which is expressed in the first
judgment. Let it be assumed that the first judgment is,
"This flower is red." The word "red," then, expresses the
attribute denoted in the first judgment. The difficulty in the
process of identification is that the child does not differen-
tiate this attribute, that is, he does not think clearly in re-
gard to the different objects in which it is found. Since
he does not notice this, he is willing to give as the second
sentence, "The geranium is red." This leads him to the
conclusion, "This flower is a geranium." When it is said
that the pupil must fully differentiate the attribute of the
first judgment, the thought is that he should reflect care-
fully concerning the presence of red in flowers. If this
were done, greater care would be exercised in making the
first assertion. All processes of identification, that is, of
inaccurate induction and deduction, are based upon the
failure of the pupil to carefully examine the attribute be-
fore expressing it in the predicate of the first judgment.

28. When the pupil has reached the stage of develop-
ment in which he consciously considers to some extent his
own process, he should be led to note that in each act of in-
duction and of deduction there is both separation and unity.
For example, when, by a process of deduction, the pupil
has become aware that this grain has a pericarp, he has
identified the particular object with a certain general at-
tribute, and by doing this he has separated the object from
all objects that do not possess that attribute. Also, when
having examined a number of grains of corn, the induction

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 267

is made that all grains of corn possess a slight testa, them
is analysis in isolating this attribute from the other at-
tributes of the object, but there is also synthesis in that
this object with all the other objects of the class are unified,
and further analysis in that they are at the same time made
separate from the objects of all other classes. Attention to
these facts would tend to make the pupil thoughtful in his
work.

29. In order to give the pupil real ability In his work,
he should be led to establish the habit of examining new
and varied examples as a basis for the discovery of the gen-
eral principle known in the act of induction. It would not
be sufficient to examine a few grains of corn in order to
feel justified in asserting that grains of corn possess a testa.
Many small grains should be examined, many larger grains,
those that are red, those that are whitish, those tnat are
yellow, etc. The same principle should control the child in
dealing with historical facts, with events in literature, in
language, etc.

30. The habit of seeking examples of the general truth
which has been discovered, should be firmly established in
the pupil. For example, after examining a large number
of grains of corn and finally becoming conscious of the
general truth that grains of corn possess a testa, the pupil
should be encouraged to verify this in the examination of
many new examples. This same practice should prevail,
also, in regard to historical events, geographical facts, facts
concerning language, etc.

31. The process in sympathy is a suggestive guide for
the teacher's work in the school. This may be shown by
noting the process :

a. Let it be assumed, for example, that a person is
in the mental condition called resentment on account of a
certain peculiar evironment which he has.

268 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

b. This mental condition is objectified in his counte-
nance, words, actions, etc.

c. An observer, through sense-perception, becomes
aware of these manifestations.

d. The observer reproduces in himself the mental con-
dition which he has usually been in when these external
manifestations were put forth by him.

e. This gives him an opportunity to examine closely
the mental condition and to become aware of its nature. As
he does this, he knows that the mental condition is not
really his own now, but that it is the actual condition of
the other person.

f . As he reflects upon this, he becomes aware that such
a mental condition, under the stimulus of such an environ-
ment, is possible to him. Instantly there arises a feeling
of identity between him and the person exhibiting resent-
ment. This feeling is called sympathy, (syn, with; pathos,
feeling). Sympathy is, perhaps, the fundamental feeling
of the self and bears the same important relation to the
emotional nature that attention does to the intellectual ac-
tivities. If the teacher clearly understands the process in
sympathy, it will enable him to stimulate sympathy in him-
self and in the child much more fully than could be the case
if the process were not understood.

It is evident that sympathy and also its opposite, anti-
pathy, are the social feelings which arise when the mind,
in considering itself in relation to others, is emphasizing
its attention to the others. If the emphasis of attention in
this consciousness of self and others is upon the self, the
feeling stimulated is pride or humility.

The ideal, according to Aristotle, is the exercise of func-
tion in the interest of the social whole and of the essentials
of the individual. To live in harmony with this ideal is
difficult. As the person becomes conscious that he has

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 269

potentiality of this harmony, or that he is actually in har-
mony with the ideal, the condition for the feeling of pride
is present ; if he is conscious of the opposite, he will experi-
ence the feeling of humility.

To be true elements in the development of the self, pride
and humility must arise from the contemplation of the
present condition of the self in relation to the adequate
social ideal.

They both become egoistic or negative if the objects con-
templated are particular attainments of the self in relation
to similar particular attainments in others.

In Dewey's Psychology, pages 334-335, certain complex
social feelings are mentioned, as envy, involving antipathy
and the egoistic form of humanity ; jealousy, involving sym-
pathy and the egoistic form of humility ; malice, having as
its elements antipathy and the egoistic form of pride ; covet-
ousness, consisting of sympathy and the egoistic form of
pride. The idea of the nature of these complex feelings
is a fruitful suggestion as to the mode of dealing with them
in education.

The classical poetical portrayal of these feelings, particu-
larly of pride and envy is found in the Purgatory of
Dante's Divine Comedy. The poet's artistic use of the
ideal and its opposite in the education of the inhabitants of
each terrace is especially noticeable.

Sympathy and all its kindred social feelings are based
upon the relation of self to others, but their reference is
to an ideal which is the fundamental nature of both self
and others. This is the social ideal as given by Aristotle
which involves the freedom as to intellect, feeling, will and
bodily capacities. This freedom includes the disposition
to bring about a like freedom in others.

The educational procedure in cultivating sympathy and
the other forms of social feelings that are positive, or in

270 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

freeing the child from pride, envy and those other forms of
social feeling that are negative consists,

a. In making clear to the child, gradually, that
ideal by which each individual life is to be measured.

b. In bringing into clear consciousness the nature
of the particular act.

c. In measuring this act by an ideal.

The essence of the principle is that each one of these
feelings is to be cultivated or to be repressed by instruction
in harmony with the process of the intellect whiclj pro-
duces the ideas that are the basis for the feeling.

32. All education is based upon faith. The mental con-
dition known as faith implies that the individual is dis-
tinguishing between a real condition of which he is dis-
tinctly conscious, and an ideal condition which he has
never realized, and never known to be realized. To have
the mental condition known as faith he must be conscious
that the present condition which seems very real does not
have that stability and permanency, and that degree of
reality which the ideal has. To feel that the ideal is more
real than the actual, is to be existing in the psychological
state of faith. This is an important attitude, because it al-
ways prevents a person from excusing erroneous action on
account of the fact that it is in harmony with his nature.
A person of faith comprehends that his present actual
nature is to be transformed gradually into a higher condi-
tion which is his real or ultimate nature. A person must
act in harmony with the first only to the extent that he de-
sires to transform the first into the second. Jesus meant
this condition in saying, "He that loseth his life for my
sake, shall save it. ' '

33. The process of education should stimulate and con-
tinue a condition of hope. A hopeful attitude is a sub-
stantial basis for education. To ensure this condition the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 271

teacher must be aware of the intellectual conditions that
are the basis of hope.
When does the psychological condition called hope arise ?

a. The person must be aware of an idealized con-
dition.

b. This idealized condition must be one that he is
interested in. That is, it must involve in a definite" way
that identity with the plans of the self which will stimulate
interest.

c. The person must also discover in the present
environment certain indications that this idealized condi-
tion will finally be made real. Hope is based on the notion
of an idealized condition which is strongly allied to the self
and the realization of which is hinted strongly by existing
conditions. If the teacher desires to awaken hope in the
child she must make him distinctly conscious of this ideal-
ized condition and of its identity with his own interests.
She must then lead him to notice all the indications of the
present environment that sustain the notion that this
idealized condition will finally come to be real. The mind
of the child having been made aware of these things will
necessarily enter into the condition of hope.

34. Education involves, at every stage, some degree of
discouragement and the necessity for its removal. What
knowledge would enable the teacher to free the pupil from
the condition of discouragement? The knowledge of the
intellectual basis of discouragement will suffice for this. In
order to become discouraged the pupil must be aware of a
certain work to be done. He must also be aware that he
is putting forth well directed efforts for the accomplishment
of this work. In addition to this, he must be conscious that
these well directed efforts are failing to solve the problem.
Under these conditions, he becomes discouraged.

272 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

How can the teacher make him free from this condition ?
By emphasizing three things :

a. He must first make clear to the pupil the exact
nature of the problem which is to be solved and show him
that the difficulties are not so great as he had supposed.

b. The pupil is to be made more fully acquainted with
his own equipment for the work.

c. He must be led to see that his well directed efforts
have been already successful, to a degree.

In every case of discouragement it would seem that these
things can be accomplished by the teacher. It requires, of
course, on the part of the teacher, careful reflection concern-
ing the conditions.

35. Cheerfulness, like hope, is a great incentive in edu-
cation. How can this condition be cultivated in children?
It may be cultivated if the teacher understands the nature
of the feeling itself and the psychological tendency it in-
volves.

Cheerfulness always relates to a change of conditions, or
to new conditions. If a person is cheerful under these new
conditions, it is because his tendency is to discover in the
new conditions characteristics that are desired. For exam-
ple, it may be a rainy day with surroundings that are
usually termed dismal. The cheerful person, discovering
the undesirable characteristics, will note the things in the
present condition of weather that are favorable. This dis-
position will grow by being exercised upon different objects
and conditions until it becomes a habit. The process in
arousing the feeling is thus made clear. There should be
an attempt in connection with any object or thought being
studied to throw the emphasis of attention upon characteris-
tics that are beneficial or that contribute to the interests of
those attending to the object or condition.

36. A negative influence in the educational process is

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 273

the feeling of sullenness. Can it be banished by any well
thought out process ?

The mode of dealing with any feeling is based upon the
knowledge of its intellectual imsis. A child is sullen under
certain conditions only. These are as follows:

a. He believes that he has been wronged by some other
person ; that is, by teacher or pupils.

b. He knows that no acknowledgement of the sup-
posed wrong has been made to him and that no other form
of atonment has been made for it.

c. He is aware by the actions of the teacher or the
pupils that an effort is being made to treat him as if no
wrong had been done. There seems to be an effort on the
part of those who have wronged him to ignore the wrong
act and to assume the friendly relations that formerly ex-
isted.

The existence of this complex state of the pupil's Intellect,
stimulates the feeling of sullenness. It is a definite feeling
based upon a definite intellectual condition.

In order to make the child free from the feeling of sullen-
ness, the teacher must deal with these three elements of
knowledge that have been indicated. If no wrong has been
done toward the pupil there must be careful work to show
that this is the case. If wrong has been done, this must be
acknowledged and atoned for as fully as possible.

37. Wonder is the form of love which relates to truth.
It does not relate, however, to truth which has already been
discovered, although it may be awakened by the undiscov-
ered characteristic of that which is exceedingly familiar.
Wonder has been said to be the attitude which the emo-
tional nature spontaneously assumes in the presence of a
world offering many incentives toward the increase of
knowledge. It is really based upon the assumption that

274 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

the unknown object exhibits in some way the nature of the
self.

The person who is in a state of wonder feels that the
investigation of the truth in the unknown object will in
some way, reveal him to himself more fully. It is a dis-
interested affection for truth, impelling investigation for
the sake of the truth to be discovered and not for any selfish
reason. If one seeks truth, not for the sake of the truth,
but for the sake of gratifying his longing to discover truth,
the feeling is curiosity instead of wonder. The educational
significance of wonder is found in the fact that it is based
upon unknown characteristics in the object and upon the
assumption that the nature of the self would be more fully
known if the object were more completely understood. This
gives the key to the teacher for its cultivation. If wonder
is absent from educational work, such work loses its vital-
ity because this emotion is that which gives origin to and
which continues the process of knowledge. The results
of the educational process deprived of this element of
wonder are forcibly shown in Hard Times by Charles
Dickens.

38. Admiration is the form of love which is concerned
with beauty, as revealed in both nature and art.

It is the outgoing of the self toward beauty which is
already existing and also the tendency toward the produc-
tion of beauty. It is that form of interest which was
spoken of by Socrates as love for the birth of beauty.

Admiration is awakened by becoming conscious of the
harmony or adaptation of a particular to the general truth
ivhich it exhibits. It can be given an important cultiva-
tion in school work especially in the study of literature
and the other forms of art but it can be appealed to
strongly also in the study of nature and in the investiga-
tion of spiritual growth.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 275

39. In all ages love has been ranked with sympathy as
a central emotional disposition. The intellectual basis of
it should be clearly understood. The object or content of
love is an ideal condition, i. e., an unrealized state. It is
said to be the emotional tendency of the self toward an
object regarded as other than the self. This implies that
the self is disregarded. In this disregard lies the essence
of self-sacrifice. In the interests of an ideal or unrealized
state, there is a surrender of the present self as to its im-
mediate aims and advantages. The true object of love is
a developed condition of the self or of another. One of
the most important forms is the love of knowledge which
has always been a powerful interest in the lives of people.
This is given admirable expression by Socrates in Plato's
dialogue entitled, " The Symposium." An extreme example
of its strength is shown in ''The Grammarian's Funeral,"
by Robert Browning. In this latter case the object of love
seems to be a self having a perfect knowledge of external
forms of language. In every case, however, love seeks the
realization of an ideal condition in the self, in others, or in
the environment. This ideal condition should always be
superior to the present existence of the person who Is
manifesting love. It is upon this relation of a superior
ideal to a present self which is to be sacrificed, to a degree,
that the teacher can base his work with the pupil. In
Luke IX-24 it was said, "For whosoever will save his life
shall lose it; but whosoever will lose his life for my sake,
the same shall save it." The words, "for my sake" denote
the ideal. The word love is the central utterance of all
sacred writings. Among the many beautiful expressions
in Jewish and Christian Scriptures these may be noted :

Canticles, VIII, 9: '%ove is strong as death."

Canticles, II, 4: "He brought me to the banqueting house, and his banner over
me was love."

St. John, XVII, 23: "And that the world may know that thou hast sent me, and
hast loved them, as thou hast loved me."

276 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

St. John, XVII, 24: "For thou lovedst me before the foundation of the world."

St. John, XIV, 15: "If you love me, keep my commandments."

I John IV, 8: "He that loveth not, knoweth not God, for God is love."

I John IV, 11: "Beloved, if God so loved us, we ought also love one another.

I John, IV, 19: "We love him because he first loved us.1'

Jeremiah XXXI, 3: "Yea, I have loved thee with an everlasting love."
Psalm CXXII, 6: "They shall prosper that love thee."

II Corinthians, XIII, 11: "The God of love and peace shall be with you."
Proverbs X, 12: "I,ove covereth all sins."

Proverbs, XV, 17: "Better is a dinner of herbs where love is, than a stalled ox
and hatred therewith."

In John IV., 8, it is said that "God is love." This indi-
cates that God is conscious of himself as manifested in all
objects and returns the manifestion with equal ardor as
is shown in Dante's Purgatory, Canto XV., lines 64-67.

"The highest good
Unlimited, ineffable, doth so speed
To love as beam to lucid body darts,
Giving as much ardor as it finds."

This universal relation of love is shown by Francis W.
Bourdillon in the following:

" The night has a thousand eyes ;
The day, but one.
So the light of the whole day dies
At set of sun.

The mind has a thousand eyes ;
The heart, but one.
So the light of the whole life dies
When love is done."

What is the result "when love is done?" There is no
further outgoing of the self toward the beauty of a sunset,
toward work of art, or toward a fine deed. The love ot
country is gone. There is no longer any care for friends or
relatives; no care for the stranger and the alien. There is
no love for one's vocation, for his ideals, for the develop-
ment of himself or others ; no desire for knowledge.

The extent of this emotion is shown in The Symposium.
It was arranged that those seated at the banquet table at
Agathon's home, should, in the order seated, each in his
own way utter an encomium on love.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 277

Phaedrus spoke first and Socrates closed the addresses.
Phaedrus referred to the antiquity of love and to its bene-
fits. He noted among the greatest of these, the sense of
honor and dishonor.

Pausanias was the second speaker. He distinguished be-
tween love for spiritual things and love for the physical.

The third speaker was Eryximachus. He also distin-
guished the spiritual from the physical love but he ex-
tended the empire of love through all things. It was, he
thought, found at work not only in human beings and ani-
mals, but also in plants and even in the inanimate world.
It was the harmony of opposites.

Aristophanes, who was the fourth speaker, regarded love
as a desire for the whole. Anything which is incomplete
and is seeking to acquire its total nature was impelled, ac-
cording to his thought, by love.

Agathon's speech succeeded that of Aristophanes. He
thought that all things which are done, are done in obedi-
ence to love and that wherever there is love there is obedi-
ence. He also traced obedience to justice and therefore re-
garded love as underlying justice.

In the speech of Socrates, however, there was made the
really great contribution to the thought concerning love.
He began by discussing its nature and showing that it had
for its object, not the actual, not anything which is really
existing. It is, as he said, the outgoing of the self toward
an ideal. Its object is beauty, but not existing beauty.
Love centers in the birth of beauty, that is, in the produc-
tion of that which is beautiful, whether physical or spiritual.
He traced it in its grades, showing that at first love is for
one fair form ; then for many ; then for that which is com-
mon to them; it then rises to a desire for beauty of mind.
From this, it ascends to an interest in the beauty of law and
institutions. At last it centers in the beauty of that ' ' ever-

278 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

lasting nature which is the cause of all things. ' ' Thus the
philosophical insight of Socrates conceived love in its high-
est forms as the emotional outgoing toward universal "beauty.
Since the object of love is "the everlasting nature which is
the cause of all, ' ' or absolute truth, it will be seen that love
is kindred to both wonder and admiration, in that it is the
stimulus to all fields of investigation in the world of beauty
and in the world of truth, as well as in the world of morals
or duty.

The educational value of understanding love is found in
the emphasis it gives to the ideal; in the distinction which
it involves between the ideal and the real and the necessity
for the surrender of much of the present for the sake of the
higher ideal.

40. Much has been said concerning interest and its rela-
tion to attention. Interest is the active outgoing of the self
toward an object which is regarded as the self or as in
identity with the self. It is closely akin to love, but it in-
volves more fully the sense that the object upon which the
attention is centered is the self. When one is in a for-
eign country and has been hearing for days and months the
foreign language, the utterance of a single word of his own
language immediately interests him because he is aware,
although sub-consciously, that the object he is attending to
is, in certain respects, the self. In order to interest a pupil
in some object or branch of study, it is necessary merely for
the teacher to make the child acquainted with the fact that
the truths under consideration and the powers gained in
the investigation of them are in identity with purposes of
his own. That is the essential procedure in stimulating inter-
est in the pupil. Every pupil has purposes of his own;
there are objects or actions for which he cares. The teacher
should study him enough to know what these objects are,
and to know the actions or the fields of knowledge that the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 279

pupil does not care for. The identity between these and his
favorite pursuits should be sympathetically shown. The
pupil's interest will then, necessarily, center in these ac-
tivities or subjects, to a certain degree.

41. The process of choice involves as has been noted, a
comparison of the desired condition with the aim of life.
During the life of the race there have been many doctrines
as to the aim of life or the Good. The prominent one has
been pleasure. It is probable, however, that the only aim
that can satisfy the requirements of life, is freedom. This
word denotes a release from limitations. What things can
be limited ? Limits may be found in the intellectual nature,
the emotional nature, the volitional nature and the bodily
activities. A person grows in freedom as his thought be-
comes more rational, as his emotions become centered in
higher and more refined conditions, as his choices come more
and more to have as their content the habit of choosing free-
dom, and as his body becomes harmonious in its action with
the spirit it manifests. True freedom in an individual re-
quires that he should seek these forms of development in
himself and in others equally. This notion of freedom gives
an important chart for educational development. The aim
of life is not merely to know, to have fame, to have posi-
tion, not even to be sympathetic. Sympathy toward a per-
son must be controlled by the notion of giving him free-
dom, i. e., one must be sympathetic toward a person to the
extent that this sympathy will make him free from de-
pendence upon others.

In the development of the notion of freedom, the first
ideal was that freedom consists in the enjoyment of the
maximum pleasure.

The second ideal was that developed by the Stoics. Their
thought was that all of the external world is colored by the
spiritual condition of the person and that the environment

280 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

is immaterial. Accordingly they regarded freedom as
obedience to a universal law. Obedience to universal law is
the good. The individuality of the person was to be sacri-
ficed in behalf of the universal.

According to Plato, freedom consists in the subordina-
tion of the inferior nature to the superior nature. In the
subordination of the appetite to reason, the virtue of tem-
perance arose. In the subordination of the ''spirited"
nature to reason, there appears the virtue of courage. In
the subordination of the appetite and the "spirited" nature
to reason as comprehending the highest ideal, there arises
the virtue of wisdom. In the obedience of all the lower ele-
ments to the rational nature in the measure that there is
harmonious activity of the whole self in the pursuit of an
invidual vocation for the interest of society, there arises the
virtue of righteousness.

This conception of Plato 's is practically the ideal of free-
dom as given above. Plato's ideal seems, however, to have
been so distinctly separated from real life as to develop in
later schools, into asceticism.

In Aristotle, the highest standpoint of freedom seems to
have been gained. He did not regard freedom as con-
sisting in subordination of the lower nature to the higher
but rather in an obedience to an ideal which implied the
largest possible social range. According to him, freedom
is the exercise of function in the way to advance the in-
terests of society and the higher personal interests of the
individual. He based this thought on the notion that the
individual is a social being by nature. This latter is the
first thought concerning ethical freedom in the system of
Aristotle. His second is that there should be ample means
consisting of wealth, friends, time, opportunity, etc., for
the realization of this ideal. The third principle of his doc-
trine is that the means should be strictly adapted to the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 281

end, neither wanting nor in excess. This is his celebrated
doctrine of the mean.

It will be observed that the notion of freedom given by
Aristotle includes the idea of the full development of the
intellectual, emotional, volitional and bodily nature of each
individual, together with a disposition in the person to
bring about a similar development in all others.

There have been many attempts since Aristotle's time to
express the thought of freedom. Among those which are
of a high standard, is that given by Robert L. Stevenson
in ' ' A Christmas Sermon. ' '

"To be honest, to be kind— to earn a little and spend a little less, to make
upon the whole a family happier for his presence, to renounce when that shall
be necessary and not embittered, to keep a few friends, but these without capitu-
lation—above all, on the same grim condition, to keep friends with himself— here
task for all that a man has of fortitude and delicacy."*

John Boyle O'Reilly notes in poetical form the different
ideals of life and his estimate of them, as follows :

"What is the real good ?"
I asked in musing mood.
"Order," said the law court;
"Knowledge," said the school;
"Truth," said the wise man;
"Pleasure," said the fool,
"I,ove," said the maiden;
"Beauty," said the page;
'•Freedom," said the dreamer;
"Home," said the sage;
"Fame," said the soldier;
"Equity," the seer.

Spake my heart full sadly:
"The answer is not here."
Then within my bosom
Softly this I heard:
"Each heart holds the secret;
Kindness is the word."

It is evident that the poet regards kindness as the ideal
of life, but this has its limitations. One should manifest

* From "A Christmas Sermon," by Robert I,. Stevenson, Vol. XV, Thistle Edition
page 302. Title of volume: The Amateur Emigrants, Across the Plains, The Sil-
verado Squatters.

282 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

kindness toward a person only to the extent that it will
further his freedom. The true ideal of life is the great
conception which is to make vital educational work, there-
fore it should receive the thoughtful consideration of the
teacher. ** It would be valuable to study the conception
of Robert L. Stevenson and of John Boyle O'Reilly in re-
lation to the ideal given by Aristotle. An investigation of
this nature would bring out the limited view of the different
ideals mentioned in each of the two extracts quoted.

42. The teacher can with great advantage further the
education of the child if she knows the process in desire,
because all true education must proceed in harmony with
the desire of the child. This does not mean, however, that
the child's caprice should be the guide. Desire is not merely
a feeling. It is a complex mental condition Involving the
intellectual, emotional and volitional aspects of the self.
It assumes that some impulse, as, for example, the impulse
to travel, or the impulse to understand the work in alge-
bra, has been gratified. As this impulse was gratified, the
person was aware of the activity which gratified it, of the
impulse itself, and of the pleasure resulting from the grati-
fication of the impulse. If at any future time this impulse
arises, it is termed a desire. This is because the mere im-
pulse has been interpenetrated by knowledge. The person
knows or remembers the former activity, the impulse that
was satisfied by it and the resulting pleasure. He also
knows the present condition, that is, he is aware that the
activity which satisfied the impulse is not now occurring
and that the pleasure belonging to such activity is not
present. Desire, therefore, involves a knowledge of a past
condition and of an idealized condition similar to the past
condition. The consciousness that at present the condition

**See "Spiritual Frontage,'' page 94 of "Afternoons in the College Chapel," by
Francis G. Peabody.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 283

is unrealized, necessarily gives rise to the affective elements
of pain and pleasure. Thus desire is a complex mental
state.

How may the teacher awaken in the pupil a desire for
a worthy object or action? The process must be in har-
mony with the nature of desire itself. In the first place,
the teacher must lead the child to remember the former
impulse, the activities which answered to it and the pleas-
ure resulting. He must then lead the pupil to realize that
these conditions are not now present, but that they are
possible. By stimulating these mental conditions in the
child, the desire for the idealized condition will be created.

43. Education is incomplete, however, if it ends in de-
sire. Complete education involves choice and habitual
modes of choice. How can the child be led to choose ? This
process the teacher must understand. What is the first
psychological process in choice ? It is to hold in conscious-
ness at the same time two or more desired conditions. This
is the process of discrimination.

In the second place, each of these desired conditions must
be compared with the ideal of life as a whole and the ideal
in the person's special pursuit. The desired conditions
must then be estimated as to their value in relation to the
modes of life and of the special pursuit.

Finally, the person is led to assert mentally that the de-
sired condition which is most in harmony with these aims
shall be realized. This assertion is a volitional judgment
and is called choice. The education of the ethical nature
must proceed in harmony with the process of choice.

44. All educational work is, in a sense, the development
of the child's conscientiousness. Little by little, under
true educational influences he would become more conscien-
tious. It is important, however, to notice that conscience
includes more than mere feeling. It is often spoken of as

284 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

the voice of God in the soul. This makes it an extra fac-
tor in the conscious life of each person and does not seem
to be justified by psychological analysis.

Hamlet says, (Act III., Scene I,) "Thus conscience does
make cowards of us all." This is usually understood to
refer to the emotional response in the form of remorse,
but conscience includes the total range of psychological ac-
tivities. It does not differ from other mental states, as,
for example, from the activity of conceiving the nature of
a triangle, except that its subject-matter is different. Con-
science is concerned with conduct, with the relation of a
particular act to an ideal.

The cultivation of it must be based upon its own process.
It is, therefore, important to note carefully the process of
conscience.

The first stage in a process of conscience is the apprehen-
sion of a worthy ideal.

This ideal is then held in consciousness over against the
idea of a particular act of the individual.

This is succeeded by the process of choosing to perform
the particular act.

If the particular act harmonizes with the ideal, the feel-
ing of approbation arises. If it is out of harmony, the
feeling of disapprobation is produced. It is this feeling
which is spoken of as the stings of conscience.

It is seen therefore that the full process of conscience
is intellectual, emotional, and volitional.

In the endeavor, therefore, to make the child grow more
and more conscientious the teacher must seek to make more
clear to him worthy ideals, to give him the habit of noting
carefully his particular acts in relation to these ideals, to
cultivate in him the habit of choosing the particular act
which is in harmony with the ideal so that he may experi-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 285-

ence the feeling of approbation which belongs to the sense
of progress.

To this end Polonius says (Hamlet, Act I., Scene iii.) :

"This above all: to thine own self be true,
And it must follow, as the night the day,
Thou canst not then be false to any man."

45. The universal or central element in behavior is
obedience to an ideal or criterion. It is to be remembered,
however, that all behavior is obedience to some ideal or
criterion. The first thing of importance in behavior is the
possession of an adequate ideal. Is pleasure an adequate
ideal ? Is the attainment of success in the way of the pos-
session of wealth, of office, of reputation an adequate ideal ?
Is the Stoical ideal of an ability to possess one's self under
adverse circumstances, an adequate ideal? Can any ideal
other than freedom be adequate? Must not freedom itself
be conceived as the development of one's intellectual, emo-
tional, volitional and physical nature and that of all others
equally? Freedom is the obedience to the law of one's
social nature, for as Aristotle said, "Man is a social ani-
mal." In all educational work the teacher must regard
this ideal, and say to himself, "This work in arithmetic,
this work in grammar, this work in history, is to increase
the child's freedom in the four respects mentioned, and
among his tendencies is to be a desire to work for his own-
freedom and for that of others equally."

The second thing in obedience is to act in harmony with
the ideal until such action becomes a habit.

46. Growth in behavior is evidently, a passage from
obedience to some external ideal, through obedience to a
mere subjective ideal, to obedience to a criterion which is not
merely subjective. The obedience which is not merely sub-
jective must be an obedience to an ideal which is reflected in
the thought of humanity and corresponds to its universal

286 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

nature. This ideal is almost fully comprehended in Plato 's
conception of the subordination of the " appetitive" and
"spirited" elements to the rational, but, probably, the only
ideal which adequately represents the ethical nature, is
Aristotle's conception of "the exercise of function de-
voted to wide social ends and permanent personal interests. ' '
This is the ideal of freedom. This truth can aid in the daily .
work of the school by stimulating the teacher to inquire
whether his management of the school appeals to an ex-"
ternal ideal, to some merely subjective state or to a free-
dom that belongs to the individual and to others equally.
The test question is, "Am I training the child to hold be-
fore him the ideal of laboring for the intellectual, emotional,
volitional and physical advancement of others and himself
equally? Am I training the child so that he would be un-
willing to increase his intellectual power if it decreased the
opportunity of others for intellectual power ? ' '

47. Total knowledge of an object or action is an incen-
tive to virtue. As indicated above, it is sometimes held
that the individual is injured by increase of knowledge if
his ethical strength is not also directly educated. Was not
Socrates correct, however, in holding that "knowledge is
virtue," if he meant that an adequate insight into objects
and events enables the person to discover that evil is always
folly, and that virtue alone is permanently beneficial to all
elements of the person's being? If one's intelligence is
slight, he may unduly estimate the pleasure that belongs
to evil acts considered in their isolation. If his intelligence
becomes more complete, he will be able to understand that
this apparent advantage in evil is very transient and that
the final result, which is the result considered in relation to
the whole social order, can be only negative and disastrous.
Sometimes a person speaks of an "educated rascal." The
word, "educated," as thus used is very limited in Its ap-

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 287

plication. If the person were truly educated, one of the
things that would be most plain to him is that it is folly
only to engage in conduct that may be called rascality. It
is only the partially educated person who engages in evil
works.

48. The rules of a school are to be made by neither
teacher nor pupil in the ultimate sense, since they are
grounded on the nature of the organization itself. They
belong to the organization, however, since they are found
in the nature of the child who is to be educated. The regu-
lation regarding promptness in attendance is really founded
in the needs of the child. Possessed of this thought, the
teacher will lead the pupil to know that the rules of the
school are not externally imposed, but that they are the
outgrowth of his process of development. If this thought
is shared by both teacher and pupil, the external rules of
the school could be formulated, to some extent, by the
pupils themselves, and this formulation could become more
prominent from year to year. This would arouse In the
children the sense that they are self-directive. Progress
in this direction should, however, receive the careful over-
sight of the teacher so as to free it from the influences of
caprice. The cause of self-government in school has some-
times been injured by having the process begin at too early
an age. The idea that the child is finally to become self-
governing, should, however, be a guiding principle to the
teacher and should be practically recognized at all times
when such recognition promises to further the true develop-
ment of the child and the efficiency of the school.

49. The regulations of a school that are not originally
made by the pupils should be, in a certain sense, re-created
by them so as to make them their own. In other words,
they should be led to know the reasons underlying these
regulations, even in the early grades, to a slight extent. As

288 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

they progress from grade to grade it should be the en-
deavor to have them comprehend the reasons under the
regulations more and more fully. When a pupil knows
that a regulation is reasonable because it helps his develop-
ment, he adopts it as his own.

50. The work of instruction in school should be so di-
rected as to establish in the pupil only such tendencies as
will reinforce the activity of rational institutions. To lead
a true life in the rational institutions means that one should
be reliable in his statements, clear in his thinking, resolute
in his will. It means that he should be obedient to the
higher ideals of thought. Each institution, as the state, the
family, the church, is assumed to represent the higher ra-
tional life of the individual. In order to make progress,
the individual must harmonize his particular life with this
larger life. Therefore, in the schools, the child should be
given that information, those modes of emotional response
and those habits that would equip him for effective, har-
monious work in the institutions of society. It is evident
that this principle bears directly upon both the second and
third aspects of self-determination.

51. The result of instruction in school should be a
gradual increase of independence or self -direction in the
pupil. In his study of a paragraph or in his solution of
a problem, he should work under the direction of tne teacher
in just that way which is best fitted to prepare him to ac-
complish the work with least aid from the teacher. The
questions should be put in such a way as to make him self-
reliant. They should require answers that can not be
given by the immediate examination of the text. This prin-
ciple emphasizes the fact that the self is not to be controlled
by environment, but rather by its own nature.

52. The necessary stimulus to education is the sense of
limit. The child will not be interested in studying the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 289

nature of the adjective until he has been led to feel that
without the power to use it he is hampered in some way.
He will not be particularly interested in being prompt in
attendance unless he is led to know that lack of promptness
interferes with his progress. He will not endeavor to free
himself from some lack in his ethical nature unless he is
made conscious of that lack and is shown that it hinders
the aims that he has.

53. The course of study, the program for the day's
work, as well as the treatment of an single subject or topic,
should involve, to a degree, training in the contemplation
and the expression of truth, beauty and goodness. The
child is a complex being, his nature being cognitive, emo-
tional and volitional. Therefore, a complete education re-
quires that the material being dealt with should stimulate
and improve him, in so far as possible, in all three of these
capacities. It seems possible to have the investigation of
the American Revolution contribute in all of these direc-
tions. Of course, in any case, the work will of necessity be
predominantly one of the three.

The principle implies that the teacher should reflect in
order to determine to what extent the material being ex-
amined will stimulate the child's intellect and his aesthetic
and ethical activity.

The contemplation of this principle may lead the teacher
to ask, for example, ''Can the study of the adverb contri-
bute to the child's aesthetic and ethical training as well as
to his intellectual development?"

"Is the intellectual realm entirely isolated from the
aesthetic and the ethical ? " It is important to consider this
because a person often speaks as if the child could be
trained in a satisfactory way intellectually without any ad-
vancement as to his aesthetic and ethical nature. Is this
true?

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 291

APPENDIX I.

SERIES OF SENTENCES EXPRESSING THE
STAGES IN VARIOUS ACTIVITIES.

THE CONSTRUCTION OP A FOUR-INCH SQUARE.

The point is resting.
It moves to the right four inches.
It rests again.
A straight line appears.
It is horizontal.

The point moves perpendicularly downward four inches.
It rests a third time.
A second straight line is produced.
It is vertical.

It is perpendicular to the first line.
The difference in direction forms an angle.
It is a right angle.

The point moves perpendicularly to the left four inches.
It rests a fourth time.
A third straight line is formed.
It is horizontal.
It is parallel to the first line.
It is perpendicular to the second line.
The difference in direction of the second and third lines
forms a right angle.

The point moves directly to the place of starting.
A fourth straight line is produced.
Here the point finally rests.

292 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

FILLING A TEAKETTLE.
I am standing near the kitchen window.
I am looking out of the window.
I know the teakettle is empty.
I think the teakettle as filled.
I go to the stove.

I take hold of the knob on the lid of the teakettle.
I remove the lid of the teakettle.
I continue to hold the lid in my left hand.
I walk to the bucket of water.
I find the dipper hanging on a nail.
I take hold of the handle of the dipper near the bowl.
I fill the dipper with water.

I walk to the stove with the dipper full of water.
I pour the water from the dipper into the teakettle.
I walk to the water bucket again.
I fill the dipper a second time.
I walk back to the stove.

I empty the water from the dipper into the teakettle.
A third time I walk to the bucket of water.
I refill the dipper.

I pour the contents of the dipper into the teakettle.
I place the lid on the teakettle.
I hang the dipper up in its proper place.
I return to the window.
I again look out of the window.

THE ACT OF SPRINKLING A SLATE.

Edwin sits at his desk.

He stands.

He walks toward the sprinkling bottle.

He draws near to the sprinkling bottle.

He reaches out his hand.

He takes hold of the sprinkling bottle.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 293

He turns.

He walks toward his desk.

He draws near to his desk.

He stops.

He turns the sprinkling bottle upside down.

He throws water on his slate.

He throws water on his slate again.

He turns the sprinkling bottle right side up.

He walks toward the blackboard.

He draws near to the blackboard.

He reaches out his hand.

He places the sprinkling bottle in the ledge.

He turns.

He walks to his desk.

He sits at his desk.

AN ACT IN GRAVITATION.

A guinea-and-feather tube is lying on the table.

It is full of air.

A circle of paper and one of brass are in the tube.

They are of the same size.

I pick up the tube.

I hold it in my hand with the top up.

I invert it.

The force of gravitation pulls the paper and the brass
toward the center of the earth.

The air resists the downward movement.

The brass displaces the air and falls rapidly to the lower
end of the tube.

The paper displaces the air more slowly than does the
brass.

It flutters in the air.

It finally reaches the lower end of the tube.

I turn the tube top end up.

294 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

The force of gravitation pulls the paper and the brass
toward the center of the earth.

The brass reaches the bottom sooner than the paper.

I screw a stop-cock to the bottom of the tube.

I fasten one end of a rubber tube to the stop-cock.

I fasten the other end to the air pump.

I grasp the handle of the air pump.

I move it vigorously up and down many times.

This exhausts the air from the tube.

I turn the thumb-screw on the stop-cock.

This prevents the air from entering the tube.

I take the rubber tube off the stop-cock.

I again invert the tube.

The paper and the brass reach the lower end of the tube
at the same time.

A REPLY TO AN INVITATION.

Edna is in receipt of an invitation to dinner.

She recalls all her engagements for the week.

She finds that she has no engagement for the evening
named in the invitation.

She decides to accept the invitation.

She goes to the writing desk.

She selects a sheet of un-ruled note paper, black ink, and
a good pen.

She writes the following note:

Mi^s Edna Crafton accepts with pleasure Miss Katharine
Stanford's kind invitation to dine with her on Monday
evening.

She selects an envelope to correspond with her paper.

She folds the note once.

She slips it into the envelope.

She addresses it.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 295

She places a stamp on the upper right hand corner of the
envelope.

She posts the note.

A TEST IN CHEMISTRY.

I place the oxygen generator on the table.

I fill one-third of a test-tube with potassium chlorate and
black oxide of manganese.

I cork the tube and connect by rubber tubing with the
bottles in the generator.

I light the gas.

I heat the tube gently at first.

I gradually increase the heat.

The heat expands the air in the tube.

The air escapes in bubbles.

The air escapes more rapidly in bubbles.

I heat the tube until I have sufficient oxygen for my pur-
pose.

I cover one of the bottles with a glass slide so that the
oxygen will not escape.

I remove the bottle.

I take a piece of magnesium ribbon.

I put it into the flame.

It burns with a bluish-white light.

It combines with the oxygen of the air.

It forms a white powder.

This powder is oxide of magnesium.

I take another piece of magnesium ribbon.

I light it in the flame.

I remove the slide from the bottle.

I put the ribbon into the bottle.

It burns with a blue light.

It deposits a white powder.

296 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

I compare this powder with the powder left from the first
experiment.

I conclude that the magnesium ribbon burns more freely
in the bottle than in the air.

I find they are similar.

I see that it burns more freely in the bottle since there is
more oxygen there.

I infer that in both cases the magnesium unites with the
oxygen.

THE ACT OF LAYING A BRICK.

The mason stands beside the wall which he is building.

He procures a trowel full of mortar from the mortar
board.

He spreads it evenly over the place where he intends to
lay the brick.

He gets another trowel full of mortar.

He picks up a brick from the ground.

He throws up a cross or header joint.

He lays the brick on the wall very carefully.

He probably taps the brick lightly with the handle of the
trowel, or with the edge of the blade.

This settles the brick into the correct position.

He scrapes the mortar, which has been pushed out by the
brick, from the side of the wall.

He spreads the mortar, just gathered, over the top of the
brick.

He pauses in his work to speak with a friend who is pass-
ing.

TRANSACTION ON SHORT CREDIT.

James Smith, the grocer, sells John Jones ten pounds of
sugar and ten pounds of salt on credit, the account to be
paid in a short time.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

297

Mr. Smith turns to his day-book and makes an entry,
thus

Nov. 9 John Jones, Dr.

To 10ft Sugar @ 6c. I

10ft Salt @2c. 20 80

In the evening, Mr. Smith posts this account in his led-
ger, which in this case is a small indexed account file, with
detachable slips.

In ten days Mr. Jones calls to pay his account.

Mr. Smith immediately opens his account file at the letter
"J," and sees Mr. Jones' account.

He takes out the slip, receipts it, and hands it to Mr.
Jones, who thereupon pays it.

Mr. Smith then turns to his cash register and registers
80 cents, counting it as a cash sale of the day.

TRANSACTION INVOLVING AN INDEFINITE ACCOUNT.

James Smith, the grocer, is asked by John Jones for credit
for three or four months.

Mr. Smith consents, takes his order, and enters it in his
day-book, thus:

Nov.

John Jones, Dr.

To 10ft Sugar @ 6c.
19ft Salt @ 2c.

80

In the evening Mr. Smith opens an account with Mr.
Jones in a large ledger in which he keeps all accounts which
run indefinitely, and makes an entry, thus :

JOHN JONES,

Dr.

Cr.

Page

Page

Book.

Cash
Book

Nov.

9

To Mdse.

80c

298 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

All succeeding orders are posted nightly to this same ac-
count.

In three months' time Mr. Jones calls to pay his account.

Mr. Smith turns to his ledger, states the amount, and re-
ceives the cash.

Mr. Smith then makes out a bill and receipts it, giving it
to Mr. Jones.

He then takes his cash-book and makes an entry, credit-
ing Mr. Jones' account in full.

This Cash-book entry is posted in the ledger, and Mr.
Jones' account is balanced and closed up.

A GEOLOGIC ACTIVITY.

A granite peak stands upon the crest of a mountain range.

The rock is made up of white crystalline masses of hard
quartz, red crystalline masses of softer feldspar, and glit-
tering gold-colored leaves of soft mica.

The rain and snow water soak into the pores of the rock.

The water freezes in the pores of the rock and by expand-
ing makes cracks in it.

The water dissolves and carries away some portions of the
rock, and thus loosens the undissolved portions.

When the sun shines the rock gets very warm and ex-
pands; when the sun sets the rock gets very cold and con-
tracts ; the expansion and contraction break it up still more.

The roots of trees penetrate the cracks, and as they grow
in size force the sides of the cracks further apart.

The air goes into the rock with the water and rots and
softens some of the material.

The larger and more numerous the cracks become the
more is the rock exposed to the attacks of air, water, heat
and frost.

As soon as a piece of rock, large or small, becomes loos-
ened, gravity pulls it down the steep slope.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 299

The rain and melted snow run over the surface and wash
away the loose fragments.

In the course of thousands of years the granite peak
crumbles to pieces and is carried away down into the valley.

The stream at the bottom of the valley carries away the
fragments of rocks that fall into it.

When the snows melt in the spring the stream is a torrent
which rolls and pushes along great stones and boulders.

When the flood subsides the stream is able to carry only
sand and gravel.

As the sand, gravel and boulders are carried down stream
they are knocked about and rolled over one another and
against the rocky bed of the stream.

The corners and edges of the sand grains and gravel
stones are worn off; they grow smaller in size and become
more and more rounded.

As they go further down stream the pieces of hard quartz
change least rapidly, but the softer pieces of feldspar and
mica are reduced to a fine soft powder.

The quartz never becomes finer than sand.

The stream is joined by other streams and becomes a
river.

The river carries along in its current the rounded gravel,
the grains of sand and the fine, soft powder, now called mud
or clay.

As the river approaches the sea its slope becomes more
gentle and its current slower.

As the current slackens it is less able to carry the coarser
material.

It first drops the gravel, then the sand, and finally is able
to carry only the mud.

At high water the force of the stream is greater, and it
picks up again the sediment it has dropped, only to drop it
again further down stream.

300 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

The sediment is dropped and picked up again a thousand
times, but at last is carried into the ocean.

As the current of the river is gradually checked by the
still water of the ocean, the coarser particles of sediment
settle to the bottom and form a sand bar.

The finer mud is carried further out to sea and settles
to form a mud bank.

Thus the tendency of the river is to sort out the coarser
sediment from the fine, and to deposit all the sand in one
place and all the mud in another.

The velocity of the current varies from season to season
and from year to year.

The river at one time deposits sand and at another time
mud, in the same place.

The sediment is always deposited in nearly horizontal lay-
ers, one above another, and is always more or less assorted
into layers of sand and layers of clay.

Frequently the sand and clay are mixed together in the
same layer, and in different proportions in different layers.

The waves, tides and currents of the ocean transport and
assort or mix up the river sediment and deposit it again in
new forms and positions.

Everywhere along the cost and for miles out to sea the
waste of the land accumulates in beds of sand and clay.

As the beds are piled on each other the pressure on the
lower ones becomes greater.

The sand beds are compressed and consolidated into sand-
stone, the clay beds into shale and the mixed beds Into mixed
sandstone and shale.

The pile becomes very thick and heavy, and with the
ever-increasing load the crust of the earth under it is
pressed down.

The crust of the earth is not strong enough to sustain
the weight and slowly sinks, forming a great trough.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 301

As the trough becomes deeper it is kept even full of sedi-
ment.

As the thickness of the sediment increases the upper sur-
face remains near the surface of the water.

The sediment sometimes becomes eight miles thick.

As the beds of sandstone and shale sink nearer to the
center of the earth they grow hotter.

At a certain depth they become as hot as red-hot iron.

The pores of the sandstone and shale are filled with sea
water.

By means of the great pressure of the beds above them,
the high temperature and the water, the sandstone and shale
become partially liquid.

In the course of ages the mineral matter of which they
are composed again crystalizes into masses of hard, white
quartz, softer red feldspar and soft, glittering mica.

The sand and mud beds have been converted into granite.

The looseness and softness of the material which fills the
trough of the earth-crust makes the crust weaker all along
the shore of a continent.

The pressure from the stronger earth-crust on both sides
squeezes the weaker part of the crust into wrinkles and
folds.

The folds are slowly crushed together and slowly raised
higher.

The upper edges of the folds rise above the sea and are
finally pushed up into new mountain ranges.

Air, rain, heat, frost and gravity attack the rising land.

The covering of sandstone and shale is finally stripped
off, exposing the granite below them.

Again a granite peak stands upon the crest of a mountain
range.

302 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

THE ACT BY WHICH AN ALIEN BECOMES A CITIZEN.

Mr. Shannon comes to the United States from Ireland.

He wishes to become a citizen of the United States.

He presents himself before the District Court of the
United States.

He declares his intention to become a citizen of the
United States.

This declaration is recorded by the clerk of the court.

He receives a certificate from the clerk.

He returns to his home.

He spends his time in work at his trade.

He also makes himself familiar with the laws of the
United States.

He again presents himself before the court,

He proves to the satisfaction of the court that he has re-
sided five years within the United States.

He also proves that he has lived in the state one year.

He affirms that he has borne a good moral character.

He proves that he has been well disposed toward the con-
stitution and government.

He renounces allegiance to every foreign power, includ-
ing that of which he was formerly a subject.

He takes an oath that he will support the constitution of
the United States.

He receives his certificate of citizenship from the clerk.

HOW AN ACORN BECOMES AN ACORN AGAIN.

An acorn has just fallen from an oak tree.

The acorn consists of a germ surrounded by a hard outer
covering which serves for protection.

The germ has stored within it large amounts of nourish-
ment which it is to use in its growth until it shall have de-
veloped far enough to make its own food.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 303

The germ consists of a little stem, the caulicle, of two
seed leaves, the cotyledons, and of the tiny plumule.

The cold winds of fall and the snow and frosts of winter
make the acorn lie dormant during these seasons.

Approaching spring ushers in bright sunshine and warm
rains.

The warmth and moisture quicken the latent energies of
the acorn.

The germ begins to imbibe water, and swells.

The insoluble foodstuffs stored in the acorn are converted
into soluble ones by the energy of the germ.

A dialysis of this material causes a flow of these food-
stuffs to the growing points of the acorn.

The continued swelling caused by all these changes bursts
the acorn shell.

Out of the cleft the growing caulicle protrudes.

The caulicle rapidly elongates and penetrates the ground
a short distance.

On the underground portion of the caulicle small rootlets
begin to grow.

The seed leaves remaining in the shell furnish nourish-
ment to the growing parts.

The first leaves of the plumule appear above ground.

The sunshine on the plumule leaves incites tne production
in the leaf of green chlorophyll.

By means of this chlorophyll the young plant forms the
third set of leaves as well as the growing tip of the stem.

On the growing tip new leaves appear in regular succes-
sion.

In the axils of these leaves branches grow.

By the continued growth of these parts the little germ
becomes a small oak plant.

A continuation of these changes through many years
changes the oak plant into an oak tree.

304 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

The oak tree bears small inconspicuous flowers.

These flowers are of two kinds.

The sterile flowers produce stamens in which many small
powdery grains called pollen grains are found.

The fertile flowers produce pistils.

Each pistil bears two ovules.

The wind carries some of the pollen grains to the tip of
the pistil called the stigma.

The pollen grains grow down through the pistil until they
reach the ovules.

They penetrate into the ovules and fuse with the egg cell.

The egg cell of one ovule grows into a small germ.

The other ovule becomes abortive.

Each pistil now contains but one germ or »eed.

The germ devolps large seed leaves or cotyledons and
stores them with nourishment.

The pistil forms a firm shell around the contained seed.

The calyx of the flower helps to form this shell.

The involucre around the base of the pistil forms a leafy
cup in which the ripened pistil rests.

The leafy involucre and the pistil are together commonly
termed the acorn.

The acorn receives nourishment all during the summer
season from the parent oak.

In autumn the acorn is fully formed or ripe.

The autumn winds begin to blow.

Again an acorn falls from an oak tree.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 305

SUGGESTIONS ON THE WORK.

It is to be assumed that before entering upon the work of
guiding the pupils in constructing a series, the teacher has
clearly in mind, the nature of the entire activity, and also
the form of the various sentences in which this activity is to
be expressed, substantially. The pupil is not assumed to
know either. The work begins with the consideration of
the action. In no case are the sentences to be given to the
child. The pupils are actually to construct each series and
the work is to be largely oral.

The teacher should begin by indicating the purpose of the
activity to be expressed.

The thought underlying the first sentence of the series,
is then to be worked out carefully. For example, in the
series concerning the teakettle the child's attention should
be turned to the entire action expressed by the sentence and
then to the meaning expressed by "near", "window'*,
"kitchen", etc. The sentence which is finally constructed
to express the entire action is to be settled upon only after
careful comparison and discrimination concerning words.
For example, the teacher should lead the children to think
whether it would be more appropriate to employ ' ' stands ' ',
or "am standing"; whether to employ "at," "by" or
"near", etc.

In all this, as above indicated, the sentence is not to be
put before the children in its visible form. It is to be dealt
with only orally. The exact form of the sentence having
been decided upon, it is then to be made the property of
each member of the class orally. In the exercises on this
point the work of the teacher must be controlled closely by
the language act ; that is, he is at all times to lead the pupil :

1. To obtain the meaning (the object in language).

2. To think the expression, (the expression in lan-
guage).

306 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

3. To think their correspondence, (the harmony, the
correspondence in language).

This work in mastering the sentence orally, involves
everything under the" pronunciation, enunciation, modula-
tion, emphasis, etc.

One by one, each sentence of the series is to receive sub-
stantially the same treatment. The series of sentences is to
be so thoroughly learned orally, that the child can begin
with the first partial action of the larger concrete activity,
and both think the various subordinate acts in their true
succession, and express these successive acts by the corre-
sponding oral sentences.

The various natural divisions in the activity are to be
noted by the pupil, and to be indicated in his oral expres-
sion.

The foregoing deal with the actions and the correspond-
ing sentences as a whole. This having been done, each
pupil is to be made able to select the essential element of the
entire action expressed in a sentence; to employ the word
or words expressing it, and thus to move througn the entire
activity, employing only the words asserting the action. In
the series concerning the teakettle, the pupil should give,
"am standing", "am looking", "know", "think", "go",
•"take hold of", "remove", etc.

This kind of work is undertaken in order to give the pupil
the habit of selecting the central action in the entire activ-
ity, and of recognizing especially the vital element in the
sentence — the verb.

In conducting the work upon this and other features, it
is often helpful to have the pupils assist in directing the
work. That is, the pupils may at various times act as
teacher, asking questions, giving directions, expressing the
commendations or cautions concerning the nature of the
work, etc.

THK PROBLEM OF METHOD. 307

The foundation series of sentences constructed by the
pupils should be, as a rule, in the form of the present tense,
third person, singular, indicative mode. This is the natural
expression for the child. In the series above referred to,
the form worked out by the children should be :

She is standing near the kitchen window.

She is looking out of the window, etc.

The pupils should be led to see in any given series the re-
lation of means to end. This should be emphasized. The
action expressed by the first sentence is a means to that ex-
pressed by the second. The action expressed by the second
sentence is a means to that expressed by the third, etc.
While this may not be true in every possible case, it is the
general rule and the controlling thought in determining the
order of the actions to be expressed.

Not only is the action expressed in a given sentence a
means to that expressed in the following sentence, but also
the action in any sentence is the end or result of a series of
subordinate actions. For example, the act of standing near
the kitchen window is the result of a series of preceding
actions all intended to bring about that end. In order to
render the child still more accurate and discriminating in
the choice of words, he should at least once during the study
of each series be led to discover and appropriately to ex-
press the various actions leading up to this one action ex-
pressed by the sentence.

In concluding these general suggestions concerning the
work of any series, three thoughts are worthy of iteration :

1. In considering any action to be expressed by a series
of sentences, the teacher is to view the act as returning to
itself. It is probable that any act in nature or in human
life, viewed in its entirety, would be seen to be, employing
Hegel's significant term, a " return to itself." Work of
this kind will accustom the child to this view of nature.

308 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

2. Under all stages of work, the teacher is to be careful
to present such actions, directions, and illustrations as are
adapted to lead the pupil to think :

a. The object or meaning very clearly and dis-
tinctly.

b. The expression.

c. The correspondence of object and expression.
This threefold movement of thought is the language act.

It is the method in language. As such it is to be constantly
before the teacher in all language work.

As before indicated, the language act in full, is, thinking
the object, creating the purpose, thinking the expression,
and thinking the correspondence between expression on the
one hand, and purpose and object on the other., Since,
however, the special purpose renders the object special, the
purpose is always involved in the object expressed by lan-
guage. For this reason, the language act is here spoken of
as threefold. That is, it is the act of thinking the object,
thinking the expression, and thinking their correspondence.

3. It is very important that the sentences of any given
series should be very clearly understood as to their mean-
ing, and made completely the pupil's own orally, before
moving out into the field of the derived work.

It is evident that the series of sentences expressing any
action, constitutes the bare frame-work for an organized
composition. It is also clear that this composition when
fully organized is of the nature of narration. It Is further
evident that the individual objects to be expressed in de-
scription, the general objects to be expressed in exposition,
and the relations giving rise to argumentation, are found in
the material of each action. In considering the work under
composition :

1. Attention will first be turned to several kinds of pre-
liminary work.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 309

2. Succeeding this, the work of changing the series of
sentences as a bare structure, into a piece of organized dis-
course, will be noted.

3. In the third place brief reference will be given to the
more systematic work under description.

Among the kinds of preliminary work are the following :

a. Under the guidance and suggestion of the teacher
the pupils may be led to select the expressions in the series
of sentences known as subjective language. In the series of
sentences concerning the teakettle there are found such ex-
pressions as "I know," "I think," "I find." This kind
of work should be slight at first, gradually increasing in ex-
actness and importance as the children become more ad-
vanced in the work.

b. Beginning as early, perhaps, as in the third
grade, the children should be led to consider tfie figurative
language based upon the series of sentences studied in the
second grade, and also that based upon those studied in the
third grade. This figurative language is based upon the
separate words in the sentences, and also upon the central
thought pervading the entire action. Some of the figura-
tive expressions to be noted as arising from the series of
sentences expressing the action of filling the teakettle, are
the following:

(1) Based on separate words in the series concern-
ing the teakettle,

(a.) In the sixth sentence. On take. ''Take
fast hold of instruction." Prov. IV-13. On lid. "The
kettle lid, on or off, and the pumper, give a very good pic-
ture of modern theory and practice." Thring's Theory
and Practice of Teaching.

(b.) In the eighth sentence. On continue. "If
ye continue in my word then are ye my disciples indeed. "

310 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

On hand. "He was always reckoned a lively hand at a
simile," etc.

(c.) In the seventeenth sentence. On walk. "Oh!
for a closer walk with God, ' ' etc.

(d.) In the eighteenth sentence. On empty. "I
shall find you empty of that fault. " " Pleased In the silent
shade with empty praise. ' ' On water. i ' Remembering he
had passed over a small water, a poor scholar when first
coming to the university, he kneeled."

(2) Based on the pervading thought, in the
series concerning the teakettle.

The main thought in this series may be duty. This men-
tal attribute may be imaged as a person. It is so imaged in
the following :

"So nigh is grandeur to our dust,

So near is God to man ;
When duty whispers ' I/>, thou must ! '

The youth replies ' I can.' "

Carefulness may be viewed as that with which one is
mainly impressed in studying all the various phases of the
action. An analogy may be discovered between this trait
and a rampart.

Carefulness, in the image of the rampart, may then be
spoken of in a series of sentences.

c. Work with isolated sentences. This work does
not always use the sentence in the exact form in which it
appears in the series. The aim of the work is to make the
child more familiar with the exact significance of words and
with the properties they possess, due to the expression of
their meaning. The different steps in this work are here-
with noted:

(1.) The sentence is changed into the form that
will best lead the child to determine the significance of the
words from their connection in the sentence only. For ex-
ample, if the first sentence in the series embodying the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 311

action of filling the teakettle is used, instead of using It as
it is, the teacher may place it upon the board modified as to
the subject, thus: "It is standing near the kitchen win-
dow."

(2.) The child is then required to image an ap-
propriate environment for the actor and the action. This
is to be set forth in the form of a story, and written upon
slate or paper. One part of the story is to be the sentence
that was placed upon the board. These stories are then to
be read, and, through the suggestion of the teacher and
other pupils, to be modified, condensed, given greater unity,
etc. One of the pupils might present some such story as the
following :

"Yesterday my mother was shopping. In passing one
of the dry goods stores she saw a beautiful doll in the
window. She bought it for me. I was very much de-
lighted with it. I have been playing with It nearly all
morning. I am now through playing with it until after
dinner. It is standing near the kitchen window. This is
not a good place for it. I must take it into the sitting room. ' '

Another might image a different environment, and give
expression to it in a different story, thus :

"This morning I found a young bird under the apple
tree. It was too young to fly. It must have fallen out of
the nest. The rain had been falling for more than an hour,
and the little bird was very wet. I brought it into the
kitchen and placed it under the stove. The air was warm
there and it soon became dry. After a while it began to
walk a very little. I then took it in my hand and put it on
the shelf. It is standing near the kitchen window."

No doubt the stories as first presented upon the slates
would be much more crude in form than these, and much
more fragmentary. They would likewise have much less
unity.

312 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

(3.) On the basis of the various stories the pupil
should be led to see the significance of the different words.
For example, it would be shown him that the word, "it,"
might mean a doll, a bird, etc.

(4) The children should then be led to notice what
may be called the properties of the word, that is, they should
be shown that the word, " it, " means but one object ; that it
means the object spoken of; that it means the object per-
forming the action, etc. Similar work should be taken with
the word, * ' window, ' ' and with the other words of the sen-
tence.*

d. A fourth kind of preliminary work is that in'
which the children substitute for any given expression other
expressions having substantially, though not exactly, the
same meaning, and then decide upon the relative appro-
priateness of the different expressions. This work in sub-
stitution should begin with the verb, then pass to the sub-
ject, and finally to the predicate. Thus in the first sen-
tence the children might substitute for "am standing" the
word, "stand"; for "I," the expression, "the one who is
speaking"; for "near," "by" or "at," etc.

In each case the relative fitness of the different expres-
sions is to be carefully considered. The work is important,
because in an elementary way it both makes a transition to
rhetoric and lays the basis for an intelligent discussion of
the different elements and words in the sentence, when in
later years scientific grammar is entered upon. One great
difficulty that the pupil encounters in determining the force
of the various expressions in a sentence, is his inability to
image corresponding expressions for the expression under
consideration.

e. The four kinds of work indicated grow imme-
diately out of the series of sentences. The fifth kind, now

*See work on Isolated Sentence in " Inland Educator," Vol, III, Jan., 1897, p. 298.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 313

to be considered, changes from the series of sentences con-
structed by the pupils, to some finished selection of dis-
course. This finished selection is examined m order to
find, in the first place, what may be termed the embodied
series of actions, and the expression for it; and in the sec-
ond place, to discover the connective, iterative and ex-
planatory sentences, the rhetorical features of the various
sentences, and whatever else is involved in transmuting a
bare succession of sentences, exhibiting a few successive
actions, into an organized, finished selection in discourse.
The following. furnish material suitable to the explanation
of the work in question :

HOW A PRESIDENT IS MADE.

Despite our boasted education as a people, and in curious
contrast to the tremendous interest we take in elections, it
is doubtful if one voter out of ten can accurately describe
the process by which a President and Vice-President are
made.

Commencing with the choice of electors on the first Tues-
day after the first Monday in November ol presidential
years, the next step is the meeting of these electors at their
several State capitals on the second Monday in January fol-
lowing the election. An act of Congress requires the elec-
tors of all the states to meet on the same day. At this meet-
ing each elector casts his ballot for President and Vice Presi-
dent. He is at perfect liberty to vote for whomsoever he
chooses, but in testimony to the high sense of honor which
pervades the American people it may be said that since the
formation of the government no elector has failed to vote
for the candidate for whom he was elected. After the votes
have been cast they are sealed up and entrusted to one of
the electors, who is designated by his fellows for the pur-
pose, and by him are conveyed to Washington and delivered

314 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

over. These sealed ballots are directed to the President of
the Senate, who opens them in the presence of the House
a,nd Senate, on the second Wednesday 'of the following Feb-
ruary, this joint session being required by law. // it is
found that any candidate for President has received a ma-
jority of the entire electoral vote he is formally declared
elected, and the same is true of the Vice President; but
if no one has received a majority for either of these offices
the joint session dissolves and the House proceeds to elect a
President and the Senate a Vice President.

In voting for President the House is restricted to the
three men who received the highest votes in the Electoral
College. In the House each State is entitled to one vote.
How this vote shall be cast is determined by a majority of
the Congressmen from each State. It makes no difference
how the State may have voted upon electors, a majority of
the Congressmen may determine how it shall vote when the
presidential election is thrown into the House. To elect, a
majority of the entire number of States is required. The
same process is had in the Senate, with the exception that
each Senator has a vote and only the two highest voted for
in the Electoral College may be selected from. In case the
House should get into a deadlock which should last beyond
the 4th of the following March, the Vice President chosen
by the Senate would assume the presidential chair on that
date, thus doing away with the rule so prevalent In political
affairs that an officer holds until his successor is elected and
qualified. The old President must step out, whatever may
be the fate of his presumed successor.

The Constitution did not seem to provide the means of
presidential succession which might be demanded under cer-
tain emergencies, and so the Forty-ninth Congress passed a
bill fixing this succession as follows, in case of the death,
resignation or disability of both the President and Vice

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 315

President: Secretary of State, Secretary of the Treasury,
Secretary of War, Attorney-General, Postmaster-General,
Secretary of the Navy and Secretary of the Interior. It is
provided, however, that before either of thesu may assume
the presidency he must first have been recognized by the
Senate as a Cabinet officer and possess in himself the con-
stitutional requirements of a President.

GOLD LETTERING.

The sign letterer who is putting a gold sign on a window,
paints the letters upon the outside first, but these letters are
only for a guide — the gold is put upon the inside of the
glass. The gold leaf is so thin and light that the faintest
breath would be enough to blow it away — it is carried in the
familiar little books.

The letterer brushes the inner side of the glass, back of
the lettering painted upon the outside, with a brush dipped
in water containing a trace of mucilage. Then with a wide
and very thin camel's hair brush, which he first brushes
lightly back and forth once or twice upon the back of his
head, or perhaps upon his coat, to dry it if it needs drying,
and slightly to electrify it, he lifts from the book a section of
gold leaf sufficient to cover a section of the letter and places
it on the glass. He repeats these operations until the glass
back of the letter painted on the front is covered with the
leaf. It may require three or four sections, such as can be
picked up with the brush to cover the letter, or perhaps
more, depending on its size and shape. When he has com-
pleted the application of the leaf to one letter he dampens
the back of the next and proceeds with that In the same
manner, and so on until the letters are all backed with the
gold leaf.

Thus applied the gold leaf overlaps the letters more or
less on all sides. It is bright in color, like all gold, but it

316 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

is not shining; it is burnished by rubbing it gently on the
back — of course, it cannot be rubbed on the face, for that is
against the glass — with a soft cloth. It burnishes, however,
on the face as well as on the back. Then the letters are
backed. The exact shape of the letter is painted over the
back of the gold leaf to fix and protect it ; and when the back
is dry the gold leaf projecting beyond the outline of the let-
ter is brushed off. It is not sought to save this projecting
leaf; there is not enough of it to pay for the labor that
would be involved in gathering it together. Then the out-
side lettering, which is done with paint that is but little
more than oil, is rubbed off, and the lustrous gold lettering
is revealed.

THE DARK FOREST.

In the midway of this our mortal life

I found me in a gloomy wood astray,

Gone from the path direct : and e'en to tell

It were no easy task, how savage wild

That forest, how robust and rough its growth,

Which to remember only, my dismay

Renews, in bitterness not far from death.

Yet to discourse of what there good befell,

All else will I relate discover'd there.

How first I enter'd it I scarce can say,

Such sleepy dullness in that instant weigh'd

My senses down, when the true path I left;

But when a mountain's foot I reached, where clos'd

The valley, that had pierc'd my heart with dread,

I look'd aloft, and saw his shoulders broad

Already vested with that planet's beam,

Who leads all wanderers safe through every way.

Dante's Inferno, Canto I, lines 1-16.

ON A FELLOW-PASSENGER ASLEEP ON A TRAIN, WITH THE POEMS
OF BION AND MOSCHUS IN HIS HANDS.

Wake, wake him not ; a book lies in his hands.
Bion and Moschus live within his dream.
Tired of our world he fares in other lands,
Wanders with these beside Ilyssus' stream.

Dull, even sweet, the rumble of the train ;
'Tis Circe singing near her golden loom.
No garish show afflicts his charmed brain ;
Demeter's poppies brighten o'er her tomb.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 317

Now, half awake, he looks on star-lit trees-
Sees the white huntress in her eager chase.
Wake, wake him not— upon the fragrant breeze
I^et horn and hound announce h,er rapid pace.
Unbanished gods roam o'er the thimy hills ;
Calm shadows sleep upon the purple grapes.
Hid are the naiads near the star-gemmed rills ;
Far through the moonlight wander lovelorn shapes.

Gray olives shade the dancing dryad's smile ;
Flutes pour their raptures through that visioned stream ;
Echoes like these O"r modern cares beguile —
Soft-whispering music from the old Greek's dream.

Songs of Night and Day, F. W. Gunsaulus,
A. C. McClurg & Co.

It will be noted that two of the selections are prose, ex-
pressing mere facts; and that the two others are poetry,
setting forth idealization.

In order to offer an explanation of the work, tne selection
relating to the election of President and Vice-Presldent is
taken. The other selections could be treated in a similar
manner.

In dealing with a selection in organized discourse, the
first work is to discover the embodied series of actions. This
is shown, substantially, in the article concerning the elec-
tion of President, by means of italics.

The second work is to construct the series of sentences ex-
pressing the elements of the action. In the given case these
may appear somewhat as follows :

1. On the first Tuesday after the first Monday in No-
vember, in Presidential years, the qualified voters of each
state choose the electors for that state.

2. The electors meet at their several state capitals on the
second Monday in January after the election.

3. At this meeting each elector casts his ballot for Presi-
dent and Vice-President.

4. The electors then seal up the ballots.

5. They direct them to the President of the Senate,.
Washington, D. C.

318 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

6. They elect a messenger, usually one of their own
members.

7. The messenger carries the sealed ballots to Washing-
ton.

8. He delivers them to the President of the Senate.

9. On the second Wednesday of the first February after
the election, the Senate and the House of Representatives
convene in joint session.

10. The President of the Senate opens the ballots in the
presence of both Houses.

11. It may be found that one candidate for the Presi-
dency has received a majority of the entire electoral vote.

12. In that case he is formally declared elected to the
Presidency.

13. It may also appear that one candidate for the Vice-
Presidency has received a majority of the ballots.

14. He is then formally declared to be elected to the
Vice-Presidency.

15. It may, however, be found that no one has received
a majority of the electoral votes for the Presidency.

16. It may likewise appear that no one has received a
majority of the votes for the Vice-Presidency.

17. The joint session in such case dissolves.

18. The Senate proceeds to elect a Vice-President.

19. The House enters upon the election of a President.

20. It may be that the House fails to elect the President
before the 4th of the following March.

21. The Vice-President chosen by the Senate, thereupon
assumes the Presidential chair.

22. It is possible that both the Presidency and the Vice-
Presidency may become vacant by means of death, resigna-
tion or disability.

23. The forty-ninth Congress fixed the succession in
such case.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 319

24. The act of the forty-ninth Congress established the
following succession : Secretary of State ; Secretary of the
Treasury; Secretary of War; Attorney General; Post
Master General; Secretary of the Navy, and Secretary of
the Interior.

25. The act provides that the one who becomes Presi-
dent in compliance with this law must have been recognized
by the Senate as a Cabinet Officer.

26. It further ordains that he must possess the constitu-
tional requirements for the Presidency.

The third kind of work is selecting the words that express
the central action in each sentence.

The fourth kind of work is the reconstruction of the sen-
tences on the basis of the verbs, as, for example, on the verb
of the first sentence, choose.

(Who,) voters choose.

(More definite,) qualified voters choose.

( Still more definite, ) the qualified voters choose.

(Fully definite,) the qualified voters in each state choose.

(What,) choose electors.

(More definite,) choose the electors.

(Fully definite,) choose the electors for that state.

(When — year,) choose the electors for that state in Pres-
dential years. ,

(When — month,) choose the electors for that state in
Presidential years in November.

(When — day,) choose the electors for that state in Presi-
dential years in November, on the first Tuesday after the
first Monday.

The fifth kind of work is the further organization of the
sentence, produced by deciding upon the order of the various
expressions. This may place the last expression given
above, showing the day on which the election is to occur, so
as to bring it first in the organized sentence. A high de-

320 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.-

gree of skill in language and power to construct it, may arise
from a consideration of the various advantages accruing
from the different positions of the various expressions.

The sixth kind of work is an examination of the lan-
guage accompanying the expressions revealing the series of
actions. For example, study will reveal that the first sen-
tence is a transitional sentence, in that it connects ideas of
our education and ideas concerning our interest in elections
(both subjects being assumed to be present in the mind of
the reader,) with our ignorance of the process by which
a President and Vice-President are made. This first sen-
tence is also explanatory, its purpose being to reveal why the
writer presents his thoughts concerning the process of elect-
ing the President and Vice-President. In the second sen-
tence the expressions, "commencing with" and "the next
step, ' ' are transitional. A sentence may be iterative, in that
it may present activities a second time, etc. From this it
will be observed that the main kinds of sentences required
in order to change the mere series of sentences into 'or-
ganized discourse are three :

Transitional sentences.

Iterative sentences.

Explanatory sentences.

In connection with each separate sentence, and also with
the sentences expressing the series of actions, certain rhet-
orical features are always involved in organized discourse.
These are shown in :

Arrangement.

Employment of subjective sentences.

Employment of figurative expressions including both
figures of speech and figures of thought.

A rhetorical feature produced by the arrangement is
shown in beginning the first sentence with "Despite our
boasted education, etc. ' ', instead of beginning it with ' * One

THE: PROBLEM OF METHOD. 321

voter out of ten, etc." Among the subjective expressions
are, "The interest we take", "It is doubtful." Among
the figurative expressions are, ' * The tremendous interest we
take", "The next step", "High sense of honor", "Get into
a dead-lock ", " An officer holds ", " Must step out ' '. It will
be noted that many of the figurative expressions are also
subjective expressions. In the expression, * ' The House pro-
ceeds to elect a President and the Senate a Vice President ' ',
a figure of speech is found. One is also found in the enu-
meration of the n jmbers of the Cabinet, indicating their
order of succeeding to the Presidency. When these rhet-
orical features have been discovered, it is important that
the pupils be led to consider their effect.

This finishes the treatment of the selection of organized
discourse. Equipped with the new power arising from such
work, the pupil is now able to turn to any one of the bare
series he has previously constructed, and transform it into
organized discourse. In doing this attention should be given
to several things :

1. The order of the different expressions in any given
sentence should be noted, and the advantage of any change
brought out. For example, the pupils may be led to com-
pare the following in reference to the first sentence in the
series concerning the kettle: "I am standing near the
kitchen window." "Near the kitchen window, I am stand-
ing. " " Standing near the kitchen window, am I. ' ' Under
order should be noted in the second case, the order of the
successive sentences.

2. The work succeeding the consideration of order is an
examination as to the combinations that may be made.
These combinations might appear as f ollows : " I am stand-
ing near the kitchen window, looking out of it. " "I know
the teakettle is empty, and yet I think of it as filled." "I

322 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

then go to the stove and take hold of the knob on the lid of
the teakettle, etc."

3. The third kind of work is what may be called the
elaboration of the series. It consists in the appropriate em-
ployment of transitional sentences, iterative sentences, sub-
jective sentences, explanatory sentences, and the use of
various rhetorical features, such as transposition, figures of
thought, etc. The following, prepared by students, may
furnish sufficient illustration of this elaboration of the bare
series of sentences:

a. We can realize how much is to be done before
our end is accomplished when we want to build a house, ob-
tain a copy-right, or receive a degree at college, but how
little do we realize the many, many little acts that must be
performed before we have accomplished one, even one of
the least, of the acts in the sphere of the family, as for ex-
ample, that of filling the teakettle. I will here call atten-
tion to one set of conditions under which this act once oc-
curred. The cook, while waiting for her mistress, stood
near the kitchen window watching the little birds bathing
in the puddles of water which remained after a hard morn-
ing shower. While standing there she was reminded of the
teakettle she had left on the stove almost empty. She im-
mediately imaged it as filled, and walked to the stove to
remove the lid from the steaming kettle. She held the lid
in one hand while she walked to the bucket of water which
was on the table. She reached for the dipper which hung
in the usual place on a nail just above the bucket. She
took hold of the dipper near the bowl, so that she would be
less apt to spill the water, and filled it with water. Hav-
ing filled the dipper, she returned to the stove to empty the
water into the kettle. She repeated this action three
times, thinking the kettle would then be sufficiently full.

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 323

And so it was. Then she replaced the lid on the teakettle,
and hung the dipper in its usual place, for she was always
particular that things should be kept in their proper places.
After she had completed this she returned to the window
and continued watching the little birds for her mistress
had not returned from market.

b. It is a cold December day and Mary is standing
near the kitchen window, looking out upon a charming
snow scene. She thinks that the little snow-covered fir tree
on the hill lacks only candles to complete it, and she also
thinks of her papa and mamma, who have gone to town on
a mysterious errand.

Her face wears a bright expression, for she remembers
her mother's parting words, "I feel that I can trust you,
Mary, to keep the fire bright and the kettle boiling."

This thought reminds her that the teakettle is probably
empty and must be filled at once. So she goes to the stove,
and taking hold of the knob, lifts the lid from the teaket-
tle. Still holding it in her left hand, she passes to the
water-bucket and removes the dipper from its accustomed
nail near by.

Now, Mary is such a small girl that it is not easy for her
to dip water without spilling it, so she grasps the handle
quite near the bowl, to prevent such an accident. She fills
her dipper, and returning to the stove, very carefully pours
its contents into the teakettle. It takes three dipperfuls,
so that her chubby arms ache by the time she has finished.

She replaces the lid, hangs up the dipper, and returning
to the window, looks again at the fir tree which is soon to
bear candles, and waits patiently for the return of her papa
and mamma.

c. On a bright and sunny day I stand near the
kitchen window, watching some birds as they pick up the

324 THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

crumbs. As I do this, the clock gives warning of the ap-
proaching dinner hour. I know that the teakettle is empty
and at once think of it as being full. I walk to the stove
and remove the teakettle lid. As I hold it in my hand I
walk to the water-bucket, and finding the dipper hanging
on a nail above the bucket, I take hold of the handle of the
dipper close to the bowl in order to carry the water more
easily. I take one dipperful and empty it into the teaket-
tle. I pour in two more dipper fuls and then the teakettle
is full. Placing the lid on the teakettle so that the water
will boil sooner, I hang the dipper in place again. I resume
my position at the window and again look out.

d. It was a clear, cold day in November, and the
bright fire in Farmer Jones' comfortable kitchen sent out a
cheerful glow. Mrs. Jones hurried to and fro, for a great
many things had to be done on this particular morning.
To-morrow would be Thanksgiving and a number of guests
were expected. The farmer had gone into the village quite
early to purchase groceries, and now Mrs. Jones was ex-
pecting to hear the sound of old Doll's feet on the hard
frozen road at any minute, for she must have those things
to finish her baking. She left the table, where she was at
work, and was standing near the window looking out. Just
then she heard a queer, sizzing noise, and remembered that
the teakettle was empty. It must be filled, for she would
need hot water to scald the turkey. So she hurried to the
stove, took hold of the lid of the teakettle and removed it.
Holding it in her hand, she walked to the water bucket
which stood on the table. Mrs. Jones was a very neat
housekeeper and always kept things in their proper places.
Just back of the bucket hung the dipper on a nail. She
took it down, and filling it with water, poured the contents
into the teakettle, all the while grasping the handle near the

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD. 325

bowl, for she was so much afraid of spilling the water on
her new carpet. This she did three times. She then put the
lid on the kettle and hung the dipper in its place. Surely
by this time Doll must be in sight, so she returned to the
window and again looked out. Just then the horse's feet
came clattering up the pike.

326

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

APPENDIX II.

OBSERVATION OF THE PSYCHICAL PROCESS IN
A LESSON.

FORM THAT MAY BE USED IN RECORDING RESULTS.
I. State the object (i. e., that which receives the focus of attention,
that which is being known,) in the following activities in so far
as the process of learning the lesson involved them. The object
of memory is that which the pupil remembers; the object
of imagination is the modified object of which the pupil be-
comes aware in an act of imagining, etc.

Perceiving the object as a whole

1. Sense-percep-
tion . . . J Analytic perceiving

Apperceiving
Spontaneous.
Memory . . .Voluntary...

Systematic

Mechanical.

With present object

With absent object...

Seperative.
Imagination .1 With language.

With picture, or externality of a work of art

Productive

Creative ^ ""."

Interpretative

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

Productive ...

327

4. Language
act .

Interpretative.

5. Understand-
ing . .

Apprehension..

Distinction.
Abstraction

Discrimination

Comparison.

Classification.
As a whole

With respect to cause...

With respect to effects.

As to central meaning...

r As to meaning of single object ....

6. Conception . <

As to common attributes

As to creative activity _..

I

328

THE PROBLEM OF METHOD.

Immediate

Conditional.

7. Judgment

Definitive (i. e., in form of definition) ...

Identification..

8. Reasoning Induction „-

Deduction

II. What was the characteristic process of the lesson?

1. Give the stages in this process a§ involved in this lesson.

Student..:. Grade

Date Subject

Teacher...

INDEX.

Page.

Abstraction 127, 209

Action, Embodied Series of 313,
317.

Activity, concrete 27

Moral 156

Admiration 274

Alienation .' . . . 34

Allegory '45

Analysis 10

Of Process of Knowing 177

Into Cause and Effect 233

Of Literary Selection 31

Antipathy . . , 268

Antithesis 146

Aphaeresis 144

Apocope 144

Apostrophe 144

Apperceiving 179

Apperception 160

Apprehension 166, 201

Art Product 235

Aspects 153

Assignment 237, 239

Association 146

Asyndeton 144

Attention 249

Attribute 9, 167

Behavior 155, 157, 285, 286

Bible Study, Method In 63

Characteristic —

Central (in a lesson) 253

Structural (of object) 261

Page.

Choice 283

Cheerfulness 272

Classification 166, 201

Climax 146

Coherence 141

Comparison . . . : 127, 201

The Figure of 145

Composition 121

Concept 206

Conception 206

Concrete Activity 27

View in History 35

Conditional Judgment 216

Conscience 283

Content 144, 262

Figures of 145, 146

Contrast 146

Courage 280

Covetousness 269

Creative Imagination 191, 194

Deduction 175, 228

Definitive Judgment 216

Desire 282

Devices 12, 150, 190, 193, 244

Special 150

Differentiated Unity 10

Discouragement 271

Discourse 148

Discrimination 127, 201, 283

Distinguishing Mark 9

Distinction, 135, 138, 143, 146,

147, 166, 201.
Divisions, relative importance

of .19

1 .

INDEX.

Page.
Education, Central Principle

of 248

Egoistic Feelings 269

Element, initial 183

Ellipsis 144

Environment 137

Analogous 236

Envy 269

Epanalepsis 144

Epigram 146

Epizeuxis 145

Extent 262

Faith 270

Figurative Language, 135, 144,

309.
Form 144

Figures of 144, 145

Freedom 243, 279

Fundamental Movement of Mind,

10.

Divisions in Composition .... 121

Generalization 100, 233

Generic 213, 214, 215

Genetic 121

Hope 270

Humility 268

Hypothesis 100

Idea, dominant 153

Structural 234

Ideal 285

Idealization 258

Identification 172, 224,266

Identifying 166

Image 158, 159

Function of . ..232

Page.

Imagination 161, 164

Immediate Judgment . . . . 216

Immediacy 26

Independence 288

Induction 100, 173, 224

Interest 13, 278

Interpretation 164

Interrogation 146

Irony 146

Isolation 29

Jealousy 269

Judging 170

Judgment 215

Knowing, Analysis of Process. 177
Knowledge, Total 286

Language, Subjective. . . .135, 309
Figurative ....... 135, 144, 309

Series of Sentences 291, 304

Language Activity 128, 164, 195,
196, 197, 258, 305, 308.

Laws, of Discourse 148

Limit, Consciousness or. . .158, 288

Limitation 154

Love 275

Malice 269

Material, Subject Matter 9

Means 12, 24

Mechanical Imagination. 189,. .190

Mediated Kelation 224

Memorization 127, 195

Memory 161, 182, 189

Mental Effects 22

Metaphor 145

Method 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 14, 16, 26,
35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 112, 113.

INDKX.

m.

Page.

First view of 36, 37, 107

Second view of 36, 37, 108

Third view of 37, 108

Province of 16

Objective 17

Special 26

Subjective 20

Scientific 117

Psychologic 118

In Language 215,308

In a Lesson 153

In a Subject 120

Metonomy 146

Mind, Fundamental Movement

of 10

Mnemonic Device 161, 187

Moral Activity 156

Nature of Method 8

Of Consciousness 36

Of Language Process 128

Of Knowing (General) 158

Object 35, 108, 158

Objectification 165

Onomatopoetic words 141

Organizing Principle, 9, 38, 121

153.
Organized Unity 27

Particular, The 215, 236

Perception 159, 177

Personification 145

Pleonasm 144

Plot 141

Polysyndeton 145

Potential Condition 154

Pride 268

Premise, major, minor 173

Page.

Presentation 159, 177

Presentiment 30, 32

Principles—

Pedagogical, 180, 189, 194, 199,
206, 214, 222, 227, 231, 248.
Organizing, 9, 38, 121, 153

Process 154

Objectifying 155, 253

Subjectifying 157

Orderly 252

Purpose 188

Of an Assignment 240

Of Life 188,242, 279

Of a Lesson 188

Special 243

General 243

Psychical Process in a Lesson
—Form of Record 326, 328

Eatiocination -. 168, 206

Rational Institutions 288

Eeasoning 128, 168, 170, 223

Recollection 185

Representation l&l

Reproductive Imagination 190

Righteousness 280

Rules of School 287

Series of Sentences, Elabora-
tion of 321, 325

Scholarship 16

Province of 25

Science 25

Scope 10, 16, 20

In Composition 121

Self -estrangement 190

Self-determination, 154, 241, 245,.

248.

Self -direction . ...28&

IV.

INDEX.

Page.

Sensation 160

Sense-perception 177

Sensing 178

Separative Imagination, 190, 191

Simile 145

Specialist, Qualifications of 13, 14

Special Method 26

Spontaneity 131

Spontaneous Memory .... 161, 182

Steps 10, 99, 100, 240

Mental 20

Characteristic 241

Subject 36, 108

Subject Matter, 9, 236, 237, 238,
239, 284.

Subect-Object 37, 127

Subjective Language 309

Subjective Method 20

Subjective — Objective 157

Substitution 312

Stage, Separative . , 157

Symbolic Language, 135, 144, 147

Sympathy 246, 267

Syncope 144

Synecdoche 146

Synthesis 143

Systematic Memory 161, 186

Temperance 280

Theory 100

Page.

Thought 164, 199

Truth, scientific 100

Understanding 166, 169

Undiff erentiated, activity 32

Object 230

Unifying 167

Unity 26, 27,154

Fused 26, 27

Differentiated 10, 37

Mediated 29

Organized 10, 27

Universal, The 215

In a Lesson 235

Verification 100

Visualization 140

Voluntary Memory 161, 184

Will, objectified 35

Wisdom 280

Work-
Analytic (In language), 135, 143
Constructive (In language,) 138,
148.

With isolated sentences 310

Suggestions for, in Lan-
guage 305, 321

Preliminary in Language . . . 309
With completed selection. . .313

Wonder .. ..273

677891

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY